THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL OF THE OTCHIPWE LANGU AGE, THE LANGUAGE SPOREN BY THE CHIPPEWA INDIANS ; WH1CH IS ALSO SPOREN BY THE ALGONQUIN, OTAWA AND POTAVV ATAMI INDIANS, W1TH LITTLE DIFFERENCE. FOR THE USE OF MISSIONARIES AND OTHER PERSONS LIV1NG AMONG THE INDIANS Of the above named tribes. BY THE REV. FREDERICK BARAGA, , p\ d, t-, g, k. It is impossible to ascertain, by the pronun¬ ciation of the Indians, the correct orthography of some vvords commencing vvith these letters, or containing them. So, for instance,in a vvord beginning vvith b, you vvilloften hear the Indians pronounce this b like p ; and sometimes like b. Or if the vvord begins vvith a p, they vvill pronouce it at one time p, and at another b. And the same they do vvith d and t, vvith g and k. They confound very frequenty these consonants. We also see in letters vvritten by Indians in their ovvn language, hovv they confound b vvith p', d vvith t: g vvith k; not only in the beginning, but also in the middle and at the end of vvords, As a general rule for the right use of these six consonats, when they terminale the word, take this : In order to knovv vvhether b or p, d or t, g or k, terminate the vvord, (vvhich you ordinarily cannot ascertain from the Indian pronunci¬ ation,) prolong the vvord, that is, add a syllable, by forming the plural, or making some other change, and you vvill find the true final letter. 13 Examples. The word jingob, a fir-tree, is often pronounced jingop. To ascertain ivhether b or p is the fina! letter of this word, form the plural by adding ig, and you will havejingobig, where b is distinctly sounded. The words gijig, wed, L’Anse ; Mangosid, Loonsfoot. A common noun or substantive is the name applied to ali persoBS or things of the same kind; as, inini, man; ikwe i 17 woman ; maingan, wolf; animosli, dog ; mitig, tree ; adop* Owin, table. OF GENDER. Gender is the distinction of substantives with regard to sex, Almost ali languages make a difference in their arti- cles and adjectives, when they apply them to substantives of the three different genders, the masculine, feminine and Muter. But the English language employs the same arti, cle hnd the same adjective before substantives of the three genders. And so does the Otchipvve language'.' - For per- bojjs and things of both sexes, and of those that belong to uone, the same adjective is used. F. i. mino inini, a good Inau ; mino ikwe, a good vvoman ; mino irigiuam, a good house; gwandtch kwiwisens, a beautiful hov; gicandtch ikwe- Wis,a beautiful girl: givandtch masinaigan,a beautiful book, But the Otchipvve language goes yet a step farther : even in the pronoun there is no distinction of gender made; win »ignifies he, she and it. But as the distinction of the two eexes is necessary in certain circumstances, the Otchipvve language, (like other languages.) has some different tcords for individuals of the two sexes. Examples. Mase. Fem, Ogima, chief or king: Inini, man; Fmwisens, boy; Noss, my father ; Ningtciss, my son; ogimakuce, queen. ikwe, woman. ikwesens, girl. ningd, my mother. ninddniss, my daughter. frissaie, my elder brother ; nimisse, my elder sister. Nimishomiss, my grand-father ; nokomiss, my grand-mother And a variety of other terms of relationship, and express- tons of friendship. Instead of the English mode of distinguishing the two Bexes, byprefixing he to substantives for the masculine, and ihe for the feminine sex, the Otchipvve language contrives the distinction in the follovving manners, viz : 18 1. By prefixingthe word nd.be, (male,) to substantives of the masculine gender, andens t a sipali village, etc. For the pZizraZ of the diminutives, see page 21 and 24, OF THE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES. Čase, in the grammatical language, is the position or state*of a substantive, with regard to other vvords in the same sentence. The Otchipwe substantives have four cases, viz : the Nominative, Possessive, Objective, and Vocative. The Nominitive denotes simply the name of a person or thing, or the subject of the verb. Esamples of the nomina¬ tive čase ar ali the substantives of the Dictionary, from the first to the last, The Objective denotes the object of some action or rela- tion. It does not differ from the nominative in its con- struction, except in the third person of the personal pro- nouns, whore the nominative is win, winawa, he, she, it, they; and the objective is o, him, her, it, t.hem, The Possessive expresses the relation of property or pos- session. This possessive čase is expressed in Otchipvve by putting o br od betvveen the two substantives, of which one corresponds to the English nominative, and the other to the possessive. The position of the two substantives is thesame as in English; the possessive comes first, and then the nomi¬ native ; and instead of the letter s with an apostrophe be- fore it, which is put in English betvveen the possessive and the nominative, \ve put in Otchipwe o or od, (vvhich proper- Iy signifies kis or her.) We put o before nominatives that begin with a consonant, and od before those that begin with a vowel. But sometimes this o is inseparably connected 'vitli the possessive, and sometimes changed into w. (This will be better understood after the study of the possessive pronoun.) 40 EXAMPLE8 OF THE POSSESSIVE ČASE. Nin gi-bidon John o masinaigan, I have brought John’s book. Anindi noss o sakaon 1 ivhere is my father’s cane ? Ki widigemagan od inaioemaganan, thy wife’s relatives. Nin wi-gishpinadon kissaie o icakaigan, I will buy thy brother’s house. Meno-ijiwi‘bisid inini od inendamoirinan, a good ’ man’s thoughts. Kitchi ogima ogvi.ssdn gi-mbowan, the King’s son is dead. Kikinoamdgetvinini wiwan akosiivan, the school teacher’s wife is sick. Nissaie o tchiman, my brother’s canoe. Kimisse od ana- kan, thy sister’s mat. Noss od assabin, my father’s nets. Aio inini ojisheian, that man’s grand children. The Vocative is used in calling persons or other objects. It is double, singular and plural. The vocative in the singular number is only employed in calling proper names, or terms of relationship. Other substantives are not susceptible of this vocative ; or rather, their vocative is like the nominative. They undergo no change in the vocative. I. RULES F0R THE FORMATION OF THE VOCATIVE SINGULAR. Rule 1. Proper names of vvomen, ending in kwe, reject the tivo last letters, w and e, to form the vocative. F. i. Gijigoktoe, voc. Gijigok !— Windigokwe, voc. Windi- gok ! Ogdkioe, voc. Ogdk !—Nodinokioe, voc. Nodinok! Olawdkwe, voc. Otawak ! Rule 2. The proper names of men and vvomen, ending in a voioel, cut off this voivel for the vocative. F. i. Nijode, voc. Nijod !—Abinodji voc. Abinodj. Rule 3. Terms of relationship, ending in a vowel, reject this voivel, to form the vocative. F. i. Nita, my brother-in- law;voc. nit!—Nijishe, my uncle, (mymoM we, us, V ( ninminnd, or kinaioind, | ’ Sec. person: i T g ' or kin ’ thou > thee ’ ( plur. ktnawa, ki, you, / sing. win, he, she, it, t . • , ., .. Ti,: „„„„ 1 6 ! o, him, her, it, them, 1 n person : < > ’ ,.’ . j , . ,, | (obiective čase.) (plur. winaioa, they, ) ' J Remark 1. Tothe pronouns nin and ki, aeuphonical d is attached, when the follovving verb commences with a vowel; as, nind ija, I go; kid anoki, thou workest; nind in.enda.min. \ye think ; kid indica, you teli him, etc. 44 There are analogous cases of such euphonical letters also in other languages. In French the letter t is inserted be- tvveen the verb and pronoun in some instances to avoid a cacopbonical accumulation of vovvels ; as,y m a-t-il? aime- t-on ? etc, There is another analogy to our čase in the Ital- ian lahguage. When the conjunctions e and o, and the preposition a are follovved by a word beginning with a vovv- el, a euphonical d is attached to them; as vol ed io stesso ; io od ogni altro ; ad un certo passo . . ., etc. There are also in the Chapter of Verbs so’me such interpositions of the euphonical d, (od, ged~, gad-.) It must, hovvever, be observed, that this d, although generally used, may also sometimes be omitted. We may say : Mi ge-ijiieebak, instead of mi geddjiwebak, so it will happen. Mi ge-ing, so it will be, or be it so. Mi aw ge-ijad, this one will go. In the Otaina dialect the eupho¬ nical d is more frequently omitted than in the Otchipioe. As'we are speaking of euphonical letters, vve must men- tion one more, which is used in this language, It is the letter i, which is sometimes prefixed to the particles go, ko, na, and sa, and to the conjunctions dash and gaie, when the word preceding them, ends in a consonant, to avoid a disagreeable crovvd of consonants; as, win igo, he himself od inan iko, he uses to teli him ; ki nmdaw ina ? dost thou ; hear met ki kikendass isa, thou art learned: nongomidash, but now; nin igaie, I also. But it must again be observed, that the interposition of this euphonical i is not absolutely necessary ; and I remarked among the Indians, that it is more usual in some places than in others ; and more fre- quently employed by old grave speakers than by young folks. It is also more frequently used in speaking than in vvriting. Be it finally remarked, that the same vowel is again used in Italian, to prevent a crowd of consonants. Remark 2. The first person in the plural, we, is express- ed in Otchipwe by nin or ki, by ninamind or kinainind.— Nin or ki is employed in the immediate connexion vvith the verb; as, nin nagamomin, vre sing; ki pisindamin, we listen, But when the pronoun, is pot connected vvith the 45 verb, ninamind or kinawind is employed for me; as, amenc- nag igiw negamodjig ? Ninamind sa. Who are those thatsing? Wedo. Amenenag igiw pssindangigl Kin- amind sa. Who are those that listen? \Ve do. Remark 3. Although the pronouns nin and ki, ninamind and kinamind, ali signifiy me, the difference between nin and ki, and between ninamind and kinaicimd, is material, and must \vell be kept in memory, fo» the right use of them. 1. Nin or ninamind is employed, when those that speak, do not include in their number the person or persons whom they speak to. F. i., nin nagamomin, we sing, (we that speak now, not the person or persons to whom we speak.) And likewise ninamind, that is, we only that speak, not the person or persons spoken to. 2. Ki or kinamind is used, when those that speak, in¬ clude in their number the person or persons to whom they speak. F. i., ki pisindamin, we listen, (vvethat speak, and the person or persons to whom we speak.) And so also kinamind, we altogether, those that speak, and those that are spoken to. Nata bene. Please mind well this difference between nin and ki, ninamind and kinamnd. You will have to make use of it throughout this Grammar. Remark 4. The Otchipvve language, like ali other prini- itive and ancient languages, does not use the second person plural in addressing a person to whom respect is shown ; the second person singular is invariably employed, may the person addressed be on the lonest or highest degree of res- pectability, You have seen this already in many of the preceding examples, In English such addresses sound ra- ther rough and unusual, (except among Quakers.) But in order to give exactly the meaning of the Otchipvve phrases in English, I always retain the second person singular also in English. Be it generally remarked here, that the En¬ glish portion of ali the examples of this Grammar could be much better than it is, but I try to accommodate the trans« 46 iation as much as can be, to the original, in order to give to the learner a clearer understanding of the Otchipvve sen- tences, II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Possesive Pronouns are those which mark possession or property. They may be divided in two classes, viz: those tkat immediately precede a substantive, which we may call conjunctive possessive pronouns ; and those that stand sep- arated from it, which can be named rdative possessive pro¬ nouns. First class ; Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns, i Nin, my; { Nin or ki, our; Sing. •< ki, thy ; Plur. < ki, your ; ’ o, his, her, its. * o, their. These pronouns are always placed immediatelg before a substantive, or before an adjective proper that may precede a substantive. Examples. Nin mindjikdwanag bij, bring me my gloves, (mittens.) Bisikan ki w'iwakwan, put on thy hat. Mi aw hwivmisens saidgitod o masindigan, this is the boy that likes his book. Kimisse osam o minmcndan o wabmotchitchagwan, thy sis- ter likes too much her looking-glass. Nin sagia aio abinodji; mi ow o wiwakwanens, I like this child ; here is its little bonnet. Anindi nin tchimaninan? AVhere is our canoe? Ka mika ta-nibossiwag ki tcliitchdgonanig , our souls tvill never die. Anin enda-shimd ki manislitdnisliimiieag ? W h at is the number of your sheep 1 Mij ogoio kwiwisensag o masinaiganiuan, give to these boys their books. Batainoioan o niino dodamowinan, his (her) good deeds are many. 47 Nin jingendan nin matcld ijiwebisiwin, I hate my bad conduct. Ki gete masinaigan aionkikinoamading, kid oshki masinai¬ gan dash mino ganau-endan, make use of thy old book at school, and take well čare of thy new book. Second class; Relative Possessive Pronouns. c Nin, mine ; ( Ninaicind, or kinaioind, Sing. < kin, thine ; Plur. < kinawa, yours; [ours; ( ivin, his, hers ; ( winawa, theirs. These pronhuns are not in immediate connexion with the substantive to which tbey allude, but are separated from it by one or more words, vvhich precede or follotv the sub¬ stantive. Examples. Nin ganabatch nin nokoman oiv. E, nin sa, nin nissitd- winan. This is perhaps my knife. Yes it is mine, I re- cognise it. Kin ganabatch ki moshicem ^a-mikawag. Kin sa, nind in- endam. It is perhaps thy handkerchief I found. It is thine, I think. Win na o pakitbigan vio ? E, win sa. Is this his (her). hammer ? Yes it his (hers.) Kinaioa na ki wakaiganiwa ow ? Kamin ninatoind. Is this your house? No it is not ours. Kinaioind na geget kid akimlnan kakina iw ? E, kinaioind sa kakina. Is that indeed ali our land ! Yes it is ali ours. Ninaioind na nin tchimaninan ho ? Kaioin, kinaioa, nind inendam. Is that our canoe 7 No, it is yours, 1 think. Winawa na od assabiioan banddisiwan ? E, winawa sa. Are their nets lost 1 Yes theirs. Remark 1. You see by these examples, that, vvhenever the possessive pronoun is not immediately before the substan¬ tive, one of the second class is employed Remark 2. What has been said in theprecedingnumber 48 of the euphonical d, is to be applied to the pronouns ofthis number likevvise. So, you will say : Nin babisikawagan, my coat; but you will have to say, nind andkan, my mat. Ki makisin, thy shoe; but, kid ondgctn, thy plate. O dodamoimn, his doing; but, od anamiewin, his religion. Remark 3. The difference between nin and kin, ours ; ninatcind and kinaivind, ours ; is the same as stated above in Remark 3, of the preceding number. (p. 45.) The use of the Otchipvve possessive prononns is difficult. The difficulty is not created by the pronouns themselves, vvhich are simple ; but by the substantives that follow them. To employ correctly these pronouns with their substan¬ tives, attention must be paid to the substantive or houn, to know whether it is animate or inanimate. (See pages 18 and 19.) We will here first consider the use of the possessive pro¬ nouns with inauimale substanttves. A. Possessive Pronouns with inanimate Substantives. Form 1. t Nin tchiman, my canoe, Singular. < ki tchiman, thy canoe, ( o tchiman, his (her) canoe. ( nin tchimanan, my canoes, Plural. • ki tchimanan, thy canoes, l. o tchimanan, his (her) canoe. 'Nin tchimamnan, I Sin ular < tchimamnan, J ° Ur canoe > K m o u ar ' ] ki tchimanivva, your canoe, o tchimaniv/a, their canoe. f nin tchimajiinanin, ) Plural J tchimanmanm, ) our canoes > j ki tchimamnan, your canoes, I o tchimamnan, their canoes, 49 After this form may be constructed ali the inanimate sub- stantives with their possessive pronouns, that add the sylla- ble an for the plural, as : Nin nabikivan, my vessel. Nin masinaigan, my book. Nishtigwan, mf head. Ninih, my arm. Nindon, iny mouth. Nitawag, my ear. Nind apabiwin, my chair. Nin mohoman, my knife. Nin icakdigan, my house. Nisid, my foot. Nilcdd, my leg. Nikdn, my bone. N.bid, my tooth. Nind adopotoin, my table. Remark. In regard to the orthography of some words in this list, and of many others of this description in the fol- lovving forms, it is necessary to observe, that I adopted the rule, as vvell for the inanimate as animate substantives, to 'write the possessive pronoun with its substantive in one word, ivhenever (mind this well) ivhenever the substantive is such as never to be used alone, separated front its possessive pronoun. So, for instance, nishtigiodn, my head, The word shtigiean is never used in the Otchipwe language, it is no word of this language. It must always have a posses* sive pronoun before it, and is inseparable frora it, Of the same kind are : Ninih, nindon, nisid, nikdn, nishkinjig; niiaw, niiass. Noss, ningd, nokomiss, nojislte, nita, ninim, nissim, nishime, nissaie, nidjikiwi, nindungwe, ningioiss, ninddniss, etc. etc,—These and other vvouds of this .kind, are never pronounced without a possessive pronoun. Why and how shall we then separate them in writiug? What the most ancient usage of the language has connected, the individual vrriter ought not to separate, Here is a little sub-form for this kind of substantives, with their possessive pronouns, ( Nikdn, my bone, Singular. < kikan, thy bone, ( okan, his (her) bone. ( ni' anan, my bones, Plural < kikanan, thy bones, (. okanan, his (her) bones. 50 C Nikaninan, ) , F ,■ • > our bone, , ! /a/raMinan, ! mgu ar. < ^ z 7 t - BW j wa) your bone, t okam\va, their bone. r s;iamnanin, ) w ... . ’ > our Iftmes, , ) kikanmanin, t Plural. <7-i • , l kikamwan, your bones, (_ okanmim, their bones. Note. Some of these words, denoting parts of the human body, terminate in the second plural in ananin, as, nisid, my foot; Tižsir/ananin, our feet. Likewise ninlk, nay arm; nikad, my leg; 'nitdmag, my ear ; nibid, my tooth. Some words of this, and of the following forms, change the pos- sessive pronoun of the third person, o, into wi, as, nibid, my tooth; imbid, his . tooth. And many others in other forms, inanimate and animate. Exampi.es. Nibid nind akosin; I have toothache, (pain in one tooth.) Wtbidm. od akosinan; he has toothache, (pain in more than one tooth.) Kakina kid dkosimin kish:tigwdn\nan'm ; we have ali head- ache, (we ali have pain in our heads.) Wdbang ta-mddjiiassin ki ndbikicarimun ; our vessel vvill leave to-morrpvv, Mamitchdwan ki ndbikwa.niw:ai ; your vessels are large. Takwdmagad ki bimddisiicininan orna aking; our life on earth is short. Antoenindisoda, andjitoda kid ijiweblsiwinnvm, ki ga-gas- siamagonan dash Debeniminang ki batadomninamn; Let us repent and change our conduct, (our life) and our Lord will blot out our sins, Debenimiiang, bonigidetawishinam nin batddo,ioin'm our box, o- , I ki makakona.11, I . = ’ ] ki makakovra, your box, L o makakovra, their box. nin makakonanin, ) . , ,. , , . ’ > our boxes, Plural ma k a ' c onanin, j ki makakowan, your boxes, o makakmvan, their boxes. After this form can be formed ali the inanimate substan- tives with their possessive pronouns, that add the syllable on to the singular to form the plural; as : Nin wigwdssiwigamig, my Nin wagakwad, my axe. lodge. Nishkinjig, my eye, or my Nind ajaiveshk, my sword. face. e • Examples. Mambda ki wagdkwadonan\n, awi-manisSeda; let Us take our axes, and let us go and chop wood. JUanddadon ki wagdkwadowan, atoashime onijishin nin nin wagdkwad; your axes are bad, my axe is better. Kid akosin na kishkinjig ? Is thy eye sore ? Gega o gi-toanitonan oshkinjigon; he almost lost his eyes. 53 Nijinon nangtcana kid ajaioeskkcm ; thou hast then two swords. Mddjidon ki makak; gaie kinatva madjidoiog ki makak- owan ; carry away thy box; and you also carry away your boxes. Remark. We could take the three forms in one only, and say that the mutative vowel* vvhich is a in the first form, i in the second, and o in the third, makes the only difference in the terminations. But I tliink that for the beginner it vvill be easier to have the forms before him de- tailed according to the three diiferent mutative votvels. Learners that are more advanced, may take the three forms in one. OF THE POSSESSIVE TERMINATIONS. The ipanimate substantives with possessive pronouns take sometimes the terminations m, im, or oni, which may be called in the Otchipvve Grammar the possessive termina¬ tions, because they are annexed to substantives with pos¬ sessive pronouns, in order to express more emphatically properly or possession. F. i. Nind akt, my land, my farm ; nind akim, my own piece of land ; nin kijdpikisigdns, my little stove; nin kijapikisigansim, my own little stove. Nin ivdgakioad, my ase ; nin wagakwadom, my own axe. There are three rules for the annexation of the posses¬ sive terminations to inanimate substantives; viz : Rule 1. Inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns, which terminate in a vowel, take the possessive termina- tion m ; as, Nin misktoi, my blood ; nin miskioim, ki misk- wim, o miskioim, my, thy, his own blood. Nin mashkiki, my medicine ; nin mashkikim, etc. Nin šibi, my river ; nin šibim, o šibim, etc. * You will find a Note on the mutative vowel in the next Chapter, in the enumeration of the diiferent kinds of verbs. As far as this mutative vowel is concerned here, you may cali it thus j The voivel with which the terminations of these forms commence. 4 54 Rlle 2. Inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns, which form their plural by adding on, take the possessive termination om ; as, Nin gijigadon, my days ; nin gijiga- dom T my own day ; nin gijagadonian, my own particular days ; o gijigadom, his retnarkable day. Nind ajauesh- kon, my svvords ; od ajauieshkom, od ajaweshkoman. etc. Rule 3. Ali the other inanimate substantives with posses¬ sive pronouns, and liketvise ali inanimate diminutives, take the possessive termination im; as, Nin nabilacan , my vessel; nin n(,bikwannn, my own vessel, my very vessek Nin mitigtoab, my bow ; nin mitigwabvai„ o mi- tigwab\m, etc. Note. Ali these substantives with possessive pronouns, that take a possessive termination, belong to Form 1. “ Nin tchiman” B. Possessive Pronouns. with animate Substantives. We have seen in the preceding forms, how possessive pronouns are expressed with inanimate substantives. Let us novv consider the effect they make on animate substan- tives. Fokm 1. Plural. Singular. < ( nind afoionanig, ) J kid akikonanig, f kid. akikowatr. rra Plural. ( Nind akik, my kettle, Singular. ■' kid akik, thy kettle, t od akikon, his (her) kettle. ( nind akikog, my kettles, < kid akikog, thy kettles, ( od akikon, his (her) kettles. Nind akikonan, ) , kid akikonan, j our kettle > ■ kid akikovta, your kettle, od akikavran, their kettle. > our kettles. kid akikowag, your kettles, od akikowan, their kettles. 55 Some animate substantives with possessive pronouns, that terminate their plural in ig, conform also to this form, but their mutative vowel* is i instead of o. F. i. nind assdb, my net; pl. nind assabig, my nets ; od assabin, nind assabinan, kid assabiwag, etc. This i remains through- out ali the terminations. Plural. Some animate substantives with possessive pronouns, that add only g for the plural, and end in a voioel in the singular, belong also to this form with a little variation ; as : f Nidj’ anishinabe, my neighbor, (fellow-man, i . J brother, ® i kidj’ anishinabe, thy neighbor, widj’ anishinaben, his (her) neighbor. f nidj’ anishinabeg, my neighbors, (fellovv- Plural J men, | kidj’ anishinabeg, your neighbors, £ widj’ .anishinaben, his (her) neighbors, (" Nidj’ anishinabenan, ) . , , „■ , J kidj anishinabenan, J a > ’ ® ] kidj’ anishinabevia, your neighbor, widj’ anishinab e\van, their neighbor. C nidj’ anishinab cnanig, ) . ,, , • j-, . , ■ , > our neighbors, J kidj anishinab cnanig, J 6 ’ | kidj’ anishinab ewag, your neighbors, L widj’ anishinabenan, their neighbors. Likewise, nidj’ bimadisi, my fellow-liver, (fellow-man), etc. Remark. This Form 1. is seldomused. The animate sub¬ stantives with possessive pronouns, take almost ahvays the possessive terminations, m, im, or om, There are likevvise three rules for the possessive termina¬ tions of the animate substantives, viz : See Note p. 53. 56 Rule 1. Animate substantives, ending in a vowel, take the possessive termination m, vvhen they are preceded by a possessive pronoun. F. i. Kije-Manito, God ; nin Kijc- Manitom, my God. Ogima, chief, king ; nind ogimam, my chief. Inini, man ; nind ininim, my man, my hus- band. Ikioe, vvoman ; nind ikwem, my vvoman, my vvife. Mosluoe, handkerchief; nin moshtvem, my handkerchief. Rule 2. Animate substantives forming their plural by add- ing ag, ig, or iag, take the possessive termination im, vvhen a possessive pronoun is prefised to them. F. i. Manishtanish, sheep, (pl. manishtanishag,) nin manish- tanishim, my sheep. Ma sinit chigan, image, (pl. masi- nitchiganag,) nin masinitchigamm, my image. Optn, a potatoe, (pl. opinig,) nind ophiim, my potatoe. Gigb, fish, (pl. gigAiag,) nin gig, 'im, my fish. Rule 3. Animate substantives that form their plural by addiug og or mag, take the possessive termination om, vvhen they have a possessive pronoun before them, when' they don’t terminale in a vowel in the singular. (If the substantives vvith the plural termination in mag, terminate in a vowel in the singular, they belong to the first of these rules, ad take the possessive termination m ; as, lkwe, vvoman, (pl. ikwewag,) nind ikwem. Pijiki, ox, pl. pijikimag,') nin pijikim, etc.) Examples to rule 3. Wabos, rabbit, (pl. mabosog,') nin mabosom, my rabbit. Andng, star, (pl. anangog,') nind anangom, my star. Atik, rein-deer, (pl. atikuiag,') nind atikom, my rein-deer. Jing- wak, pine-tree (pl. jingwakwag) nin jingtcakom, my pine- tree, etc. Ali the substantives vvith possessive pronouns, mentioned in the above three rules, belong to the follovving form. Form 2. Nind ogimam, my chief, kid ogimam, thy chief, od ogimaman, his (her) chief. 57 Plural. nind ogimamag, my chiefs, kid ogimamag, thy chiefs, od ogimaman, their chiefs. Nind ogimamman, ) , • c ,., b . ’ > our chie.f, „. , kid ogimamman, J ° ' kid ogimamrna, your chief, od ogimamivf an, their chief. C nind ogimammamg, ) , . c , . , ° . • B ’ > our chiefs, p. . kid ogimammamg, J a ' kid ogimamivvag, your chiefs, od ogimamivi an, their chiefs. Besides ali the animate substantives with possessive pro- nouns, that have the possessive terminations, those also that add ag in the plural, belong to this form, as some of the following examples vvill show you. Exampi.es. Mino inakonigetvag kid ogimammamg ; our chiefs make good laws, (regulations). Nebioakad anishinabe o babamitaioan od ogimdman ; a pru- dent Indian listens to his chief. Nissiieag nin kitchi pijikimmamg, nananitcag dash nin pijikinsimmamg ; the number of our cows is three; and of our calves, five, Gi~mino-nitawigiwag na kid opinimvnag ? Have you got a good crop of potatoes ? Batdinowag na kid ikioesensimag 1—Namatch batdinoicag nin kwiwisensimag. Hast thou many girls ?—1 have more boys. Nin gi-wabamimanan od andngoman icabanong; we have seen his star in the east. Nind inawemagan, my relative, (pl. nind inaivemaganag.) Nongom nibiwa nind inawemagan'mamg gi-bi-ijawag orna; to-day many of our relatives came here. Kbtawan, a large piece of wood for fuel, a block, (pl. ko- taivanag.) Ki kotawaniwag, your blocks; nin kota- roaainanig, our blocks ; o kotawanan, his block, or his blocks. 58 Kitchipison, a belt, (pl. kitchipisonag.') Bij ki kitchipis- onag; bring here thy belts. Nin kitchipisonman, our belt ; ki kitchipisoninanig, our belts. In the terms that mark the different d e. gr res of relation- ship, there is some deviation from the preceding forms, some irregularity, which we have to consider now. Irregular Form 1. ( Noss, my father, Singular. < koss, thy father, ( ossan, his (her) father. f nossag, my fathers,* Plural. < kossag, thy fathers, ( ossan, his (her) fathers. ’ IVbssinan, ) c , . ’ > our tather, Singular. J kossinan, f ° 4'ossiwa, your father, ossiwan, their father. C Tiossinamsr, ) p 7 . > our fathers, Plural. 4 ioss ! nanl g> f j kossvwag, your fathers. (_ ossiwan, their fathers. This form is irregular only in the third persons, which are not preceded by od, as the regular form is, od ogima- man, od ogimamiwan. Exactly after this form is inflected the term nokomiss, my grand-mother. The following terms of relationship : Nimishomiss, my grand-father ; ninguoiss, my son ; ninddniss, my daughter ; ninidjaniss, my child ; nisiniss, my father-in-law; and others which you will find below, in the list displayed after these irregular forms, are also inflected according to this first irregular form, except in the third persons, were they take o or od: omishomissan, ogwissan, odanissan, onidja- nissan, osinissan, etc. * A person may have two fathers, or two mothers j one by nature, and another by adoption, 59 Irregular Form 2. their mothers. This form, as you see, is altogether irregular ; and there as no other word belonging to it Irregular Form 3. j Nissaie, my brother (older than I,) Singular. < kissaie, thy brother, ( ossaieim, his (her) brother. ( nissaieiag,, my brothers, Plural. < kissaieiag, thy brothers, ( ossaieian, his (her) brothers. { Nissaienm. | , ,, ,. • ’ > our brother, kissaienan, j ’ /a&taietvra, your brother, mssaieiwan, their brother. nissaienamg, ) , , • • ■- > our brothers, Plural J kissaien anig, ) ' #zssaieiwag, your brothers, i. assaieiwan } their .brothers. 60 Here are some animate substantives with possessive pro- nouns belonging to this form ; viz : Nimishome, my imele, (my father’s brother.) Nijishe, my imele, (my molher’s brother.) Ninoshe, (ninwishe,) my aunt (my mother’s sister.) Nimisse, my sister, (older than L) Nishime, my brother or sister, (younger than I.) Nidjikiive, my friend,'my brother, (widjlkiwnwa.) Nindiingoshe, my she-cousin, (a female speaking.) Ninddngwe, my sister-in-law, or my friend, (a female speak- Nojishe, my grand-child, (ojishc\wa ; qjisheiww.) Besides these terms of relationship, ali the animate sub¬ stantives with possessive pronouns, that make their plural by adding iag belong to this form; as : Njode, twin ; nin nijodelag; ki nijodenanig; ki nijodeiv/a. Abinodji, child ; nind abinodjinan ; kid abinodjiivrag. Mindimoie, old woman; nin mindimoienanig ; o mindimo- zeian. Bineshi, bird ; o bineshiim ; ki bines/iiiag; nin bineshinan. Pakaakwe, cock, hen; nin pakaakivenanig; kipakaakwenan. etc. etc. The other terms of relationship, (besides the above,) conform themselves to the preceding irregular forms, or to the regular forms, according to their plural. Ifyou know the first and the third person of the first singular, and the first persons of the first plural and second singular, you can construct the rest according to the above forms. In the follovving list these four persons are indicated. Ninslniss* my father-in-Iaw ; ostnissan, ninsinissag, ninsir.- issinan. Ninsigosiss, my mother-in-law; osigosissan, ninsigosissag, ninsigosissinan. Nita, my brother-in-law ; w'itan,t nitag, nitanan. * See Remark, p. 19. t See Note, p. 50. 61 Ninim, my sister-in-law, (or my brother-in-law ; a female speaking ;) winimon, ninimog, ninimonan.j^ Nitdtviss, my he-cousin; witawissan, nitauffi&rg, nitawis- sinan. JVinimoshe, my she-cousin ; winimosheian, ninimoshelag , ninimoshenan. Nikdniss, my friend, my brother; (a male speaking :) wi- kanissan, nikanissag, nikanissinan. Niningioan, my son-in-law; oningmanan, niningivanag , niningwanina n. Nissim, my daughter-in-law ; ossimin, nissimig, nissiminan- Ninsigoss, my aunt, (my father’s sister ;) oslgossan, nin- sigossag, ninsigossinan. Niningwaniss, iny nephew; oningwanissan,niningwanissag, niningwanissinan. Nisliimiss, my niece-, (a male speaking;) oshimissan, nislii- missag, nichimissinan. Nindojim, my step-son, or my nephevv ; odojiman, nindoji- mag, nindojiminan. Nindojimikuem, my step-daughter, or my niece ; odojimik- weman, nindojimikwemag, nindojimikweminan, Nindojimiss, my niece, (a female speaking ;) odojimissav , nindojimissag, nindojimissinan. Nindindama, the father or the mother of my daughter-in- law ; odindaivan, nindindaivag, nindindatcanan. Otchipwe terms for “ my cousin.” 62 my uncle’8 (nifishe) my aunt’s (ninnishe) 'my aunt’s (ninsigass) A male will say: A female will say: sm, daughter, ninimoshe, my . cousin, r son, nissaie (or nishime) | my cousin. ) daughter, nimisse (or L nishime) my cousin. ' son, ninimoshe, my cou- J sin, daughter, nindangoshe, my cousin, ' son, nissaie (or nishime) my cousin, dau. hter, nimisse (or ni- . .shime) my cousin. A female will say : my aunt’s (niniviske) ' my uncle’s (nimishome) (” son, nissaie (or nishi- J me,) my cousin, | daughter, nimisse (or £ nishime,)my cousin. son, ninimoshe, my cousin, daughter, nindango- she, my cousin. C my aunt‘s (ninsigoss) (son, nitawiss, my cou- Otchipme termsfor “ my nepltew,” and “ my niece.” C my Brothers (»issaie, ( son, nindojim, my neph- nishime) j ew, । daughter, nidojimikmem, A male J l my niece, willsay: ' my sister’s {nimisse, (son, niningmaniss, my nishime) I nephew, । daughter, nishimiss, my £ £ niece. 63 A female will say: ' my brother’s (nissaie, nishime) my sister’s [nimisse, nishime) f son, ninihgwaniss, my nephew, ] daughter, nishimiss, my niece, (” son, nindojimiss, my J nephew, | daughter, nindojimiss. my niece. Otchipme t er ms for “ my brother-in-law,” and “ my sis- ter-in-law.” f my wife’s brother, nita, my brother-in-lay, A male j my sister’s husband, nita, my brother-in-law, ivill say: | my wife’s sister, ninim, my sister-in-law, my brother s vvife, ninim, my sister-in-law. ” my husband’s brother, ninim, my brother-in- law, A female J my sister’s husband, ninim, my brother-in-law, vvill say : ‘ my husband’s sister, ninddnge, my sister-in- law, my brother’s vvife, ninddnge, my sister-in-law. Peculiarities in regard to these terms of relationship. 1. The English term, “ my brother,” is given in Otchip- we by two terms, nissaie and nishime; the former signify- ing a brother of mine that is older than I am ; and the lat- ter a brother younger than I. And the English term, “ my sister,” is also given by two terms, nimisse, my sister older than I; and nishime, my sister younger than I. 2. The English term, “my uncle,” is given in Otchipvve by nimishome, which signifies, my father’s brother; and by nijishe, vvhich denotes, my mother' s brother. And the term “my aunt,” is expressed by ninsigoss, my father’s sister and ninwishe,(ninoshe,) my mother’s sister. 3. Like the .Tews and other ancient nations, the Otchip- we Indians call the children of two brothers, or of two sis- 64 ters, brothers and sisters, (riissaie, nimisse, nishime,) which are called cousins in English and in other modern langua- ges. *But the children of a brother and a sister, they call cousins, nitdiviss, (ninimoshe, nindangoshe..) 4. The Otchipwe cannot name distinctly any higher de- gree in the ascending line, than grand-father and grand-mo- ther, nimishomiss and nokomiss. For great grand-father and great grand-mother, they have the same terms as for grand-father and grand-mother. They have the term, nind aianike-nimishomiss; but this does not strictly signify, my great grand-father; it signifies any of my ancestors higher than grand-father. In the descending line they call both a grand-son and a grand-daughter with the same term, nojishe. And ali that is lower than nojishe, is called ani- kobidjigan. Examples. Wenidjanissidjig o kitchi sdgiaivan ikb onidjdnissivan; parents use to love very much their children. Naningim omd bi-ijdwag nitawis sinanig; our cousins come here frequently. Eji-s 'igiidisoiang ki da-sdgiananig kidj’anishindbenanig ; as vve love ourselves we ouglit to love our feUow-men. Joseph ossaieian midadatchigwaban, oshimeian dash bejigo- nigoban; Joseph had ten brothers (older than himself,) and one brother (younger than himself.) Nbngom nin gi-wdbamag nij kinimog ; to-day I saw two of thy sisters-in-law, (speaking to a male;) or two of thy brothers-in-law, or sisters-in-lavv, (speaking to afemale.) Ki wdbanuwag na ko kishimissivragt Do you seesome- times your nieces? (speaking to a male.) Anin eji-bimddisiioad kidojimissivvag? How do your nieces do ? (speaking to a female.) Kikinoamaw masinaigan kishimeiag, teach thy brothers (or sisters, younger than thou,) to read. Nin pijikiminan pakdkadoso, kinoma dash ki pijikinnvtag kitchi wininowag; our ox (or cow) is poor, but your os¬ en (or cows) are fat, 65 Nishime o gi-banddjian o tibaigisissivanan ; my (younger) brother spoiled his watch. Minosse nin tibaigisisswan'man ; our clock goes right (or is right.) Iaigwa bdtdinowag ki nidjdnissinanig; our children are already many. Jfi oma ga-daji-nitdwigiangidioa kakina ninidjanissinanig ; it is here we brought up ali our children. Nind atdwewinininan o mino didawan od anishindbeman; our trader treats well his Indians. Ndag pitchinagonin gi-bi-ganonigog; my brothers-in-law (a male speaking) came yesterday and spoke to me. Ali these substantives with possessive pronouns can be transformed into verbs, and they are often so; and then they are conjugated. They have two tenses, the present and the imperfect. We will employ here the examples of our preceding fonns. Novv mind this : The present tense of these sub¬ stantives with possessive pronouns transformed into verbs, is exhibited in the preceding forms, regular and irregular ; and the imperfect tense will be shown in the follovving forms. A. Possessive Pronouns with inanimate Substantives trans¬ formed into Verbs. Form 1. Imperfect Tense. . { Nin tchimaniban, the canoe I had, (or for- merly my canoe,) ki tchimaniban, the canoe thou hadst, o tchimaniban, the canoe he (she) had. ( nin tchimambanin, the canoes I had, (or for- Plural J merl ? canoes ’>, , J | ki tchimambanin, the canoes thou hadst, (_ o tchimambanin, the canoes they had. 66 Singular. Plural. C Nin čcAmanmaban, ) c I ,. , ,. . , ’ > our tornier canoe, J ki tchimanmaban, I > ki tcAwiareiwaban, the canoe you had, o tchimaniwaban, the canoe they had. f nin tchimaninabanin, ) , J , , ■ > tormerly our canoes, I ki tchnnanmabanm, } J 'j ki tchimanbvabanin, the canoes you had, [ o tcbimaniwabanin, the canoes they had. Examples. Ali ow nin kitiganiban, bakdn dash ningotchi nongom nin kitige; this was formerly my field, but now I make my field elsevvhere. Anindi gwaiak ga-dteg ki tvakaiganivr aban 1 Where is the spot where your house stood ? Kishime od aian nin masinaiganiban; thy brother has the book I had before. Gi-sakide endaiang, kakina dash nin masindiganinabanin gi-tchd.gide.wan ; our house took fire, and ali our books we had, burnt down. Ki mojwdgan\\vabanin, once your scissors. O mojwdganiwa- ban, once his (her) scissors. Form 2. Imperfect Tense. Singular. Plural. ' Nind a&a/iban, my pole (lodge-pole) which I lost, kid abajiban, thy pole thou hadst, od abajiban, the pole he (she) had. r nind aAajibanin, the poles I had, < kid aftajibanin, the poles thou hadst, I od afeajibanin, the poles he had. Singular. 'Nind aftajinaban, kid aJujinaban, kid a6a/iwaban, od abajiwaban, | the pole we had, the pole you had, the pole they had. 67 Plural. nind «6annabanin, , , , > the poles we nad, kul aoapnabanin, I r ’ kid «& , , . j ki tne box tnou nacist, L o makakoban, the box he (she) had. r nin makakobanm, the boxes Ihad, Plural. < ki makakob' our former box, . J ki 7)?aA.'aA'onaban, ) “ । ki makakx>wabnn, the box you had, L o makakowa.ban, the box they had. f nin makakonabanin, ) ,, , , , ,. , , , . > the boxes we had, Plural 1 ma k a konabai\m, ) j ki makako^abanm, the boxes you had, t o makakom abanin, the boxes they had. Examples. Gi-gawissemagad nin pijikitoigamigoban ; the stable I had tumbled down. Minossebanin ki ivagdkivadonabanin; the axes we had were good; 68 Nind ataw the kettle we had, kia akikonaban, ( ’ kid rtfci’A:owaban, the kettle you had, od aAri/rowabanin, the kettle they had. { nind afo'£onabanicr, t , , , kid a^onabanij, J the kettles we had > kid akikowa.ba.nig, the kettles you had, od akikowabanin, the kettles they had. Examples : Mi sa aw ikwe od akikobanin ; to this woman belonged the kettle, (or the kettles.) Gi-batdinoniag nind aArj/ronabanig; the kettles we had ‘were many. Nin nind assabiban aw; nongom dash kait-in odossabissi. This was niy net; but now 1 have no net. Gi-tiuitcan od assaiitvabanin, they had four nets be- fore. 69 Nidj' anishi na&eban, my fellow-man (brother) I had, (or my deceased fellow-man (brother.) Widj’ anishinabe- banin, his deceased fellow-man. Kidj’ anishinabmabanig, our deceased fellow-men. Fokm 2. Impe.rfect Tense. f Nind ogimamiban, my deceased chief, (or the o- > I chief I had before, = ' j kid ogimamiban, thy deceased chief, od ogimarmbaviva, his (her) deceased chief. f nind ogimannbanig, my deceased chiefs, Plural. < kid ogimamibamg, thy deceased chiefs, ( od ogimmibanin,his (her) deceased chiefs. f Nind ogimaminaban, '1 our deceased chief, > (or the chief we Singular. •( kid ogimaminaban, ) had before,) | kid ogimmnbKaban, your deceased chief. od og'w»a?«iwabanin,his(her)deceas’d chief l' nind ogimaminabanig, ) , , , • P ,., ° , ■= > our late chiefs, Plural o gi-inan Jesus o kikinoamdganan : Amegmen ge-gas- siamamegmen o batadominan, mi aw i e-gassiigadenig. Jesus said to his disciples : Whose soever sins you remit, they are remitted unto them. Wegotogwen ge-nandotamawagwen We6ssimind nind iji- nikasomining, k ga-minigowa ; kid igonan Jesus. Jesus says unto us: Whatsoever you shall ask the Father in my name, he vv ill give it you. Wegotogwen wa-ikitogwen, kaicin nin nissitotamassi; I don’t know what he wants to say ; I don’t understand him. Reniark 1. The second third person of a'eegwen and awegio;nag, is apegwenan, which is expressed in English by : I don’t knovv vvho, or, we don’t knovv who. F. i. 82 Aioegicenan ga-wabiigogicenan aw ga-gagibingwe-nigipan; gi-ikitowan onigiigon. We don’t know who has opened the eyes of this born blind ; said his parents. Awegwenan ga-bi-ganonigogwenan nishime ; gegctnongom mino ijitcebisi. I do not know who came and spoke to my brother ; he behaves now well. Remark 2. If you are asked : Atnenen aw ? Who is this or that person ? Or, aivenenag ogoic ? or, igiw ? Who are these or those persons ? And if you don’t know, you will have to ansvver, for the singular: Awegwen; and for the plural : Awegwenag; vvhieh both signify, 1 don’t know who. F. i. Aicenen aicbaddssamossed ? Awegwen. Who is that per¬ son there coming this way ? I don’t know. Aicenen aw ikive ga-bl-ijad orna jeba ? Aivegtven. Who is that woman that came here this morning ? I don’t know. Aivenenag ge-mddjadjig wabang ? Auegicenag. Who are those that will start to-morrow ? I don’t know. Aivenenag igiw ga-giossedjig pitchinagol Awegivenag. Who are those that have been a hunting yesterday ? I don’t know. The second third person of this word of answer is: Aioegicenan, for both the singular and plural. F. i. Aicenenan ga-anwenimadjin nimishome ? Aicegicenan. Whom did my uncle reprimand ? I don’t know. Aicenenanga-bi-ganonigodjin nishime ? Awegwenan. Who came and spoke to my brother ? I don’t know. Before we close the Chapter of Pronouns we must observe that there are no relative pronouns in the Otchipwee lan- guage. The sentences in which there are relative pronouns in English, (tcho, tchich, that, what,') are given in Otchipwe by what is called, in this Grammar, “ The Change of the first voicel,” forming chiefly participles. We have already employed this '‘Change” in some examples, but we have 83 had till now no opportunity of mentioning it; and even now we mention it only because the relative pronouns are always expressed by the Change. But in the next Chapter, tovvards the end of the first Conjugation, you will find a full explanation of it. This explanation naturally belongs to the Chapter of Verbs, because the Change never occurs but in verbs. Here are a few examples in which you will see how the sentences vvith relative pronouns are given in Otchipvve. Ali this, hovvever, you will better understand when you study it again after a careful perusal of the next Chapter. Kije-Manito miši gego ga-gijitod, miši gego gaie maninang, wenidjanissingin ki sagiigonan; God who made ali things, and who gives us ali, loves us like children. Jawenddgosiwag waiabandangig maiabandameg; blessed are they who see what you see. Jamenddgosi daiebioetang ano wabandansig; blessed is he that believes although he sees not. Ininiicag ga-ano-nandomindjig, kamin gi-bi-ijassiwag; the men that have been called, did not come. Inini ga-wabamag, ga-ganonag gaie. . .. The man that I have seen, and whom I have spoken to. . . . Oshkiname enonad gi-bi-ija orna jeba ; the young man whom thou employest, came here this morning. Ikiče madigemag; the vvoman to v-hom I am married. Inini icadigemag; the man to whom I am married. 84 C H A P T E R III. OF VERBS. A Verb is that part of speech which expresses an action or state, and the circumstances of time in events, or in a being. The being vvhich does or receives the action expressed by the verb, is called its subject; and the being to which relates the action, in some verbs, is called its object. The verb is the principal and most important part of speech, especially in the Otchipwe language, which is a language of verbs. DIVISION OF VERBS. The principal grammatical division of verbs is in two classes, transitive and intransitive. Each of these two classes has its subdivisions, which are detailed here.. It was necessary to give tosomesorts of verbs peculiar names, vvhich do not occur in other Grammars. But in the Gram- mar of the Otchipvve language, which differs so much from other languages in its grammatical system, it seemed necessary to establish distinct denominations for certain peculiar kinds of verbs. A. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 1. Active verbs, or transitive-proper, express an act done (or that could be done) by one person or thing to another. F. i. Nin sagia noss, I love my father. Nind ojibian masinaigan, I write a letter. Nin da-ganona •uabamag, I would speak to him if I saw him. 2. Reciprocal verbs are those which designate a reaction of the subject on itself. F. i. Nin kikenindis, I knovv my- self. Sagiidiso, he loves himself. Kitimagiidisoicag, they make themselves poor. 85 3. Communicative verbs. So are called the verbs that express a mutual action of several subjects upon each other, in a communicative manner. These verbs have oniy the plural number. F. i. Igiw nitam ga-bi-anamiadjig, weweni gi-sagiidiivag, gi-jawenincliwag, mojag gi-mino-dodadiwag. The first Christiana loved much each other, were charitable to each other, and treated each other well.—It must, hovv- ever, be remarked, that these verbs do not alvvays signify a mutual action of several subjects upon each other ; but sometimes they mean that the subjects of the verb act toge- ther, or are influenced together, in a common or communi¬ cative manner. F, i. Nin dibaamddimin, vve are paid together, Nimiidiwag, they are dancing together. Wid- jindiwag, they are going together. 4. Personifying verbs. We oall, in this G-rammar, those verbs personifying, vvhich represent an inanimate ob- ject acting like a person, or another animate being. F. i. Nishtigioan nin nissigon, my head kills me, (I have a vio- lent head-ache,) Masinaigan nin gi-bi-odissigon, a letter čarne to me. Ninde ki nandamenimigon, my heart desires thee. Ishkotewabo ki makamigon kakina kid aiiman, ar- dent liquor (fire-water) is robbing thee of ali thy things. There is yet another kind of personifying verbs, vvhich are formed by adding magad to the third person singular present, indicative, of verbs belonging to the I., II., and III. Conjugations. These verbs give likevvise to inanimate objects the activity or quality of a person, or another animate being. F. i. Ijdmagad, it goes, (ija, he goes.) Nabikiean bibonishimagad oma, a vessel vvinters here, (bibonishi, he vvinters.) Mandan masinaigan jagandshi- momagad, this book speaks English, (jagandshima, he speaks English.) Remark 1. When the third person singular, above men- tioned, ends in a censonant, you must first add to this third person the mutative vowel, and then the termination magad, to form these personifying verbs. The mutative vowel is that in vvhich ends the third person singular, present, in- c. 86 dicative; or with vvhich commences the termination of the third person plural. F. i. Nin ikit, I say; third person singular, ilcito, he says; this o is the mutative vowel. L you annex magad to this o, you will have the personifying verb ikitbmagad, it says. But when the said third person singular ends in a consonant, you have to go to the third person plural, and see its conjugational termination ; and the vowel with which this termination begins, is our muta¬ tive vowel. F. i. Dagmishin, he arrives; the third person plural is, dagwishinog ; now this o is the mutative vovvel; and now add to this o the termination magad, and you will have the personifying verb Sagwishinmnagad, it arrives, it comes on. In substantives the mutative vovvel appears in the termination of the plural. F. i. Anang, a star ; plural, anangog ; o is its mutative vovvel. Assin, a stone ; plural, assmig ; i is its mutative vovvel. Biwabik; bivabikon. Remark 2. Sometimes abbreviations are emphyed in the formation of these verbs. F. i. Kttimagisi, he is poor. According to the rule we ought to form the personifying verb by adding magad to this third person, and say, kiti- magisimagad; but they say, kitimagad, it is poor. Kiti- magad endaidn, my dvvelling is poor. Kitimagad nind ag- wiwin, my clothing is poor. B. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 1. Neuter verbs, or intransitive-proper, are those verbs that express a State of heing, or an action not going over on any object. F. i. Nin kashkendam, I am sorrovvful, sad; Kid akos, thou art sick. Minwendam, he is contented, glad, happy. Niha, he sleeps. These are intransitive verbs, because they express a State of being. The follovv- ing express an action confined to the actor, not passing over on any subject, and are therefore intransitive. Nin madja, I depart, I start. Ki dagmshin, thou arrivest. Wabange, he is looking on. Anisliinabcmidjige, he lives and acts like an Indian. 2. Reproaching verbs. So are called here the verbs vvhich signify that the subject thereof has some reproachful 87 habit or quality. F. i. Aw kmieisens nibashki, this boy likes toomuch sleeping, (niba, he sleeps.) Nintisse nimishki, my sister likes too much dancing, (ntmi, she dances.) Ginawishkiwag, they are in the habit of lying. Gimodishki, he is a thief. 3. Substantive-verb s are those that are formed directly from substantives. F. i. Aking gi-ondji-ojitchigade kiiaw, minawa dash ki gad-akiw; out of earth was formed thy body, and thou shalt be earth again. (Aki, earth; nind akiw, I am earth; akiwi, he is earth.) Lot wiwan gi- abanabiwan, mi dash ga-iji-jiwitaganiwinid; Lot’s wife looked back and became salt (a pillar of salt.) (Jiuitagan , salt; ninjiwitaganiw, I am salt; jiwitaganiwi, he (she) is salt.) Nind anishinabcm; nind ininiiv; nind ikiceio. 4. Abundance-verbs. These verbs are likewise formed from substantives, and they designate that there is abund- ance of the object signified by the substantive from which they are formed. They ali end in ka, and are unipersonal verbs, belonglng to the VII. Conjugation. F. i. Nibika oma, there is much water here. Anishindbeka wedi, there are many Indians there.. Tibikong gi-kitchi-anangoka, last night there was plenty af stars, (many stars were visible.) Assinika, there is abundance of Stone. Gigbika, there is plenty of fish. 5. Unipersonal verbs are those that have only the third person. The verbs of the preceding number are uniper¬ sonal verbs. These verbs are commonly called by Gram- marians impersonal ; but the term unipersonal is undoubt- edly more adapted to them; because they are not entirely destitute of persons, but they have only one; so they are rather unipersonal than impersonal. F. i. Kissind or kissinamagad, it is cold. Kijdte, or kijdtemagad, it is warm. Gimiioan, it rains. Sanagad, it is difficult. 6. Defective verbs are those that want some of the tenses and persons, which the use does not admit, F. i. 88 Iiva, he says, (inquit.) Nin dind, I am, I do; anin endiian? how do you do. There are many other kinds, or rather modifications of verbs, of which we will speak after ali the Conjugations, under the head of Formation of Verbs. There are no auxiliary, or helping verbs, in the Otchip- we language. The verbs of ali the Conjugations of this Grammar are inflected or conjugated by theinselves without the help of any other verb. The verbs to be and to have, which are auxiliary verbs in other languages, are principal verbs in the Otchipwe language. Instead of auxiliary verbs, the Otchipwe verbs take certain prefixes or signs, in certain moods and tenses. There are five prefixes, or signs, in the Otchipjve Con¬ jugations, by which the different moods and tenses are dis- tinguished; viz : ga-, ge-, gi-, da-, ta-. Ga-, (pronounced almost ka-,) for the perfect and pluper- fect tenses, (in the Change,') and participle perfect and pluperfect. Ga-, {gad-,) and ta-, for the future tense indicative. Ge-, {ged,) (pronounced almost ke-, ked-,) for the future tenses, subjunctive, and participle future. Gi-, for th perfect and pluperfect tenses. Da-, for the conditional mood. Remark. The English language has also several signs which are employed in the Conjugation of verbs ; as, vsili, would, shall, should, ought, etc. But there is a great dif- ference, in regard to the use of signs, between the two lan¬ guages. The English signs are sometimes used by them- selves, separately from their verbs ; and one sign may serve for several subsequent verbs. Not so in Otchipvve. In this language the signs always remain attached to the verb, and can never be used separately ; and the sign must be repeated before every verb which stands under the influ¬ ence of the same. This remark is rather a syntactical one; but speaking here of these signs, as attached to verbs etymologically, I 89 make it here. You will better understand it when you re^ turn to it after the attentive perusal of the long Chapter of Verbs. SOME ILLUSTRATING EXAMPLES. In English you would say: I will work to-morrow ali day ■ indeed I will. Here the sign ivill stands alone, separated from its verb, only referring to it. But in Otcliipvie you must say : Nin ga-d-anokt uabang kabe-gijig ; geget nin gad-anoki. You cannot put the sign only and say: Geget nin gad. The sign can never be used separately from its verb ; it must remain attached to it; you must say : Geget nin gad-anoki. So again you would say in English : He ought to pay thee ; yes, he ought. The sign ought is separated from its verb. In Otchipwe you have to say: Ki da-dibaamag sa. E, ki da-dibaamag.— The sign da-, remains attached to its verb. In the following example you vvill see how the Otchipvve sign must be repeated at every verb to which it relates. In English you vvould say, for instance: He vvculd be loved, respected, and well treated, if he did no drink so much.—The sign would be, is put onlyonce for thethree subsequent verbs, But in Otchipioe you must repeat the sign before every verb, and say: Da-sagia, darminddenima, da-mino-doda- wa gaie, osam minikwessig. You see how the sign, da-, is repeated before every verb to which it refers. INFLECTION OF VERBS. To the inflection of verbs belong voices, forms, moods, tenses, numbers and persons, and participles. We shall now eonsider each of these articles in particular, and State the peculiarities of the Otchipwe Grammar. 90 A. Of Voices. Voice in verbs shows the relation of the subject of the verb to the action, or state of being, expressed by it. We have two voices in the Otchipwe verbs; viz : 1. The Active Voice, so called because it shows the subject of the verb acting upon some object; as : Nind ashama bekaded, I feed the hungry. Ki kikinoamatcag kinidjanissag, thou teachest thy children. O bibdgiman ogin, he calls his^nother. 2. The Passive Voice, so called because it shows the subject of the verb in a passive state, acted upon by some person or thing ; as : Ashama bekaded, the hungry person is fed. Kikinoamawawag kinidjanissag, thy children are taught. Wegimid bibagima, the mother is called. B. Of Forms. There are two forms throughout ali our Conjugations, the affirmative and the negative forms. 1. The Affirmative Form, which shows that some state of existence, or some action, is affirmed of the subject; as : Wawijendam, he is joyous. Nin icassitdwendam, I am sad. Kid adissoke, thou art telling stories. Gashkigwasso, she is sewing. 2. The Negative Form, vvhich shows that some state of existence, or some action, of the subject of the verb, is denied; as : Kaurin nin nibassi, I am not asleep. Kaurin ki nibagtoessi, thou art not thirsty. Kaurin bigwakamigi- bidjigessiuag, they don’t plough. Kaurin kid agonweto- ssinoninim, I do not gainsay you. Ojibiigessigtca, if they do not vvrite. Anokissig, if he does not work. Remark. It must be observed, as a peculiarity of the Otchipwe Grammar, that throughout ali the Conjugations the negative form must be distinctly developed, fully dis- played, because it is so peculiar, difficult, and varying, that no general rules can be abstracted for the formation of it. It must be exactly pointed out in every Conjugation, and 91 in every part of it. The negation is effected by placing before the pronoun and verb the adverbs ka or kawin, no, not; or kego, do not, don’t. And it is also expressed in the verb itself. In many cases this latter kind of negation only is. employed, and the above negation-adverbs are not used. C. Of Moods. Mood in verbs is the manner of indicating the stale of existence, of action, or passion, in subjects. The Otchipwe verbs have four moods ; viz : 1. The Indicative, which simply affirms or denies some- thing, or asks a question; as: Pijikimag odabiwag, the oxen are dravving, hauling. Gagioedibenima, he is tempted. Kawin maminddisissi, he is not proud. Kan-in awiia niu miskamcissi, I don’t insult anybody. Ki nishkenima na awiia 1 Hast thou angry thoughts against anybody ? Kaurin na ta-ijassiwag? Will they not go? 2. The Subjunctive, or Conjunctive, vvhich represents something under a doubt, vvish, condition, supposition, etc. Verbs in this mood are preceded by some conjunction, tchi, kishpin, missava, etc.; and they are preceded or followed by another verb not in the subjunctive ; as : Nin minnendam, missatoa kitimagisiian, I am happy, although poor. (Kiti¬ magisiian is in the subjunctive mood.) Ki urindamon iw, . tchi kikendaman, I teli thee this, that thou mayst know it. (Kikendaman, subjunctive.) fflabamad kishime, ki gctd- ina tchi Iri-ijad. oma; if thou seest thy brother, thou wilt teli him to come heje. ( Wabamad, that is, kishpin waba- mad, if thou see him; kishpin is understood.) 3. The Conditional, vvhich implies liberty, or possibility of a State or action, under a certain condition, expressed in aaother verb in the subjunctive, preeeding or following the verb in the conditional; as : Wissinissiwan nin da-bakade, if I did not eat, I would be hungry. (Nin da-bakade, is in the condition.al mood.) Kishpin kibdkwaigasossig, da-bi- ija ; if he vvere not in prison, he would come. (Da-bi-ija, is in the conditional.) 92 Remark. The English potential mood is expressed in Otchipwe by the adverb gonimo., or kema, perhaps ; which is placed before the verb that is in. the potential in English, but in Otchipwe it remains in the indicative ; as : It may rain, gonima ta-gimucan. He may preach or sing, .kema ta-gagikwe, kema gaie ta-nagamo. But vvhen the English potential implies condition, (which is only understood,) in Otchipvve the conditional is employed; as : I would go, (if.. .) nin da-ija, {kishpin . . .) You should obey your father, ki da-babamitawawa kossiwa ... (if you wish to do your duty . . .) 4. The Imperative, which is used for commanding, ex- horting, praying, permitting or prohibiting; as : Dodan iw, do that. Ojiton ow, make this. Enamiangin bima- disiiog, live like Christians. Debenimiiang, bonigideta- vrishinam ga-iji-bata-diiang; Lord forgive us our sins, Mddjan, go. Kego madjaken, don’t go. Remark. There is, properly speaking, no Infinitive Mood in the Otchipwe language. What some believe to be the Infinitive, as : Ikitom, tchi ikitong, tchi incudaming, etc., is not that mood; it is the indefinitive third person singular ; which ma.y be. given in English with the indefi¬ nitive pronoun one. Better yet it is expressed in French 'and German. F. i. Ikitom, signifies in French, “ on dit’' and in German, “ man sagt.” In English we may say, “ one says,” or “ they say but this is not so pxpressive as, ikitom, or on dit, or man sagt. In the paradigms of the Conjugations we will express this person, at least in some tenses, in French, for such as uuderstand this lan¬ guage. D. Of Tenses. Tenses in verbs are those modifications of the verb, by which a distinction of time is marked. There are naturally only three times; vix: the present, the perfect, and the future time. But to express more exact]y the circumstances of time in events, actions, or States of existence, three 93 other distinctions of time have been adopted. Tihis makes six tenses vve have in Grammars, viz : 1. The Prescnt, vvhich indicates vvhat is actually exist- ing or not existing, going on, or not going on; as : Bejigo Kije-Manito, kamin nississimag; there is one God, there are not three. Nind ojibiige, kamin nin babamossessi ; I am vvriting, not vvalking about. 2. The Imperfect, vvhich represents a State, action, or event, as past, or as continuing at a time now past; as; Nind inenddnaban tchi ijaidri gaie nin; I thought to go myself too. Wissiniban api pandigeiang; he vvas eating vvhen vve came it. Nimisse dkosiban ba-mddjaian; my sister vvas sick, vvhen I started to come here. 3. The Perfect, vvhich represents events, actions or States, as completely finished and past; as: Ninoshe gi- nibo; my aunt is dead. O gi-nissan o pijikiman; he has killed his ox. 4- The Plupcrfcct, vvhich signifies that an action or event vvas over, vvhen or before another began, vvhich is also past; as r Nin gi-ishkica-ojibiigenabctn, bwa madmess- ing kitotagan; I had done vvriting, before the beli rang. Ki . gi-gijitonaban na apdbimin, api pdndigemad? Hadst thou finished the bench vvhen they came in ? 5. The Future, vvhich represents actions or events, defi- nitely or indefinitely, as yet to come; as : Wabang nin ga- bi-ija minama ; to-morrovv I vvill come again, (definitely.) Ndgatch nin ga-bi-ija minama ; by and by I vvill come again, ( indefinitely G. The Second Future, vvhich indicates that an action or event vvill be over, vvhen or before another action or event likevvise future shall come to pass; as : Kakina ge~ gi-bimadisidjig aking ta-abitchibaioag, tchi biva dibakonid- ing; ali that shall have lived on earth, vvill rise again be« fore the general judgment. 94 e E. Of Numbers and Persons. The Numbers are two in every tense and mood, the sin- gular and the plural. And each number has three Per¬ sons, the first, the second, and the third. The subjects of verbs are ordinarily nouns or pronouns. The pronouns that are employed to serve as subjects to verbs, are the two personal pronouns, nin, I, me, we ; and ki, thou, thee, we, you, us. These two pronouns serve for bolh sexes and both numbers ; nin for the first persons, and ki for the second.—The third persons have no personal pronouns in the immediate connexion with verbs. In some Conjugations, indeed, the third persons are preceded by an o; but this o does not signify he, shc, it, or they ; it signi- fies him, her, it, or them, the object of the verb. F. i. O wabaman, he sees him, (her, them.) O wabandan, he sees it. O wabandanan, he sees them. This o is also a pos- sessive pronoun signifying his, her, its, their, as we have seen in the preceding Chapter. F. Of Participles. A Participle is a part or form of the verb, resembling, at the sime time, an adjective, and occask>nally also a substan- tive, and has his name from his part icipating of the qualities of the verb, the adjective, and the substantive. The Otchipwe participles have two forms, ali the six tenses, the three persons, and both numbers, singular and plural. The tvvo forms of the participles are: 1. The Affirmatlve Form; as: Gugitod, speaking, or he that is speaking. Degtrishing, he that arrives, arriving. Senagak, what is difficult. Wenijishing, \vhat is fair, good, (being fair.) 2. The Negative Form; as: Gdgitossig, he that is not speaking. Degwishinsig, he that arrives not, not arriving. Senagassinok, what is not difficult; not being difficult. Wenijishinsinog, not being fair, good. 95 The six tenses of the participles are the same as stated above; viz : The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future and the second future; as: Gagito- ian, I who am speaking. Gagitoiamban, thou who wast speaking. Gd-gigitod, he who has been speaking. Ga- gigitoiangiban, we who had been speaking. Ge-gigitoieg, you who will be speaking. Ge-gi-gigitoicad, they that will have been speaking. Towards the end of the paradigm of the I. Conjugation you will find an important Remark on the Otchipvve parti¬ ciples, which you will please mind well. • Of the Dubitative. The Dubitative or Traditional is used when persons are spoken of, whom the speaker never saw, or who are absent; or other objects, that he never saw nor experienced himself; or speaking of events which happened not before the eyes or ears of the person speaking, or shall come to pass in future ; as : Mi ga-ikitogiven aw akimest buda nibod, so said that old man before he died. Anindi aiad kissaie ? —Moniang aiddog. Where is thy brother 1— He is in Montreal; (or, I think he is in Montreal, but I am not cer- tain.) Ki kikcndan na ga-ijiwebadogwen endaieg awass bibonong ? Dost thou know what happened in your house the winter before last ? Remark. This Dubitative is peculiar to the Indian lan- guages, and in some respect bears testimony to the fact, that the habit of lying is a strong trait in the Indian cha- racter, vvhich induced the Indians originally to establish the Dubitative in their languages. Being aware of this habit themselves, they much mistrust each other ; and con- sequently, when something is related or narrated to an Indian by his fellovv-Indians, (or other men;) he will in- deed remember the narration, but with the idea in his mind of possibly being imposed upon. This he will manifest by the manner in vvhich he will repeat the narration. He will 96 speak in the Dubitative, and give the hearer to understand that the narration may not be trne in ali its parts. This mood of speaking being now in their language, they will even apply it, (vvithout any evil intention,) to the relating of Scriptural facts, or to Eternal truths. They will, for instance, say of a small child, (speaking of Christian In- dians,) that died after baptism in angelic innocence : “ Aw abinodji mino aiddog gijigong which properly says : “I think that child is vvell in heaven, but I am not certain.” Or : “I suppose that child is happy in heaven.” This is the proper meaning of that Dubitative. They firmly be- lieve that the child is in heaven and happy; but this man- ner of speaking being in their language, thfcy will employ it occasionally, even in speaking of certain events and truths, but which did not happen before their eyes. So also I heard a good, faithful, Christian Indian, who firmly believes in the Onmipresence and Omniscience of God Almighty, say thus, using his Dubitative : “ Mi gaie non- gom nondawigwen K.ijc-Manito ekitoidn which, if taken strictly, means : “ I suppose, God hears me also now what I say.”—This, however, ought not to be so. Speaking of certain facts and truths, we ought to speak in an asšuring manner, although those facts did not come to pass before our eyes and ears. This is the reason why Missionaries especially ought to avoid the Dubitative as much as pos- sible, in relating Scriptural facts, or speaking of Eternal truths, or such future events and States of things, as we knovv by the Word of God. We can speak of ali that very correctly and intelligibly, vvithout employing the Du¬ bitative. Speaking of common uncertain events or objects, or of common persons obsent, or of times past, we may employ it withjpropriety. For this reason it is also called Traditional. It is also employed vvith the indeflnitive pronoun awegwen, vvhoever, or vvhosoever; as : Awegwen ge.d-ikitogwen . . . VVhoever shall say . . . Aivegwen'ged-ijagicen , . . Who- eoever shall go , . , 97 But what shall we call this Dubitative or Traditional'! We cannot call it a mood; it has moods itself, the indica- tive and subjunctive at least. We cannot call it a form ei- ther, because it has itself two forms, the affinnative and the negative. We cannot even call it a voice, as we find in it two voices, the active and the passive. I think the most appropriate name for it would be: Dubitative Corjuga- tion. The dubitative Conjugations have not ali the tenses and moods of the common Conjugations. We shall exhihibit in the paradigmsof the dubitative Conjugations those tenses that are čommonly used in them. Note. When we observe the Indians in their speaking, vve see that they have three manners of expressing them- selves, when they speak of uncertain, or unseen and unex- perienced events or persons. 1. They use the Dubitative, as established in the Dub. Conj. of this Grammar. F. i. Abidog, he is perhaps in ; gi-madjadogenag, they are perhaps gone away. 2. They use not the Dubitative, but they employ adverbs denoting uncertainty; as, gonima, ganabatch, makija, vvhich ali signify perhaps. F. i. Gonima abi, he is perhaps in; ganabatch gi-madjawag, they are perhaps gone away. 3. They use the Dubitative and these adverbs of uncer- tainty together. F. i. Gonima abidog, he is perhaps in ; gonima gi-madjadogenag, they are perhas gone away. They have also, for the expression of such phrases, the words kitne and znacZioi'-,vvhich signify, thcy say, or, it is said. F. i. Gl-nibo kitne; or, gi-madwe-nibo, they say he is dead ; Gi-dagivishinog kiwe, or, gi-madwe-dagtoishinog, it is said that they have come. 98 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. The Conjugation of a verb is a vvritten or recited display of its different voices, forms, moods, tenses, numbers and persons, and participles. To accommodate and arrange with ease ali the different kinds of verbs of this “ language of verbs,” we must assume no less than ?iiree’Conjugations. Remark. I must, however, make here a similar remark, as I did in the preceding Chapter, p. 53. I will lay here in the following Conjugations, where ali kinds of the Otchipwe verbs are conjugated at large through ali their voices, forms, moods, tenses, numbers and persons, and participles, I will lay, I say, a full and complete display of them before the eyes ofthe learner ; because I think that by this method a thorough knovvledge of the use of the Otchipwe verbs may be easier conveyed to his mind and memorv, than by any other plan I could think of. But I say again here, as I said in the above cited remark, that this detailed display of verbs is principally intended to assist the beginner, and to show him at once the whole verb in ali its inflections. But learners who are more advanced in the study of this lan¬ guage, may abridge the Conjugations, and contract several in one; My principal intention in writing this Grammar is to assist beginning learners, especially Missionaries, in the acquirement ofthis so peculiar language. Have they once ascended some degrees of knovvledge in this study, they will then go on easily, vvithout my guidance. The characteristical mark by which verbs are known, to which Conjugation they belong, is the third person singu- lar, present, indicative, affirmative form. Besides this per¬ son, the quality of the verb must be considered. At the oommencement of every Conjugation it will be said, which verbs belong to it. The following table shows the nine different Conjugations, and the verbs belonging to each of them. 99 CONJUGATION TABLE. 100 Remark. The order of these Conjugations may appear singular. It is so indeed ; the intransitive verbs precede the transitive. But this plan and order again I have adop- ted to accommodate the beginning learner. The Conjuga¬ tions of the transitive verbs are much more difficult and complicated than those of the intransitive. These are sim- ple and easy ; and may be considered as the first steps in the scale of the Otchiptve Conjugations, by which the learn¬ er vvill easily ascend to the more difficult ones. But if he had to commence with the Conjugations of transitive verbs, he would begin with the most difficult and embarrassing of ali these Conjugations, with the fourth in the above table ; and might possibly be frightened and discouraged. L CONJUGATION. To this Conjugation belong the intransitive or neuter verbs that end in a voioel at the third person singular, pres- ent, indicative. There are also other verbs ending at the third person in a vowel, but they belong to the VII. Con¬ jugation, being unipersonal verbs. This vowel in which ends the third person above men- tioned, and which is the characteristical mark of the in¬ transitive verbs belonging to the I. 'Conjugation, may be a, e, i, or o. F. i. Inransitive verbs. Nin mddja, I depart, I start, Nin mijagd, I arrive (in a canoe, etc.,) Ninjatoendjige, I practice charity, Nind ijitchige, I do, I act, Nin bos, I embark, Nind cd>, I am (somewhere,) Nin gigit, I speak, Nin mindid, I am big, Third person. matiju, mijaga. jaioendjige. ijitchige. bosi, abi. gigito. mindido. ■ 101 To this Conjugation also belong the reciprocal verbs, be- cause they ali end in o at the third person singular, preš, indic.; as : Nin kikenindis, I know myself; kikenindiso. Nin gagivedjindis, I ask myself; gagioedjindiso. Nin pakiteodis, I strike myself pakiteodiso. The reciprocal verbs are in some respect transitive, because they express a reaction of the subject on itself. Stili they don’t belong to the transitive Conjugations, because the action of the subject does not go over upon another subject, but re- dounds on the same that is acting. Likeivise do ali the communieative verbs belong to this I. Conjugation, although they are of a real transitive signification. They are used only in the plural, vvhere they conjugate exactly like intransitive verbs, not bearing any marks of transition in their construction ; as : Nin uidbkodadimin, we help each other ; ki widokodadim, wid- okodadiu-ag. Ki pakiteodimin, we strike each other ; ki pakiteedim, pakiteodiieag. Nin wdbandimin, ive see each other ; ki wdbandim, wabandiwag. The reproaching verbs and the substantive-verbs are in¬ transitive, and ali end in i at the third person above men- tioned, and of course belong to this Conjugation ; as : Nin minikzoeshk, I am in the habit of drinking; minikiveshki. Nin bapishk, I am in the habit oflaughing; bapishki. Nin mitigoio, I am wood ; mitigoivi. Nind assinitv, I am Stone: assinivii. Remark 1. In the paradigms or patterns of the Conjuga¬ tions, the terminations of ali the moods and tenses are print- ed in Roman the better to show the inflection of the verb Remark 2. In regard to the difference betvveen nin and ki, we, see Rem. 3. page 4S. And in regard to the euphon- ical d, see Rem. 1. page 43. These remark« must be well borne in mind, as they vvill be of use throughout the Con¬ jugations. 7 102 Remark 3. Remember well, dear reader, that in the pat- teigis or paradigms of these Conjugations, we don’t express both first perons plural, nin and ki, (or nind, kid,) we; we put only one, nin, (or nind;) the other one, ki, (or kid,} is understood. This will save inany a line in this book. But remember well, that in ali the forms, in ali the moods and tenses of ali these Conjugations, where there are first per- sons plural, both can be used, according to the above re- marks. So, for instance, instead of saying in the para¬ di gm : Nind ikit, I say, etc. . kid ikit, ikito, nind ikitomm, ) kid ikitomm, j ' vc sn V’ kid ikitom, ikitovvag ; \ve will say thus : Nind ikit, kid ikit, ikito, nind ikitomm, we say, kid okitom, ikitowag. And you will have to supply yourself the second first person plural, which is ordinarily the same in the verb, the pron- oun only is different. But where the verb itself differs in the two persons plural, there we express them both; as in the subjunctive mood, in participles, etc. Remark 4. In the paradigms of these Conjugations, we ■express the English verb only at the first person singular in every 'tense, and the others will again be supplied by you because we don’t teach here to conjugate in English, but in Otchipvve. 103 Remark 5. The characteristical third person of the verbs belonging to this Conjugation, may end in any of the four vowels, in a, e, i,'or o; and the end-vowel of thisthirdper¬ son remains throughout the vvhole Conjugation. To this characteristical vowel the terminations are attached; but the vowel itself does not belong to the terminations, which are always the-same for ali the verbs of this Conjugation ; vvhereas the characteristical vowel is different in different verbs. In the folloiving four verbs the end-vowel of the the third person is different in each of them ; but the term¬ inations are always the same. Gaba, he debarks, nin g ab amin, ki gabam, gabavtag. Gagikinge, he exhorts, nin gagikingemm, ki gagikingem, gagikinge^ag. Nitni, he dances, nin nimimin, ki nimim, niminag. Nibo, he is dying, nin nibomm, ki nibom, nibovvag. Here follows now tlie maradigm of the I. Conjugation, fully displayed. Endeavor especially to coinmit to memo- ry the terminations. If yOu know the terminations, and know the characteristical vowel of the third person sing. preš, indic., you will easily conjugate every verb of this Conjugation. This characteristical third person is some- times difficult to know. For this reason I took a particu- lar čare in the Dictionary to express it at every verb. 104 AFFIRMATIVE FORM IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nind ikit, I say, kid ikit, ikito, (.one says, ikitom, < (on dit,*) nind ikitomm, ( or they say, kid ikitom, ikitovfag, I-MPERFECT TENSE. Nind ikitonaban, I said, kid ikitonaban, ikitoban, nind ifoZominaban, kid iZričormvaban, ikitobanig. PERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-ikit, I have-said, ki gi-ikit, gi-ikito, gi-ikitom, they have said, (on a nin gi-ikitomin, [dit ,) ki gi-ikitom, gi-ikito\vag. FLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-ikitonabanj I had said, ki gi-ikitofiaban„ gi-ikit oban, * See Remark, p. 92. t Note. This pluperfect, and the imperfict tense, are not so sharpij distinguished in Otchipwe, as they are in English, or in other civilized. 105 NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Katrin nind ikitossi, 1 do not say, “ kid ikitossi, “ ikitossi, ikitossim, they don’t say, (on ne dit nind ikitossimin, [pas.) “ kid ikitossim, “ ikitossiwag. IMPERFECT TENSE. Katrin nind ikitossinaban, I did not say, “ kid ikitossinaban, “ ikitossiban, “ nind zVdtossiminaban, “ kid ikit ossimtvaban, i7«7ossibanig, PERFECT TENSE. Katrin nin gi-ikitossi, I have not said, “ ki gi-ikitossi, ‘‘ gi-ikitossi, “ gi-ikitossim, they have not said, (on n a “ nin gi-ikitossimm, [pas dit.) “ ki gi-ikitossim, “ gi-ikitossivtag. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kawin nin gi-ikitossinaban, I had not said. “ ki gi-ikitossinaban, “ gi-ikitossiban, languagea. In Otchipvre theyare used promiscuouslj. So, for instance, to ex preše, 11 He said,” the Indian will say : Ikitoban. or gi-ikitoban, etc . Thie note applies also to other Conjugations 106 nin gi-ikitominaban, ki gi-ikitomnaban, gi-ikitobanig, FUTURE tense' Nin gad-ikit, I will say, ki gad-ikit, ta-ikito, ta-ikitom, nin gad-ikitomm, ki gad-ikitom, ta-ikitoviag, SECOND FUTURE TENSE Nin ga-gi-ikit, I will have said, ki ga-gi-ikit, ta-gi-ikito, ta-gi-ikitom, nin ga-gi-ikitomin, ki ga-gi-ikitom, ta-gi-i ki towag, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE^ Ikitoian* I say, or, that I say, ikitoian, i ki tod, ikitong, (qu’on dise,) iA-^ian|,r hatWe sa >’’ ikitoieg, ikito\xad, * Šee Remark J^p. 116. 107 Kamin nin gi-ikitossiminaban, ‘ c ki gi-?’gi7ossimwaban, “ gi-M-/7ossibanig. FUTURE TENSE. Kamin nin gad-ikitossi, I will not say, “ ki gad-ikitossi, “ ta-ikitossi, “ ta-ikitossim, “ nin gad-ikitossimin, “ ki gad-ikitossim, “ ta-ikitossiwag, , SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Kamin nin ga-gi-ikitossi, I will not have said, “ ki ga-gi-ikitossi, ta-gi-ikitossi, “ ta-gi-ikitossim, “ nin ga-gi-ikitossimin, “ ki ga-gi-ikitossim, “ ta-gi-ikitossi\vag, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ikitossiwa.n, if I do not say, (Z.T if we .. . gi-ikitmang, ) gi-ikitoieg, gi-ikitowad, PLUPERFECT TENSE. Zl-(7oiamban, if I had said, or because I had said. iiičoiamban, ikitopan, iZriiongiban, i£(žoiangiban, ljf we iteoiangoban, j ?H/oiegoban, ittowapan, FUTURE TENSE. Ged-ikitoian, that I will say, ged-ikitoian, gcd-ikitod , ged-ikitong, ged-ikitoiang, ] , ,, | e tf-^ 0 iang3 thatweshal1 sa >- ged-ikitoieg, ged-ikitovrad, SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Ge-gi-ikitoian, as I shall have said. ge-ffi-ikitoian, ge-gi-ikitod, ge-gi-ikitong, * See Remart 2i p. 116. f See Note, after ill the Rtmarks- 109 PERFECT TENSE. Gi-ikitossiwan, I have not said, or because I have not said, gi-ikitossiwan, gi-ikitossig, gi-ikitossing, gi-ikitossiwang, ) gi-ikitossvwang, j gi-ikitossiv/eg, gi-ikitossigv/a, PLUPERFECT. TENSE. /Zritossivvamban, J if I had not said, or had I not said, jfa'iossiwamban, ii-ifossigoban, iHčossingiban, iZričossivvangiban, ) . f iiitossiwangoban, j 1 we • ?&iiossiwegoban, ifa as we . .. ge-gi-ikitossnvang, i gc-gi-ikitossiweg, ge-gi-i ki /ossigtva. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kamin nin da-ikitossi, I would not say; I ought not “ ki da-ikitossi, [to say, “ da-ikitossi, “ da-ikitossim, they would not say, (on ne dirait pas, “ nin da-ikitossim in, “ ki da-ikitossim, “ da-ikitossiwag, PERFECT TENSE. Kamin nin da-gi-ikitossi, I would not have said ; I ought “ ki da-gi-ikitossi, [not to have said. “ da-gi-ikitossi, da-gi-ikitossim, u nin da-gi-ikitossimin, “ ki da-gi-ikitossim, “ da-gi-ikitossiwag. Ge-gi-ikitossiwan, what I would n. h. s. Ete., as above in the second future tense of thesubj. mood. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Kego ikitoken* do not say, (thon,) say not. kega ta-ikitossi, let him (her) not say, kego ta-ikitossim, let them not say, (qn’on ne dise pas,) kego ikitossida, let us not say, kego ikitokegon, do not say, (you,) say not. kego ta-ikitossivrag, let them not say. *See Remark 1. at the end of the preaent paradigea. 112 Remark. The following Otchipwe participles cannot be given in English, throughout ali the tenses and persons, in the shape of participles. There are no such participles m the English language. They must be expressed by the use of relative pronouns. Only the participle of the present tense, in the third person singular, could be expressed by a corresponding English participle; as: Ekitod, saying ; baiapid, laughing, etc. The Latin participles of the verbs called, v eri/a deponcn- tia, can answer three tenses of the Otchipvve participles, the present, the perfect, and the future ; and not only the third person, but, by the use of personal pronouns, ali per¬ sons and numbers. Let us take the verb, nin gagikinge, 1 exhort, for an example, to illustrate the matter. It is deponens in Latin, ezhortor. Participles. PRESENT TENSE. Nin gegikingcian, ego exhortans, kin gegikingcian, tu exhortans, win gegikinged, ille (illa) exhortans, ni.na.imnd, gegikingeiang. ) , kinaunnd gegikingeiang, ) ’ PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin ekitoian* I saying, (I who say,J kin ekitoinn, thou saying, etc., icin ekitod, ekitong, what they say, (ce qu on dit,) * See Remarko. 113 kinavia gegikingeieg, vos exhortantes, winawa gegikingedjig, illi (illae) exhortantes. PERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-gagikingeian, ego exhortatus, (a), ' kin ga-gagikingeian, tu exhortatus, (a), win ga-gagikinged, ille exhortatus, (illa exhortata), ninavind ga-gagikingeiang, ) e xhortati (ae} kinaioind ga-gagzkingeiang, J ’ ' ’ kinatva ga-gagikingeieg, vos exhortati, (an, I who had said. kin ga-ikito\am\>a.n, tein ga-ikitopan, ga-ikitongiban, ninatoind ga-ikitoiangiban, ) , , , . , kinaicind ga-ikitoiangoban, | we who had SawL kinawa ga-ikitdiegoban, winawa ga-ikitopanig, t See Remark, p. 26. 115 ntnamnd «Aritossiwang, ) , ,. . , ,.. • 8 > we that do not sav kinamnd emossnvang, ) 1 kinawa ckitossiweg, ivinatca ekitossigog, IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin eb7ossiwamban, I who did not say, kin eteossivvamban, n; in etoossigoban, etoossingiban, ninawind eAn7ossiwangiban, kinavind e4'i7ossiwangoban, kinawa e&ičossivvegoban, •tvinatta ei?7ossigobanig, PERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-ikitossrwan, I who have not said, kin ga-ikitossiwan, win ga-ikitossig, ga-ikilossmg, ninatcind ga-ikitossiwa.ng, kinamnd ga-ikitossiwa.ng, kinaiea ga-ikitossiv/eg, winawa ga-ikitossigog. we who did not saj, we who have not saidj PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-ifa7ossiwamban, I who had not said, kin ga-zfa7ossiwamban, win ga-ikitossigoban, ga-ikitossingiban, ninaivind ga-iA-(7ossiwangiban, ) , , , ■ > 7 . ■ i ■ 6 i > we vvho nad not said kinatcind ga-ikitossiwangoban, J kinan-a ga-ikitossi-wegoban, winawa ga-ikitossigobanig. 116 FUTURE TENSE. Nin ged-ikitoian, I vvho shall say, kin ged-ikitoia.n, win ged-ikitod, ged-ikitong, ninawind ged-ikito^n S , ) who gha]) g ktnatcind ged-ikitoiang, ) J binarna ged-ikitoieg, winawa ge.d-ikitoA'yg, SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-gi-ikitoian, I who shall have said kin ge-gi-ikitoinn, Etc., as above in the first future, Remark 1. The conjunctions, kishpin, if; missaua, though ; tchi, that, to, in order to, and others, are often placed before the verbs in the subjunctive mood, to espress a condition, supposition, wish, etc. But they do not necessarily belong to this mood. This is the reason why they are not always laid down in the Conjugations. If you say : Kishpin gega ikitoian ; or only, gego ikitoian ; both expressions have the same signification : If I say some- thing. Remark 2. There is no imperfect tense in the subjunc- tive mood. The pluperfect has the grammatical appearancc of the imperfect, but it is its own construction, Remark 3. This pluperfect tense is sometimes preceded by the particle gi-, forming : Gi-ikitoidmban, gi-ikitoiam- ban, etc. But this particle does not change its significa¬ tion at ali. If you say, Kish/pin gi-ikitoiamban iw, ki da- windamon ; if I had said that, I would teli thee ; or, Kishpin ikitoiamban iw, ki da-windamon; it is ali the same 117 FUTURE TENSE. Nin ged-ikitossiwan, I vvho shall not say, kin ged-ikitossiwan, win ged-ikitossig, ged-ikitossing, ninamnd ged-ikitoss\wiina, ) , , ,, kinawindged-ikitossiwang, | we who sha11 not sa >' kinatca ged-ikitossitfeg, minaica ged-ikitossigog. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-gi-ikitossiwa.ri; I vvho shall not have said. kin ge-gi-ikitossiwan, always prefixing ge-gi- to the verb. Remark 4. The imperative in the second person singuiar is expressed in two manners, iklton and ikitokan. The second manner, ikitokan, seems to be a kind of polite im¬ perative, which is expressed in English by preposing the word please to the simple imperative, as : Bi-ijdkan oma uabang, please conie here to-morrow. (In the plural ikitokegd) Remark. 5. The participles Can ha.ve petsonal pronouni before them, and have them often, as : Nin ekitoidn, kin ekitoian, tvin ekitod, etc. But they could also do vvithout them. For the better accommodation of the begii»ner the pro- houns are expressed in the paradigms of our Conjugations. Remark 6. It is necessary to observe here, that the first persons of the plural, ending in iang or ang, with the grave accent, are employed in the cases vvhere nin, (nind,) or ninawind, is expressed or understood, according to the rules and remarks mentioned above, page 45. But in the cases vvhere ki, (kid,) or kinawind, is expressed or under- 8 118 stood, the termination iang or ang has no accent; it is pronounced very short, and alraost as ieng or eng. It is necessary to pay attention to this difference of pronuncia- tion, because it changes the meaning of the sentence. If you say, for instance : Mi wabang tchi bosiiang ; it means that to-morrow we will ali embark ; the person or persons speaking, and the person or persons spoken to. But if you say : Mi uabang tchi bosiiang, (with the accent on the last syllable,) it means that only the persons speaking will em¬ bark to-morrow, not the person or persons spoken to. So also, F. i. Endaidng, in our house or dwelling, (the person or persons spoken to, ezcludcd.) Endaiang, in our house or dwelling, (the person or persons spoken to, included.) Romar h 7. Likevrise in the first and second -persons of the singular, ending in ian or dn, and ian or an, nothing but the accent distinguishes the first person from the second. The termination of the first person ian or is pronounced long ; whereas that of the second person, ian or an, is very short. Let the following examples be pro¬ nounced to you by some person that speaks the Otchipwe language correctly, and try to get the right idea of this difference, in, writing and pronouncing. Ekitoian ta-ijuvebad; it will be (or happen) as I say. Ekitoian ta-ijiwebad; it will be (or happen) as thou sayest. Apegish enendaman ijiwebisiidn; I wish .to bebave as I please. a Apegish enendaman ijiwebisiidn ; I wish to behave as thou pleasest. Apegish enendaman ijiwebisiian; I wish thou wouldst be¬ bave as I please. Apegish enendaman ijiuebisiian ; I wish thou wouldst be¬ have as thou pleasest. If you look on the four last sentences, they would appear 119 if ultkout accents, perfectly equal ali of them. .And nothing but the accent in vvriting, and the emphasis in pronouncing, effects the difference, which you will find material, if you consider the English sentences. Remark 8. In regard to the syllable ban, which you will see attached to verbs in some tenses, in ali our Conju- gations, it must be observed, that sometimes it is necessary, and must remain with the verb to which it is attached. But sometimes it can be omitted without the least change of the meaning or sense of the verb to vvhich it is attached, or the sentence in vvhich the verb occurs. I have observed the Indians purposely on this point, and have noticed it a great many times, that they use or omit this syllable as they please, vvithout any intention to effect a change of meaning by using, or by omitting it. Let us novv see when it is necessary, and vvhen it can be omitted. 1. It is necessakv in the imperfect and pluperfect tenses of the indicative mood, and the participles, and in the plu¬ perfect tense of the subjunctive and conditional moods. In ali these cases the final syllable ban must remain attached to the verb ; as you vvill see in ali the Conjugations of this Grammar. 2. But it can be omitted in the present tense of the sub¬ junctive mood, and consequently in ali the tenses vvhich are formed after the present tense, as you vvill see again in ali our Conjugations. In these tenses the Indians some¬ times attach the syllable ban to the verb, and sometimes they do not, vvhich makes no difference in the meaning of the verb. Examples. Kawin nin gashkitossimin teki bisan-.abiiangidwa (or, ( abiiangidwaban) ninidjanissinanig. We cannot make our children be stili. 120 Kaivin nin da-gashkitossin weweni tchi dibadodamamban, or, tchi dibadodaman. I am not able to teli it exactly. Mi ge-dbdamamban, or, ge-dbdaman.—Mi, gc-onijishingi- ban, or, ge-onijishing. It is thus thou shouldst do it.— That vvould be good, (fair, useful.) Kaivin nind inendansimin tchi ijaiangiban nongom, or, tchi ijaiang. We are not vvilling (or, we don’t intend) to go novv, (or, to-day.) Nin da-gi-ina. Mi sa iw ge-gi-inagiban, or, gc-gi-inag. I would have told him. That is vvhat I vvould have told him. Respecting the annexation of the svllable ban, you have to observe that the final letter n of the verb to vvhich ban is to be attached, is changed into m ; vvhich is alvvays the čase, vvhere these two letters come together in composi- tions. When the final letter of the verb is g, a vovvel is inserted betvveen this g and the syllable ban. This vovvel is ordi¬ narij i, as you see in the above examples ; but in some instances the vovvel o is inserted; as you vvill see in the Conjugations, in some moods and tenses, vvhere the in- cluding first person plural (kinaivind') ends in goban. When the final letter of the verb to vvhich the syllable ban is to be attached, is d, this letter is taken off, and the syllable pan, instead of ban, is added. Examples. Kaivin nongom o da-gashkitossin tchi ijad, or, tchi ijapan. He vvould not be able to go to-day. Kaivin gi-inendansi tchi gi-ganojid, or, tchi gi-ganojipan. He vvas not vvilling to speak to me. Kaivin gi-inendansiwag tchi gi-ganojiwad, or, tchi gi-ga- nojiicapan. They vvere not vvilling to speak to me. Anami o da-gi-gashkitonaiea tchi gi-ojimowad, or, tchi gi- ojimoicapan. They could have fled avvay. 121 Kaurin aioiia aiassi ge-nishkiid, or, ge-nishkiipan. There is nobody to make me angry. Note. Gi-ikitoidn, means indeed, “ as I have said,” or, “ because I have said;” F., i. Gi-ikitoidn : “ Nin gad-ija,” mi ge-ondji-ijaidn ; because I have said : I shall go,” therefore I vvill go.—But at the same time it means, “vvhen I shall have said,” or, “ as soon as I shall have said.” F. i. Gi-ikitoidn menijishing gego, nin ga-madja; vvhen I shall have said something useful, I vvill go. Gi-dagwishinang, ki ga-windamoninim gego ; when (or, as soon as) vve shall have arrived, I vvill teli you something. Panima gi-nanagatawendamdn, nin ga-gigit; aftervvards, • vvhen I shall havg reflected, I vvill speak. Gi-gijitod, o ga-bidon oma; vvhen (as Soon as) he shall have made it, he vvill bring it here. Remark that in ali these cases &future time is signified, at vvhich some action or event shall take plače, although the first verb has the full appearance of the perfect tense. (This appearance of the perfect could be given also to the English verb ; vve could say : “ As soon as he has made it, he vvill bring it here.” Even of the present: “ As soon as he makes it, he vvill bring it here.”) But vvhen actions or events are signified, vvhich have just past, the same verb in the Change is employed, (vvhich is the 3d Rule of the Change, p. 136.) To illustrate the matter, let us take the same exaraples as above, applying them to events just past. Ga-ik'itoidn loenijishing gego, nin gi-madja; vvhen I had said (as soon as I had said) something useful, I vvent. avvay. Ga-dagwishinang, ki gi-vrindamoninim iw; vvhen vve had arrived, I told you that. Panima ga-nanagataivendaman, nin gi-gigit; aftervvards, vvhen I had reflected, I spoke. 122 Ga-gijitod, o gi-bidon orna ; when (as soon as) he had made it, he brought it here. Please remember well this Note; it is to be applied to almost ali our Conjugations. EXAMPLES ON THE I. C0NJUGATI0N.* iNDiCATlVE MO0i>. Present Tense.— Kid dkos na ?—Kaurin nind akosissi; ninidjanissag akosimag, ninga gaie akosi. Art thou sick? I am not sick; my children are sick, and my mother is sick. Nin manisse nongom ; ki manissem na gaie kinawa ? 1 am chopping wood to-day ; are you clropping too ? Kaurin ninaioind nin maiiissessimtn, nind assabikertiin-; we do not chop, we are netting, (making nets..) Imperfect Tense.— Nin nita-nagamonaban 'maieshkat, nongom, dash karoin gioetch nin nagamossi; I used to sing often formerly, (in the beginning,) but now I don’t sing much. Ka na ki gi-ikitossimwaban pitchinago tchi bi-ijaieg non¬ gom ? Did you not say vesteidav that you would come here to-day ? Meurija akosiban; he fell sick a long time ago. Perfect Tense.— laigioa gi-mijagawag kid inawemaga.nl- nanig: our relations are already arrived, (in a canoe, boat, etc.) Weweni na ki gi-kitigem sigivanong ? Aningwana. Have you farmed well last spring? Yes, certainly. Kaurin gi-nibassi tibikong, gi-akoshkade; she did not sleep (hasnotslept)lastnight, she had colics, (has had.) *JVote. The English part of these Ezamples could be expressed somewhat better; and would be so, if given by itself. But I tried to accommodate it to the Otchipive sentences, as much as the English lan- guage would admit. 123 Pluperfect Tense.— Kitchi nibitoa anishinabeg gi-aiaba- nig orna aking, Hwa bt-nigid Jesus; great many people had been on earth, before Jesus was born. Biva onishkaieg jeba, nin gi-ijanaban ninsigoss endawad; before you got up this morning, I had been at iny aunt’s. Nijing jdigipa ki gi-gigitomwaban, api win pesigwid wi~ gigitod: you had already spoken twice when he rose to speak. Future Tense.— Wabang kabe-gijig ki ga-bimossemin ; to-morrow he will walk ali day. Kaginig gijigong ki ga-mino-aiam, kishpin babamitaioeg Debendjiged; you will eternally be well in heaven, ifyou are obedient to the Lord. Nin gad-ijitchige ga-ijiian ; I will do what thou hast told me. Second Future Tensb#— Nin ga-gi-madja, api ge-dagwl- shinan orna ; I will have been departed before thou ar- rivest here. Ki ga-gi-ishkusatam na tchi bwa andmiegijigak ? Will you have done the work before Sunday 1 ! (This tense is very seldom used.) SUBJOTCTIVE M00B. Present Tense.— Kishpin pakatch ikitoian, wenijishing . gego tchi ijitchigeian, ijitchigen; if thou once sayest thal thou wilt do something good and right, do it. Apegish enamiangin iji bimadisiieg, kaginig gijigong tchi jaivendagosiieg ; I wish-you would live like Christi- ans, to be eternally happy in heaven. Kaivin iw onijishinsinon tchi ikitong : Kawin nin da^ gashkitossin tchi anokitauag Debendjiged ; it is not right 'to say : I eannot serve the Lord. Kishpin anamiaieg, anokiieg gaie, ki ga-jawendagosim ; anokissitceg dash, eshkam ki ga-kitimagisim ; if you pray and work, you will be happy; if you do not work you will get poorer and poorer. 124 Perfect Tense.— Gioaiak gi-ikitoicad tchi bi-ijawad, mi wendji-akowabamagwa; I am looking out for them, because they have expressly said they would come. Ki gi-matchi-ijiwebis gi-bimosseian gi-anamicgijigak; thou hast done evil because thou hast travelled on Sunday. Gi-anokissiwcg, gi-kitigessiweg sigwanong, mi nongom wendji-bakadeieg; because you have not vvorked, not cultivated the ground last spring, therefore you are starv- ing now. Pluperfect Tense.— Kin gi-gigitoiamban, Debenimiian, mi wendji-debwetaman ; because thou hadstspoken Lord, therefore I believe. Nibossigoban Jesus, kawin awiia gijigong da-ijassi; had not Jesu,s suffered death, no person could go to hea- ven. . Pagidawassiwdngiban tagteagong, nin da-gi-bakademin nongom bibong; had vvenot madethe fall fishery, (had we not set nets last fall,) we would have starved this winter. Future Tense.— Api ged-ishkwa-bimadisiidn aking, mi. api ged-apitchi-jaioendagosiidn ; when I shall end my life on earth, then I shall be perfectly happy. Kakina mindjimendan minik ged-ikitod mekatewikwa- naie anamieivigamigong ; keep ali in memory whatever the priest shall say at church, (in the church.) Nin kikendan ged-ikitoidn, ged-ikitossiwdn gaie; I know vvhat I vvill say and what I will not say. Second Future Tense.— Ge-gi-iji-bim&disid enamiad aking, mi ged-iji.-dbdavjind dibakonige-gijigadinig ; as the Christian shall have lived on earth, even so he shall be treated on the day of judgment. Ge-gi-iji-inakonigcioad naganisidjig, mi ged-ijitchigeieg; as the chiefs (or superiors) shall constitu.te, so you »hould act. 125 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Pbesent Tense.— Ki da-minwendagos, kamin gaie ki da- kitimagisissi, kishpin minikwessiwan ishkotiwabo; thoii wouldst be beloved, and thou wouldst'not be poor,if thou didst not drink ardent liquor. Ki da-nibwakam, gwai.dk gaie ki da-bimadisim, pisin- damegobangagikicevtin; you would be wise, and you 'vould live uprightly, if you would listen to preaching. Gicaiak ki da-dibadjim eji-kikendaman, kantin ki da- segisissi; thou oughtst to teli just as thou knovvest it; thou oughtst not to be afraid, Perfect Tense.— Nin da-gi-ijamin nongam odenang, mino gijigakiban; we vvould have gone to tovvn to-day, had the weather been fair. Nibiwa jdigiva da~gi-gashkitchige, mojag anokipan; he vvould already have earned much, ifhe had vvorked ali the »ime. Kantin nin da-gi-ajegiwessi, kikendamdmban mikana : I vvould not have gone back again, had I known the road. Ki da-gi-ijam anamiemigamigong pitchinago, kantin ki da-gi-mamadishiuessim; you ought to have gone to church yesterday, you ought not to have paid visits, Kantin ki da-gi-b&pissi gBnondaman utinit&gosivtin; thou oughtst not to have laughed vvhen thou heardst impure talking. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Anamian kigijeb tchi bwa mddji-anokiian; panima dash weweni anokin, kego kitimiken, kego gaie anishd truma* dishiiceken ; pray in the morning, before thou beginnest to work ; and then‘work diligently, and do not pay any useless visits, • Bitijakan minama orna, bi-pindigikan endaiang; please come hcre again, and come to our house. Ta-nagamo aw oskinigikzve; let that young wowan sing. Ta-ikoga aw ncta-giwashkwebid, kego orna ta-aiassi; let tJiis drunkard be gone; let him not be here. 126 Arnbe pasigwida, mddjada,aw'i-anokida mammci; let us rise and go and work together. Kego matchi ikitossida, kego matchi ijitoebisissida, ki non- dagonan sa, ki viabamigonan gaie Debendjiged ; let us not say any bad words, and let us not act wrong, because the Lord sees us and hears us. Bisan aiag, weweni na.madabiiog; be stili, be sitted quietly. Ikogag orna, kwiwisensidog; madjag, giueiog ; be gone boys ; go away, go home. Kego wika waiejingekegon, enamiaieg, kego gaie nibiwa masinaigekegon; do never cheat, Christians, and do not take much on credit. Ta-asham&ioag kakina igiw anishinabcg; kego ta-giwes- siwag telil bwa wissiniwad; let these Indians have some- thing to eat; let them not go home before they eat. PARTICIPLES, Present Tense.— Gagitod nin pisindawa ; I listen to the person that speaks, (to the speaking person.) B abamitaiD gegikwedjlg ; obey the preaching (persons.) Neta-bimosscdjig nind anonag; I hire well walking per¬ sons. Kin enokiian enamiegijigakin, ki gad-animis ningoting; thou who workest on Sundays, thou vvilt suffer once. Kinaica enamiassiweg ki kitimagisim-; you who are not Christians, are miserable. Waiahissigog nin kitimagenimag; I pity those who do not see, (the blind.) Jmperfect Tense.— Mi igiw anisTiirtabeg enamiapanig; here are the Indians that were Christians. Kin enokissiivamban pitchinago api ba-ijaian oma, non- gom enigok anokin; thou who didst not work yesterday tvhen I čarne here, work to-day with ali thy force. Nin mikvenima ekitopan iw; I remember the person who said so. 127 Ferfect Tense.— Mi aw oshkiname ga-minikwtd, ga-ator ged gaie; this is the young man that drank and played. Awenenag ga-bidadjimodjig iw7 vvho are those that have brought that nevvs ? Kijamendagosim kinaica toika ga-akosissitoeg ; you are happy vvho never have been sick. Mi sa igiw ga-mashkossikessigog; these are the persons vvho did not make hay. Pluperfect Tense.— Kinawa mojag ga-nimiiegoban, kego * minatoa nimikegon; you vvho always had been dancing before, don’t dance any more. Nin min.wendan\ gi-madjawad ga-nita-gimodipanig; I ara glad those are gone away vvho always had been stealing. Gi-madja gaie toln toika ga-debwessigoban ; and he vvho never had told the truth, is likevvise gone. Mikivenimi.shin nin ga-ikiloidmban iw; remember me who had told it. FfrTURE Tense.— Mi ato gwaiak ge-dibadjimod ; this is the one that vvill teli exactly. Mi na igiw gc-gopidjig ? Are these the persons that vvill go into 'the inland ! Kamin aking aiassimag igito mika ge-nibossigog ; those that never shall die, are not on earth. Atoenen ato toika. ge-pindigessig ogitnamitoining gijigong! Who shall never enter into the kingdom of heaven 1 Second Future Tense.— Ge-gi-mino-ijiwebisid aking, ta-jawendagosi ajida-bimadisitvining ; he who shall have behaved well on earth, vvill be happy in the other life. Ato ge-gi-ishpenindisossig aking, ta-apitchi-apitendagosi gijigong ; he vvho shall not have exalted himself on earth, shall be glorious in heaven. THE CHANGE. It is time notv to speak of that famous Change of the first voioel in vcrbs, tvhich tvill occupy us in ali our Conjugations, and tvhich embarrasses mucli the beginning learner of this language. I have already mentioned it in the preceding chapter, page 82. But bere I will give you a full expla- nation of it. We tvill call this grammatical operation with one tvord, the Change. Bear reader, I know you tvill not be able to understand well this instruction on the Change, at first, before the study of this whole chapter. But I must give this instruc¬ tion here ; this is its due plače. When you return to it. after the perusal of this Grammar, a second and a third time, you tvill understand it better. In manv instances the first vowel in verbs is changed ii another, or in ttvo or three others. The follotving tabl« tvill shotv you, how this change is effected. « (accented) is changed mio aid; as ; Akosi, he is sick; aidkosui, a sick person; o sdgian, he loves him; saiagiad, whom he loves : luabi, he sees; waiabid, who sees, seeing. a (ivithout accent) “ e (always accented) “ z (accented) i (vvithout accent) « (accented) o (vvithout accent) i; as: Abi, he is; ebid, he that is, being; aid; he is; eiad, who is, being; namddabi , he sits; nemada- bid, who is sitting. aie ; as : Bejigo, he is one; baiejigod, he who is only one; debwe, he teliš the truth ; daiebwed, who teliš the truth ; debisi, he iscontented ; daiebisid, a content- ed person. d; as: Nibatoi, he stands; nabawid, who is standing; nimi, he dances ; namid, who is dancing; gi-ija, he is gone; gd-ijad, he tjiat is gone. e; as: Nibb, he dies: nebod, a dead person; nishiwe, he kills; neshiioed, who kills, murderer ; nishkadisi, he is angry; neslikadisid, an angry person. wd ; as : Nadin, it blows ; nioadingin, when it blows ; bosi, he embarks ; bwasid, he that embarks; bbdawe., he makes fire; bwddawed, he who makes fire. v: e; as : Oossima, he is father ; veossimind, who is father, (father ;) ogmssima, he is son ; wegwissimind, who is son, (son;) ogimaivi, he is chief; vegimautid, who is chief; (chief.) 129 130 Remark 1. Some verbs beginning vvith a d, make the Change by prefixing the syllable en ; as : Nin da, I dvvell, I stop ; endaian, vvhere I stop or dvvell ; endad, vvhere he stops, or vvho stops, dvvells, etc. Nin daniš, I am in a certain plače ; endanisid orna, he vvho is or lives here mi ima endanisiidn, I am there, etc. Nin danaki, I reside, or am native of a certain plače; Mo- ningwanekaning endanakidjig, the natives or the perma- nent inhabitants of Lapointe. Nin dodam, I do; mi 'endodamdn, I do so ; mi endodaman, thou dost so; mi endodftng, he does so. Nin dapine, I die in a certain plače ; nibikang endapined- jig, those that die in the vvater ; nopiming endapined, he that dies in the vvoods. Nin danakamigis, I play somevvhere ; abinodjliag endana- kamigisidjig, playing children; endanaJc&migisiidnin, vvhere I am playing. Nin danakis, I burn somevvhere ; anamakamig endanakis* odjig, those that burn in hell-fire. Nin dan, I have property ; endanidjig kawin bakadessiwag, those that are rich don’t starve ; kinaioa endaniieg, you vvho are rich. Nin danwewidam, I talk: mojag endanwewidangig, those that talk always; endanwewidaman, thou vvho talkest. Nin dajikan, I am occupied in making something, or occu- pied with something; wegonen endajikamanl What art thou making? Kind reader, I can give you no rule at ali, by vvhich you could knovv the verbs beginning vvith a d, that make the Change in the above manner. There are many, beginning likevvise vvith a d, that make the Change regularly, accord- ing to the above table ; as : Nin dagivishin, I arrive ; degmishing. he that arrives: dassing degwishindnin orna ki ivabamin, every time I ar¬ rive here I see thee. 131 Nin dibadjim, I teli; debadjimodjig, those that teli; kawin nin debwetawassi a/w.anotch gcgo debadjimod; I don’t believe him who teliš so many different things. Nin dibakoniice, I judge ; debakoniwed, a judge ; dassing debakor,iweian, inmikwenim Debendjiged, as often as thou judgest, remember the Lord. Nin dajinge, I calumniate ; dejingedjig, those that calum- niate, calumniators; dejingeian, thou who calumniatest. Nin dibenima, I am his, (her, its,) master, or proprietor; debenimad iniw oshkinawen, the master of this young man. Debenimag, whose master I am. Atn dibaaki, I am surveying^mds ; debaakidjig, survey- ors ; debaakiidnin nopiming nin babamosse, when I am surveying, I walk through the woods ; debaakiieg, ye sur- veyors. Nin dibaige, I measure, I pay; gioaiak debaigedjig, those whose measure is just; debaigeianin, when I am measur- iug, or paying. Nin debweiendam, I believe; daiebieeicndang, who believes, a believer; ki jawendagos, daiebiveiendaman, thou art happy, believer ; daiebweiendangin, when he believes. Nin debissin, I ate enough ; daiebissinid, a person that has eaten enough ;. daiebissinianin migwetch inenim Debend¬ jiged, when thou hast eaten sufficientv, thank the Lord. Nin debtve, I teli the truth ; kaginig daiebwed, who always speaks the truth; daiebivessig jingendagosi, who does not teli the truth is hated ; daiebweiangon, when vve are tell- ing the truth. As there is no rule which could point out the verbs begin- ning vvith a d, that belong to tire Tjrst class, or to this second class, you will have to learn them by usage, and by the Dictionary. Remark 2. In the perfect, pluperfect and future tenses the Change is not made in the verb itself, but in the parti- cles or signs that precede the verb. These particles or pre- fixes are : gi-, ga-, gad-. Gi- r is changed. into ga-; ga- into ge-; gad- into ged-. F. i. 132 Gi-gigito, he has spoken ; mi aio ga-gigitod, this is the one that has spoken. Gi-sigaandaso, he has been baptized ; ga-sigaandasodjig, those that have been baptized. Nin ga-dodam, I vvill do ; megonen ge-dodamdn ? vvhat shall I do? Ki ga-nbndam, tliou vvilt hear ; ki kikendan na ge-nonda- man? dost thou knovv what thou shalt hear ? Nin gal-anikanctaag«, I vvill interpret; atoenen ged-anikan- otawad ? vvhom vvilt thou interpret ? Nin gad-ija, I vvill go ; ffnindi ged-ijaian ? vvhere vvilt thou go? Remark 3. There are tvvo other particles or signs, bi-, . and wi-,which use to precede verbs ; and the Cliange is tnade in these signs ; bi-, vvhich indicates approaching or coming, is changed into ba- ; and wi-, vvhich ordinarily de- notes intention, vvill, or vvish, is changed into wa-. F. i. Nin ijl-ija, I come here ; b'a-ijaianin, vvhen I come here : dassing ba-ijaiegon ki bidonawa gego, every time you come here, you bring something; ba-ijadjig, those that come here. Nin bi-gagwcdjima, I come here to ask him a question ; ba-gagwedjimag, he to vvhom I come to ask him a ques- tion; ba-gagwedjimikig, those vvho come to ask thee a question. Nin wi-madja, I intend to go away ; mi igiw wa-madjadjig, those are the persons that vvant to depart; wa-madjaba- nig, those that intended to go ; aicenen zca-madjad ? vvho vvants to go? Nin wi-kikendan, I vvant or vvish to knovv ; wa-kikendang gagwedwe, he vvho vvants to knovv, asks; wa-kikendama- nin gego, vvhen I vvish to knovv something. Remark 4. When two of these signs precede the verb, the Changc is made in the first one. F. i. Nin gi-bi-bimishkd, I čarne here (I have come here) in a canoe; ga-bi-bimishkad, he vvho Came here in a canoe; 133 ga-bi-bimishkadjig, those vvho came here in a canoe, boat, etc. Nin gi-bi-bimosse,. I came here (I am conae here) on foot; ga-bi-bimossedjig, those that came here on foot; nin ga- bi-bimosseian, I vvho came here on foot. Nin ga-wi-ija, I vvill go ; awenen ge-wi-ijad ? vvho vvill go ? ge-wi-ijadjig, those that vvill go. Nin ga-wi-dibadjimotawa, I vvill teli him; mi aw ge-wi- dibadjimotaiodd, this one vvill teli him ; nin ge-wi-diba- djimotawag, I vvho vvill tel]^him. Remark 5. Verbs that are preceded by certain particles or prefixes, by prepositibns, adverbs, or adjectives, make the Chauge in the first vovvel ofthese words. When more than one of such vvords precede the verb, and relate imme- diately to it, the Change is made in the first vovvel of the first of them; and in vvriting vve attach them vvith hyphens to the verb, beginning from the Change. F. i. Gego nind ondji ikit iw, I say that for some reason; wego- nen wendji-ikitoian iw ? why dost thou say that ? Nin mino bimadis, I live vvell; meno-bimadisid, vvho lives vvell. Kitchi mino ijitoebisi aw inini, he is a very good man; aic ketchi-mino-ijiwebisid. inini, that very good man. Nind apitchi mino aia, I am very vvell ; aidpitchi-mino- aiadjig, those that are very vvell. Apitfihi kitchi akosi, he is extremely sick ; aidpitchi-kitchi- akosid, a person extremely sick. Progressive scaie of Change.. Aid, he is ; ciad, he that is meno-aiad, he that is vvell ; ketchi-mino^aiad,. he that is very vvell; aidpitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that is perfect]y vvell ; wa-apitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that vvishes to be perfectly vvell; ge-wi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that intends to be per- fectly vvell. 9 134 Remark 6. In regard to the orthography of the above- mentioned signs, viz: gi-; ga-, - - - denoting the perfect or pluperfect tenses, ga-, gad-; ta-; ge-, ged-; denoting the future tense, bi-; ba-; - - - „ coming, approaching, wi-; wa-; „ intention, will, da-, condition. etc. etc. In regard, I say, to the orthography of these signs or prefixes, I vvish to observe that I think it very proper and grammatical, to attach them with hyphens to their respec- tive verbs, to which they are really incorporated, in the Change as well as without it. You will perhaps say that in the English Conjugations we also have signs, to express different significations and positions of the verb ; as : have, shall, will, should, would, etc. ; but we don't join them, in writing, to their verbs with hyphens.—Yes, that is true; but the analogy is not quite adequate. These English signs in Conjugations are at the same time words by them- selves; vvhereas our Otchipwe signs are not words by themselves, are never employed alone, but only used with verbs to give them the above-mentioned significations. They must be considered as portions or parts of their verbs. This is the reason why some write them in one word with the verb ; which I also did formerly myself. But consider- ing the thing grammatically, I think it is better to let the verb appear by itself, and to join its sign by a hyphen to it. For an illustration of the inadequateness of the above analogy, consider the follovving examples ; In English ycu say : “ I will go and if asked : Will you go? your ansvver is: “ Yes, I will.” Here you use only the sign wilt. In Otchipwe you say : “ Nin gad-ija;” and if asked ; Ki gad-ija na ? your answer cannot be, “ E, nin gad." 135 You cannot use only the sign, gad; you must put the verb with it and say : “ E, nin gad-ija.” In English again you say : “ I have written five letters yesterday.” And then affirming you will say: “ Certainly, I have.” In Otchipvve you say : “ Nanan masinaiganan nin gi-ojibi- anan pitchinago.” And then affirming you cannot say : “ Geget nin gi.” As soon asyou pronounce gi, yoti must also express the verb, and say : Nin gi-ojibianan. You see by these illustrations, that these Otchipvve signs are inseparably connected vvith their respective verbs : and that it. is reasonable to join them to the verbs also in writ- ing; but in a manner as not to disfigure the verb, and stili to appear joined to it ; which is effected by the use of hy- phens. And in grammatical consequence of this method of join- ing the signs to their verbs by hyphens, ali the words be- tvveen the sign and its verb, must come under the same rule. F. i. Nin bimadiš, I live ; nin ga-bimadis; nin ga- mino-bimadis ; nin ga-kitchi-mino-bimadis; nin gad-apitchi- kitchi-mino-bimadis.— Ali these words betvveen the sign and the verb, are in the immediate connection vvith the verb like one word vvith it; and throughout ali the move- ments and changes of the verb, they vvill remain in the same position to it, like a constellation. F. i. Nin gi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadis ; ki gi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadis; gi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisi ; etc. Ta-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisi ; ta-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisiwag; etc. Kin ga-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisiian, ga-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisid. But vvhere there is no such sign vvith a hyphen in the beginning, the adverbs or adjectives that precede the verb. 136 will not be attached to it by hyphens; there is no gram- matical reason for it; as : Nin mino bimadis ; nin kitchi mino bimadis; nind apitchi kitchi mino bimadis. We have now seen how the Change is effected ; let us here consider, when it is used. Rule 1. It is used in ali the participles of ali the tenses, as you will see in ali these Conjugations. F. i. Ekttod, who says ga-inendang , who thought nin ge-dagwishi- nan, I who shall arrive ; nin maidbamag, I v.dio see hira, etc. Rule 2. It is employed in sentences which express period¬ ični actions, events, or States of being. These sentences or expressions contain in English the words : each, every one, every time, when, ivhenever, as often as . . . F. i. Anamiegijigad, it is Sunday, (VIII. Conjugation.) Dassing eriamiegijigakin, every_ Sunday, (as often as it is Sunday.) Enamiegijigakin, on Sundays. Nin ganona, I speak to him; gego.nagin nin nakwctag, when I speak tp him, he ansvvers me; genonindivanin, when they are spoken to. Nind ab, I am; ebiianin orna, bi-nasikawishikan, when I am here, come to me; dassing ebidjin medi, miniktee, every time he is there, he drinks. Rule 3. The Change is likevvise employed in. sentences which express actions or events as just past, and con¬ tain in English the- vvords, ivhen, as soon as, etc. F. i. Ga-madjad, koss, gi-ikitowag iw ; when thy father had gone away, (or, after he went away.) they said that. Ga-ishkwa-nagamowad anamie-nagamon, gi-madjawag; when they had sung a hymn, they went . . . Ga-sagaang nishime, pabige nin gi-mikan masinaigan; as soon as my brother had gone out, I found the book. Panima ga-ishkwataieg kinama, gi-madjita; when you had done, he began. 137 Role 4. The Change is employed after the interrogative adverbs anin 1 hovv ? what ? and aniniwapi ? vvhen ? And after the interrogative pronouns awenen 1 awenenag ? who? and wegonen 1 vvhat? Likevvise after the adverb api, or mi api, vvhen, at that time, then. F. i. Anin eji-bimadisiian? hovv dost thou do? (hovv dost thou live ?) Anin ekitod koss 1 vvhat says thy father ? Anin ejinikadeg ow ? what they call this ? Aniniwapi ga-nibopan ? when has he died ? Arnenen ga-bi-pindiged 1 who came in 1 Wegonen ged-ikitoian? what vvilt thousay? -dpi ge-niboiang, when vve shall die. After the interrogative adverb anindi? vvhere?, the Chaiige is made sometimes; but ordinarily it is not used. F. i. Anindi ijaian 1 vvhere art thou going ? Anindi at egi vvhere is it ? Anindi -aiad J-esits nongom ? vvhere is novv Jesus? The Change is used after anindi?., vvhen iw is ex- pressed or underštood F. i. Anindi ga-danisid Jesus bwa mashi gagikived? vvhere lived Jesus, before he began to preach? Iw is underštood : Anindi iw ga-danisid ? (vvhere is-that plače vvhere he lived?) Rule 5. The Change is -used in sehtences expressing coniparison, and containing in English the eonjunction as. F. i. Enendaman nin gad-tjitchige, Tvvill act as thou vvilt. Enendaman apegish ijiivebak, be it as thou vvilt, (thy vvill be done.) Weweni ijiwebisin, sioanganamiadjig ejiivebisitcad, live up- right, as good Christlans live. Ekttoian mi ge-diian, be it done to me as thou sayest. Rule 6. The Change is used in sentences that express quality, and contain the adverbs minik, kabina, miši, ali, ali that, vvhatever ; wegotogwen, vvhatsoever. F. i. Alinik ekitod Kije-Manito, debwewinagadini, ali that God .says is true. 138 Kakina minik eji-gagikimigoian, eji-wabandaman gaie ki masinaigan, kakina tveiveni ganaioendan; vvhatever thou art taught in sermons, and ali that thou readest in thy book, keep ali well. Wegotogwen ge-dodamogwen, ged-ikitogu>en gaie', whatsoev- er he shall do and say. Wegotogwen g.e-nandotamawegwen Weossimind nind ijini- kasowining, ki g&minigmca-f whatsoever ye shall ask the Father in my name, he will give it to you. Rule 7. The Change is employed in some tenses of the subjunctive mood in the Dubitative Conjugations ; as you will see there. F. i._ Ekitowdnen, if I say perhaps. Ekitogtven, if he perhaps says. . . Kishpin gwaiak ga-anamiassiwdnen, if I b.ave perhaps not well prayed. Rule 8. Ordinarily, (not always,) the Change is employed after mi. F. i. Mi enendamdn, mi ekitoidn; so I think, so I say. Mi ejiwebak orna (dcing, so it is here on earth. Mi sa ga-ikitod, mi dash ga-iji-madjad so he said, and went away. Mi na eji-kikinoamagoian T art thou taught so t Mi gi-ishkwatang, madjada; ali is over, let us go. Mi gi-debissiniidn; migvetch gi-ashamiian; I have eaten. enough ; I thank thee that thou gavest me to eat. Mi na madjaimi ? art thou going t (In the three last examples there is no Change after mi.), Rule 9. The Change is always employed in sentences which contain in English a relative pronoun. (Exam- ples you will find on page 83.) This Rule 9, is to be considered as coincident with Rule t, because relative pronouns in English sentences are al- ways expressed in Otchipwe by participles. Let us now eonsider the verb of our paradigm of the I. Conjugation, in the cases of the Change.. 139 The participles are displayed in the paradigm. In the sentences expressing periodical actions, events, or tates of being, the verbs of the I. Conj. are formed thus : AFFIRMATIVE FORM. PRESENT TENSE. Ekitoitimn, vvhen I say, or, whenever I say, e&itiianin, efcftodjin, ekitongm, (quand on dit,) efafoiangon, ) , emeiangon, ) ekitoiegon, ekitov/adpn, NEGATIVE FORM. PRESENT TENSE. £Z:itossiwanin, when I dont say, eHfossivvanin, ekitossigon, ekitossingin, (grand on ne dit pas,) ekitossiwš.ngon, ) , , ,, 7 ■ 5 ? vvhen vve don t say, etfitossivrangon, J J cZritossivvegon. e#ttossigwanin, Remark. In the sentences expressing periodical actions, events or States, not only the Change is made, but also one of the syllables in, nin, or on, is added to the verb, as you «ee here above, and in the examples of Rule 2., page 136. This is done, vvhen the adverb dassing, (vvhich signifies, vvhenever, as often as, every time,) is expressed or under- 140 stood. At the third persons, that eud in d, the letter j is inserted between d and the syllable in, as you see above. (See an analogy of it in Remark, p. 26.) Please remember vvell this Remark. It is applicable to almost ali our Conjugations. In the perfect and future tenses the terminotions reraain the same, and the Change is made in the signs, or prefixes, g«-, and ga-, or gad--, the former being changed into ga-, the latter into ge-, or ged--, as : Ga-ikitoianin, when (or vvhenever) I have said ; ga-ifeztodjin, when he has said ; ga-ikitoiegon, etc. .. ged-ikitoianin, whenever I shall say, ged-ikitoianin, ged.-ikitowadpn, etc. . . Ga-ikitossiwanin, when I have not said; ga-ikitossigon, when he has not said ; ga-ikitossiwegon, etc.. . ge kinawind ga-ilato^ngobanen, ] we whohad p. said. kinawa ga-ikitowegobanen, ivinatva ga-ikitogobanenag, See eecond Note, page 126. (Ninekitowambanen; kin ekitoivambanen.) 145 ekit ossi wegwen, efo7ossiwagwen, as : (ra-ikitowanen, . . . Ged-ikitomdnen, . . . FLUPERFECT TENSE. Kamin i7n7dssiwambanen, if I had p. not said. “ iHčossivvambanen, “ ifo7ossigobanen, “ iHžossiwangibanen, (ninateind) “ i£t7ossiwangobanen, (kinaicind) “ ?Z77ossiwegobanen, “■ i/riZossiwagobanen, PART ICI PLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin ekitossin-ilnen, I who perhaps don’t sav, kin «Zrz7ossivvanen, min ekitossigvven, mnamind e^(7ossiwangen, ( , o ' \ wg vvno kinamind efci7ossiwangen, f kinawa efa7ossiwegwen, minama ekitoss'igwei\;ig. ed ; as : Nin ga-ikitomdncn, . . Nin gcd-ikitomdnen, . . . PLVPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-i/r7ossiwambanen, I who had p. not said, kin ga-iZrifossivvambanen, min ga-;7c/7ossigobanen, ninamind gi-dibadjimogwen matchi dajindivtin.—Kego debvtetangegon. I don’t know who has told here the calumny. Do not believe it. Kantin nin gi-wabamassig ir)iw ga-bosigwenagpitchinago. I have not seen those that have gone a\vay yesterday (in a canoe, boat, etc.) (as I understood.) 149 Kin wika ga-atagessiwanen, kego gaie nongom uika wissokawaken netd-atagedjig. Thou who never hast gamed, (as they say.) do also now never frequent habitual gamblers. Pluperfect Tense. Anishinabeg waieshkat ga-bimadisi- gobanenag aking, gi-matclii-ijiivebisigivaban. People who had lived on earth in the beginning, were wicked. Mi na aw inini ga-gigitogobanen ?—Endogioen. Is that the man that spoke (that had spoken) ?—I don’t know, (or, may be.) Futvre Tense, Au-enen aw ged-ijitchigegwen mojag, ga- inakonigeiang nongom gijigak 1 Who is likely to do ahvays what.we have ordered to-day. Nin, uaiba ge-niLoioanen, kawin nin babamendansin da- nitoin aking. I, who perbaps shall soon die, don’t čare for the riches of this world. Remarkin regard to the second third person* In the simple third person singular, present, indicative, affirmative form, you say : Ikito, he says, But in the se¬ cond third person to have to say : Ikitowan, etc., according to the follovving Examples. The simple third person, to vvhich the second is relating, is often understood only, not Cxpressed, as you will see here belovv. * See page 72. 10 150 AFFIRMATIVE FORM. INDIC ATI V E MOOD PRESENT, PERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES. Ossan ikitov/an, his father says. Onigiigon ikitov/an, his parents say. Ogin gi-nibov/an, his mother is dead. Nij oshimeian gi-nibov/an, two of his younger brothers (sisters) are dead. Ogwissan ta-madjawan, his son will.go away. Nisstoi oguissan ta-madjawan, three of his sons will go away. 1MPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. Ossan ikitobanin, his father said. Onigiigon iZritobanin, his parents said. Osan gi-ikitobanin, his father had said. • Onigiigon gi-ikitobanin, his parents had said.' SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT, PERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES. Kishpin ossan ikitonid, if his father say. Kishpin onigiigon ikitonid, if his parents say. Kashkendam nitdwiss gi-nibonid ossan, my cousin is afflicted because his father is dead. Kashkendamog niningioanissag gi-nibonid ossiivan, my nephews are afflicted because their father is dead. Kashkendamog nishimissag gi-nibonid onigiigotoan, my nieces are afflicted because their parents are dead, 151 NEGATIVE FORM. 1NDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT, PERFECT AND FUTURE TENSES. Kaivin ossan ikitossiwan, his father does not say. ,, onigiigon ikitossiwan, his parents don’t say. „ ogin gi-nibossivran, his mother is no^dead. „ nij oshimeian gi-nib ossiwan, two of his younger brothers (sisters) are not dead. ,, ogmissan ta-madjassiwan, his son will not go a\vay. „ nissan ogwissan ta-madjassiwan, three of his sons will not go away. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. Kawin ossan itoossibanin, his father did not say. ,, onigiigon iizVossibanin, his parents did not say, ,, ossan gi-ikitossibanin, his father had not said. „ onigiigon gi-iA-iiossibanin, his parents had not said. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT, PERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES. Kishpin ossan ikitossinig, if his father does not say. ,, onigiigon ikitossinig, if his parents do not say. Minwendam nitawiss gi-nibossinig ossan, my cousin is glad that his father has not died. Mimnendamog niningwanissag gi-nibossinig ossiioan, my nepheivs are glad that their father has not died. Minwendamog nishimissag gi-nibossinig onigiigoiran, my nieces are glad because their parents have not died. 152 Aniniivapi ge-madjanid ossaieian ? When will his brother start ? Nin kikendan ged-ijitchigenid oshimeian, I know what his brother will do. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Ossan ningot ikilonvpavi, bakan da~gi-ijiwebad; had his father said anything, it would have been othervvise. Ogtvissan gicaiak ijittebisitdpan, kawin da-gi-animisissi- wan ; had his son behaved right, he would not have been punished. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Debeniminang o sagian enamianidjin, the Lord loves the Christians, (or, a Christian.) Aw anishindbe weweni o pisindmuan gegikwemdpn, this Indian listens attentively to thepreacher, (or, preachers.) IMPERFECT TENSE. Mekatewikwanaie o pi-ganonan anishinaben enamianipanin, the Missionary spoke to an Indian that was a Christian, (or, to Indiana that were Christians, that prayed.) Ossaieian iniw e&itonipanin, it was his brother who said it. Afier these two tenses you may 153 IVegonen iw ged-ijitchigessmig ossaieian ? What is that which his brother shall not do ? Wegonen ged-ikitossinig oskimeian ? What will his bro¬ ther not say ? PLUPERFECT TENSE. Ossan ningot ikitossinigoban, kaivin ningot da-gi-ijiweb- assinon, had his father not said anything, nothing would have happened. Ogwissan givaiak ijiivebisissinigoban, da-gi-animtsiwan, had his son not behaved right, he would have been punished. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. Katvin Debeniminang o sagiassin e.namiassm\gon, the Lord does not love pagans, (or, a pagan.) Kaurin enamiad o da-wissokawassin gviaiak ejiuebisissmi- gon; the Christians, (or, a Christian,) ought not to associ- ate with those that behave not well. IMPERFECT TENSE. Mekatewikwanaie nongom o gi-gashkian iniw oshkinauen, givaiak e/itcAigessinigobanin, the Missionary (priest) has now converted that young man who did not act well. Mi na ossaieian iniw gwaiak efefossinigobanin ? Is he that did not say right, his brother ? form the others of these participles. 154 II. CONJUGATION. To this Conjugation belong ali the intransitive or neuter verbs ending at the characteristical third person in am. They likewise end so at the first person singular, present, indicative. This m, in which ali the verbs of this Conju¬ gation end, is put among the>terminations, as you see in the paradigms. The reason is, because it does not remain in ali the tenses, but is sometimes changed into n. Note. In the I. Conjugation, I displayed the negative form in full, (on the opposite page.) In order to save room, I will put, in the subsequent Conjugations, only the terminations bf the negative form, the body of the verb re- maining the same in this form, as in the affirmative. F. i. Nind inendam, negative, Kamin nind inendansi. Kid inendam, neg. Kamin kid inendaasi. Inendam* neg. Ka¬ min inendansi, etc. Here are some verbs belonging to this Conjugation .- First Person. Third Person. Nin nanagadamendam* I meditate ; Nind anijitam*I-give up ;■ Nin segendam, I am afraid; Nin dodam* I do, I act ; Nin kashkendam, I am sad ; Nin pisindam, I listen ; Nin pagosskndam, I ;isk, I hope ; Nind initam* I hear something ; Nin massitdmndam ; I am sorrowful;■ Nin sagaam, I go out $ Nin songendam, I have a firm thought ;• Nind dgonmelam* I disobey > I contra- dict; Nin gijendam, I resolve ; Ninjafibitam* I gainsay ; Nin bonendam* I fbrget something ;• Nin debioetam, I believe ; Nin vissagendam, I suffer ; ndnagatamendam. dnijitam. segendam. dodam. kashkendam. pisindam. pagossčndam. initam. massitamend am. s&gaam. songendam. dgonmetam* gijendam. jajlbitam. bonendam. debioetam. vdssagcndmn 155 AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nind inenrfam, I think* (or, I will) Kaurin nsi, kid inendam, „ nsi, inendam, ,, nsi, inendam, they think, (on ,, nsim, pense) + oije thinks, nind inendamin, „ nsimin, kid inendam, „ nsim, inendamog, „ nsiwag, IMPERFECT TENSE. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-inendanaban.% Ihad thought, Kaurin nsinaban, ki gi-inendanzban, ,, nsinaban, * See Remark 4. p. 102. t See Remark p. 92. t See Note, p. 104. 156 gi-inendamoban, nin gi-inendammaban, ki gi-inendamveaban, gi-nendamobanig, Kawin nsiban, ,, nsiminaban, „ nsimwaban, ,, nsibanig, FUTURE TENSE. Nin gad-inendam, I will think, ki gad-inendam, ta-inendam, ta-inenddm, nind gad-inendamm, ki gad-inendam, ta-inendamog, Kawin nsi, „ nsi, „ nsi, ,, nsim, ,, nsimin, „ nsim, ,, nsiwag. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Ninga.gi-inendam, I shall have thought, Kaivin nsi, ki ga-gi-inendam, „ nsi, ta-gi-inendam, „ nsi, ta-gi-inenddm, „ nsim, nin ga-gi-inendamin, „ nsimin, ki ga-gi-inendam, „ nsim,. ta-gi-inendamog, „ nsi\vag. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. * jSee the Remarks concerning this and the following two tenses, 157 SECOND PUTUKE TEN SE Ge-gi-inendaman, what I shall have nsivvan, thought, ge-gi-inendaman, nsivvan, Ete. as in the present tense, alvvays prefixing gc-gi-. 158 CONDITIONAL MOOD. PKESENT TENSE. Nin da-inendam, I would think (or, I Katrin nsi, ought to think,) ki da-inendam, ,, nsi, da-inendam, ,, nsi, da-inendam, they would think ,, nsim, (on penserait,) nin da-inendamm, „ nsimin, ki da-inendam, ,, nsim, da-inendamog, „ nsiwag. PERFECT TENSE. Nin da-gi-inendam, I ivould have Katrin nsi, thought, or I ought to have thought. have thought, Ete., as above in the second future tense of the subj, mood, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Inendan, ) think, Kego ngen, inentZamokan, } (thou,) ta-inendam, let him (her, it,) “ nsi, think, ta-inenddm, let them think, “ nsim, (qu’on pense,) 159 tnendanda, let us think, “ nsida, inendamog, think, (you,) “ ngegon, ta-inendamog, let them think, “ nsiwag. PARTICIPLES. * PRESENT TENSE. Nin enendaman, I who think, kin enendanian, thou vvhothink- est, win enendang, enendaming,what one thinks (ce qu’on pense,) ninaioind enendamang, ) we that kinawind enendamang, ( think, kinawa enendameg, toinaiea enendangig, nsiwan, nsivvan, nsig, nsing, nsiwang, nsiwang, nsiweg, nsigog. nsiwan, nsiwan, nsig, nsing, nsiwang, nsivvang, 1MPERFECT TENSE. Nin enendam&mban, I who tho’t, kin enendamamban, win enendangiban, enendamingiban, nsiwdmban, nsiwamban, nsigoban, nsingiban, ninauind enenttamdngiban, ) we who nsivvangiban, kinmoind enendamangoban, thought nsivvangoban, kinawa enendamegoban, nsiwegoban, winawa enemdangibanig. nsigobanig, PERFECT TENSE. B Nin ga-inendamdn, I who have thought, ' km ga-mendaman, win ga-inendang, ga-inendaming, ninaioind ga-inendamdng > ) we who have kinaunnd ga-inendamang, \ thought, See Remark 5. p. 117. 160 kinatea ga-inendameg, nsivveg, trinatca ga-inendangig, nsigog. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-inendamamban, I uho had nsivvamban, thought, kin ga-inendamamban, nsivvamban, win ga-inendang\ban, nsigoban, ga-inendam ingiban, nsingiban, ninatrind ga-inendamangiban, ) we vvho nsivvangiban, kinatrind ga-inendamangoban, f had th. nsivvangoban, kinatoa ga-ineridamegoban, nsiwegoban, trinatca ga-incndangibanig, nsigobanig, FUTURE TENSE. Nin ged-inendaman, 1 who shall nsivvan, think, kin ged-inendaman, nsivvan, trin ged-ittendang, nsig, ged-inendaming, nsing, ninatrind ged-inendamang, | we vvho shall nsivvang, kinatrind, ged-inendamang, J think. nsiwang, kinawa ged-inendameg, nsivveg, tvinatca ged-inendangig, . nsigog. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-gi-inendaman, I vvho shall nsivvan, have thought, kin ge-gi-inendaman, nsivvan. Ete., as above in tbcfirstfnture, always prefixing gc-gi-, to the verb. Remark. The letter n before the svllable si, in the neg¬ ative form, is commonly not heard in pronouncing. F. i. Katrin inendansi, is ordinarily pronounced: Katrin inen- dasi, etc . . . But this n ihust be in, grammaticallj-, be- cause othervvise there would be two s in the negative form, as this alvvays is the čase betvveen tvvo vovvels; and the a- 161 bove vvord would then be, inendassi.-. butit does not sound so. Correct speakers pronounce the n enough to be per- ceived by an attentive ear. Let us now consider the Change of the verbs of the II, Conjugation. The participles, which have always the Change, are fully displayed in the above paradigm. In the sentences expressing periodical actions or States of being, the verbs of this Conjugation are formed thus : AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. PRESENT TENSE. Enendamanin, vvhen, (or vvheneverjnsivvanin, I think, entndamariva, nsivvanin, enencfangin, nsigon, enendamingin, nsingon, ewe»<7«mangin, ) , nsivvangin, , 7 ž vvhen vre. . 6 ’ enendamangon, ) nsivvangon, enendamegon, nsivvegon, enenrfamovvadjin, * nsigvvanin. In the perfect and future tenses the terminations are the same as here above, and the Change is made in the prefixes, gi-, and ga- or gad-. Gi- is changed into ga-. and ga- or gad- into ge- or ged-. F. i. Ga-inendamamn, vvhen (or vvhen- nsivvanin, ever) I have thought, ga-ineiidamanin, nsivvanin, ga-inendangin, nsigon, Ged-inendamanin, vvhen I shall nsivvdnin, think, ged-inendamangin, nsivvangin, ged-inendamowadpn, nsigvvanin, t See Remark, p. 26. 162 In the other cases of the Change, (see p. 137. and 138.) it is made in the same way as here stated; only the end- syllables, in, (jin,) nin, or on, are omitted; as: Enenda- man; ga-inendaman, ged-inendamdn, etc. . ESAMPLES ON THE II. CONJUGATION. * INDICATIVE MOOD. present tense. Pa.kad.kwe bonam, kakina gaie bineshiiag bonamog; the hen Iays eggs, and ali the birds lay eggs. Pabige anijitamog, kawin songendansimag; they give up immediatelv, they have no firm resolution. Kaginig modjigendamog gijigong ebidjig, kaginig mina- wanigwendamog; those that are in heaven are always contented, they continually rejoice. imperfect tense. Ki kashkendanaban, naieshkat orna ba-aiaian; thou wert lonesome when thou first stayed here. , Mino kwiwisensi.wiban, kamin mika agonmetansiban; he was a good boy, he never contradicted, (disobeyed.) Minmendamobanig ninigiigog gi-wdbamiwad minama; my parents were glad when they saw me again. perfect tense. Kaurin nakane ki gi-ndnagatawendansi ged-ikitoian ; thou hast not reflected before hand what thou vvouldst say. Gi-sdgaam na ? Kanin gi-sdgaansi, keiabi orna aia. Is he (she) gone out ?—He (she) is not gone out, he (she) is yet here. Weweni nin gi-pisindamin gi-gagikmeian ; vve have lis- tened attentively while thou preachedst. Pluperfect tense. Nin gi-mamakadendanaban waie- * See* JVote, p. 122. 163 slikat loabandaman ishkotenabikwan ; I vvondered when I -first saw a steamboat. * Kakina gi-sagaamobanig gi-bwa-pindigetdn; they were ali gone out before I vvent in. Kawin na ki gi-debwetansimwaban bidadjimoioin ga- nondameg ? Did you not believe the news you heard. future tense. Mojag ninga-nanagatawendam tchi bwa gigitoidn; I will always reflect before I speak. Meno-ijiwebisidjig katvin ta-segendansiicag api ge-nibow- ad; those that behave well, will not be afraid at the hour of death. Metchi-ijiwebisidjig kaginig ta-kotagendamog andmak- amig; those that are vvicked will suffer eternally in hell. Second Future Tense. Nin ga-gi-gijendam tchi bwa minaica wabamiian; I shall have taken a resolution be¬ fore thou seest me again. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. present tense. Apegish mojag mino inendamdn, wika dash tchi matchi inendansiwdn ; I wish I had always good thoughts and never bad thoughts. Apegish mashkawendamoicad tchi anamiaicad ; apegish wika bakan inendansigwa. I wish they would think firmly to be Christians; I wish they would never thing othervvise. Kishpin kashkendaman, kotagendaman gaie orna aking mikwendan kagige icdnakivnn gijigong ; if thou art sad and suffering here on earth, think on the eternal repose in heaven. Manadad, pabige tchi nishkadendaming ; it is bad to have immediately angry thoughts. t See Note, p. 116. 164 Onijishin tchi mashkavtendaming, icenijishing gcgo tchi dodaming it is right to think firmi}' (or to have a firm will,) to do something that is fair, (or good.) Perfect Tense. Gi-wewibendaman,mi wdiha ga-bi-ondji- giweian ; because thou hast made haste, therefore thou hast come back soon. Wika gi-bejigwendansigwa, mi sa ga-ondji-anijitamo- wad; they never have United in their thoughtš, therefore they have given up. Mi gi-bonendamdn ga-iji-kitchi-matchi-dodagoidn; I have now forgotten, (I have done thinking,) how ill I have been treated. Pi.uperfect Tense. Dodansiicegoban ga-dodameg, kaiv- in ki da-mino-aiassim nongom ; if you had not done what you did, you would not be vvell now. Gi-bi-sagaamdngiban gi-biva-pindiged, mi ga-ondji-bi- san-abid ; because we were gone out before he came in, < therefore he was quiet. Winawa gikawidansigwaban, kamin awiia bakan da-gi- matchi-ikitossi ; had they not quarrelled, nobody else had said any bad vvords. Future Tense. Ki ga-windamon ge-dodaman ; I will teli thee what I shall do. Pisindan gagikwewin, mi ge-ondji-mashkamendaman tchi mino ijiwebisiian; listen to preaching, and thou wilt firmly resolve to behave vvell. Mikmendamog ge-dibaamagoieg, mi dash iw wika ge-on- dji-anijitansiweg eji-anamiaieg ; think on the revvard you. shall receive, and you will never give up your religion. Sbcond Future Tense. Ki ga-windamon ge-gi-inend- aman ; I will teli thee what I shall have thought. Minik ge-gi-dodameg'pma aking,mi iw ge-mikameg dibakc- nige-gijigak ; vvhatever you shall have done on earth, you will find it on the day of judgment. 165 CONDITIONAL MOOD.. Present Tense. Ki da-mimoendam na tchi icabameg kinigiigoaag ? Would you be glad to see your parents? Kishpin bekadisiiamban, kawin ki da-gikawidansi mo- jag ; if thou wert of a quiet disposition, thou vvouldst not always quarrel. Da-mamakadendainog kishpin wabandamowad Kitchi-me- katewikwanaie od anamieioigamig ; they would wonder if they saw a cathedral. Ki da-debweiendam nwdndamaniit gagikwewin; thou oughtst to believe when thou hearest a sermon. Perfect Tense. Nin da-gi-kitchi-wassitawendam, mikioe- nimassiwagiban Debendjiged ; I would have been very sorrowful, had I not thought on the Lord. Nawdtch nin da-gi-minwendamin, kakina dagwish,ino- wapan ; we would have been more contented if they had come, ali of them. Kaurin wika nin da-gi-nanagatawendansi g-ed-ijiwebak ningoting, noitdansiiodmbaii Kije-Manito od ikitonin ; I would never have meditat.ed on what shall once come to pass, had I not heard the word of God. Kaurin ki da-gi-segendansim, ki da-gi-songendam sa; nauatch da-gi-onijishin. You ought not to have been afraid, you ought to have had a strong thought (resolu- tion;) that vvould have been better. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Debweiendan, kego agonmetangen, kego gaie matchi inen- dangen; believe, do not contradict and think not evil. Mino dodamokan, ninidjaniss, ki ga-jaurindagos; do good, my child, and thou wilt be happy. Ta-mashkawendam; kid ig mekateurikicanaie ; ki gad-ina. Tell him, the Missionary says: Let him be firm in his resolution. 11 166 Ta-wewibendam aw inini; let that man make haste. Minmendanda, minam anigosida, enamiaieg, ki jamendd- gosimin! Let us be contented, let us be joyful, Chris¬ tiana, we are happy ! Kego mika matchi inendanstda, kego mishkadendansida; let us never think evil, let us never have angry thonghts. Kego kashkendangegon,minwendamog; memeni nanagata- mendamog ga-ijimeba.k. Be not sad, be contented, think well on what happened. Kego anijitangegon, apine bejigivendamog; do not give up, have always the same thought. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense.— Ninjamenimagicassagendangig; I pity those that suffer. Jamendagosi enamiad meno-inendang; happy is the Christian that has a good will, Kinaioa mika men.mendansimeg, ki sanagisim ; you that never are contented, you are difficult to be dealt with. Gemanandang memindage kitimagisi; he that dies of hunger, is very much worth of pity. Imperfect Tense. Igim ininimag aiagonieetangibanig, nongom merneni debmetamog; those men that contradict- ed before, believe now. Kinama smangendansimegoban maieshkat, anin nongom enendameg ? You that had no firm resolution at first, what you think now ? Mi aw oshkiname menmendansigoban ; this is the young man that was not willing. PeRfect Tense.— Nond ga-sagaangig kamin o gi-nondan- sinama gagikmemin; those that went out too soon, did not hear the sermon. Kih ga-apitchi-kashlcendaman, keiabi na ki kashkendam ? Thou that hast mourned so much, art ihou yet sad ? aw ga-gijendang tebi madjad mabang J Wha is the person that resolved to start to-morrow ? 167 Pluperfect Tense. Ga-apilchi-debveiendangibanig orna aking, nongom apitchi mino aiavag gijigong; those that had a perfect faith on earth, are now exceedingly happy in heaven. Kinava ga-initamegoban matchi dajindivin, ki gi-deb- vetanava na ? You that had heard the calumny, have you believed it ? Win ga-segendansigoban vika, nongom o gotan niboimn ; he that never feared before, is now afraid of death. Future Tense. Mi sa igiv ged-anijitangig loaiba; these are the persons that will soon give ali up. Aw ge-mashkawendang tchi mino dodang, o ga-songen,- damiigon Debendjigenidjin ; the Lord will give strength to him who shall firmly resolve to do right. Ge-matchi-dodansig vika, ta-jawendagosi; he that shall never do wrong, will be happy. Second Future Tense. Ge-gi-mino-dodangig aking, kaginig ta-dibaamawawag gijigong-, those that shall have acted right (done well) on earth, shall be eternally revvarded in heaven. 168 II. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 1ND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nind inendamidog, I think perhaps, kid inendamidog, inendamodog, [pense peut-čtre,) inendamidog, one thinks perhaps, (on nind tnendaminadog, kid inendamwadog, inendamodogenag, Form after this present tense, the perfect and the future PLUPERFECT TENSE.* Gonima gi-inendamowamba.n, I had perhaps th. . . . gi-inendamdwamban, “ gi-inendamogoban, , , “ gi-inendamowangoban, J that we had P er - “ gi-inendamowegoban, “ gi-inendamogwa.ban, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Enendamow’a.nen, if I think perhaps, enendamowanen, enendamogwen, enendamowangen, (ninawind) 1 enendamowangen, (kinavrind) f 1 w€ enendamowegwen, enendamowagwen, See second Note, page 142, (Inendamowamban; inendamogoban, .) 169 II. DUB1TATIVE CONJUGATION. NEGATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESEKI TENSE. Kawin nind inendansimidog, I do perhaps not think, “ kid inenrfansimidog, “ inendansidog, “ inendansimidog, “ nind ine/užansiminadog, “ kid inenrf«znsimwadog, “ inendansidogenag, tensesjas: Nin gi-inendamideg. Nin gad-inendamidog. . . PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kawin gi-inendansiwamban, I had per. not thought, “ gi-inendansiwaxtd>an, “ gi-inendansigoban, “ gi-inendansiv/angiban, ) ^ at we “ gi-inendansiwangoban, ’ “ gi-inendansiwegoban, “ gi-inendansigwaban, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PEESENT TENSE. Enendansiwanen, if I do perhaps not think, enendansivvanen, enendansigvten, enendansiwangen, ) P , e n e Wan S i W an|en3 lfwed °P er - not - ' em«ndansiwegwen, enendansiwagwen, 170 Form after this tense the perfect and the future tenses ; as : PLUPERFECT TENSE. Jne?idamowambanen, if I had thought I utend«inowambanen, [suppose, inenrfamogobanen, žnendamowangibanen, ) if we had th 2tienendansinigobanin. Paul did not love his deceased wife, who never was contented. participles after these tvvo. 180 III. CONJUGATION. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. jingishin. minosJiin. twashin. ojashishin. osamidon. dananagidon. mishidon. Third Person. dagivishin. pangishin. apitchishin. To this Conjugation belong the intransitive or neuter verbs, that end at the third person singular, present, indic- ative, in in or on; and they likewise end so at the first person. Here are some of the verbs of this description. First Person. Nin dagivishin, I arrive ; Nin pangishin, I fell; Nind apitchishin, I fall hard; Nind agodjin, I hang; or I am on high; agodjin. Nin jingishin, I am lying ; Nin minoshin, I lie well; Nin tioashin, I break through the ice; Nind ojashishin, I slide, or glide; Nind osamidon, I speak to much; Nin dananagidon, I talk ; Nin mishidon, I have a long beard; INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nin dagivishin, I arrive,* Kaurin si, ki dagivishin, “ si, dagivishin, “ si dagivishinim, one arrives, “ sim, they arrive, (on arrive,) nin dagwishinimin,t “ simin, See Remark 4. p. 102, t See Remark 3. p. 102. ki dagivisliinim, dagmisJiinog, 181 sim, sivvag, sinaban, siban, siminaban simvvaban. sibanig. si. si, si. PERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-dagwishin, I have arrived, ki gi-dagwishin, gi-dagivishin, 1MPERFECT TENSE. Nin dagmishininabaa, I arrived, Kawin sinaban, ki dagmishininabm, dagivishinobtm, nin rfcgiois/sHiiminaban, ki dagwisliinim\vabm ) dagwishinob anig, Ete., as above in the present tense, always prefixing gi-, to the verb. 1’LUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-dagioishininaban, I had ar- Kamin sinaban, rived, ki gi-dagwishimnaba.n, “ sinaban, Ete., as above in the imperfect tense, always prefixing,g;-. to the verb. FUTUBE TENSE. Nin ga-dagwishin, I will arrive, Kamin si, ki ga-dagwishin, “ si, ta-dagwishin, “ si, ta-dagwishinim, “ sim, nin ga-dagmisliinimm, “ simin, ki ga-dagmishimm, “ sim, ta-dagmishinog, “ siwag, 12 182 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-gi-dagwishin, I shall have ar- Kaurin si, rived, ki ga-gi-dagwisliin, “ si, ta-gi-dagwishin, “ si, Ete., as above. «• SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Dagvrishinasi* if I arrive, siwan, dagurishinm, ■ siwan, dagurishing, sig, dagwishining, sing, arr. tnou, Kcgo gen, dagwis/unokan, J ° & ’ ta-dagwishin, let him (her, it) “ si, arrive. ta-dagms7iinim,let them arrive. (qu’on arrive,) dagmshinda, let us arrive, dagiirishinog, arrive, ye, ta-dagioishinog, let them arrive “ sim, “ sida, “ g e g on > “ siwag, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin degvnsliinan, I who arrive, kin degwishinan, thou who arr., win degwishing, degvrishining, ninauind degtoishinang, > , . kinawind degvrishinang, $ kinawa degvishineg, ivinaiva degwistiingig, siwdn, siwan, sig, sing, siwang, sivvang, siweg, sigog. 185 IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin degwishinamban, I vvho arrived, kin degwishinamban, win degwishingiban, ninaivind degioisliinecagdoan, ) kinawind degwishinangoban, ) kinawa degwishinegoban, mnawa degwishingibawg, sivvamban, sivvamban, sigoban, sivvangiban, sivvangoban, siwegoban, sigobanig, PERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-dagivishinan, I vvho have arrived, sivvan, kin ga-dagwis/iinan, sivvan, Ete., vvith the terminations of the present, and prefixing ga-, to the verb. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-dagwishinavaban, I who had arr. sivvamban, kin ga-dagwishinamban, sivvamban, Etc.,putting the terminations of the imperfect, and pre- fixing ga-. FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-da.gwish.inan., I who shall arrive, sivvan, kin ge-dagwishinan, siwan, Ete., after the present, prefixing ga-. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-gi-dagivishinan, I vvho shall have ar. sivvan,. kin ge-gi-dagtoishinan, sivvan, Ete., after the present, prefising ge-gi-. Revievv diligently the Remarks and Notes of the two preceding Conjugations, and mind them well; especial]y the Rules and Remarks regarding the Change. 186 Remark. In regard to the conditional mood of these Conjugations it must be observed, that only two tenses, the present and the perfect, are commonly used in it. A third one, called the second perfect tense, could be expressed ; as ; Nin da-gi-ikilonaban ; ninfla-gi-inendanaban, etc. But it is not in common use ; therefore it is omitted in the para¬ digma. (To this tense, the Ist Number of Remark.S, page 119, is partly alluding.) EXAMPI.ES ON THE III. CONJUGATION. 1NDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Nin manishin, kawin nin minoshinsi, ikito aw aiakosid. I lie uncomfortable, I don’t lie well, says that sick person. Ki da-gashkibas, ki kitchi mishidon goslia. Thou oughtst to shave; thy beard is very.long indeed. Imperfect Tense. Keiabi jingishinobanig oa-madjaidn. They were yet in bed when I started to come here. Geget kid osamidonimmaban tibikong; apegish namatch bisan abiieg. You spoke too much indeed last night; I wish you would be more quiet. Perfect Tense. Nissing nin gi-pangishin pitchinago, mikmaming gi-bimosseidn; nijing dash nin gi-twashin. I fell three times yesterday, walking on the ice : and I broke through twice. Nin gi-kitchi-kijikamin anaivi, kamin dash gmaiak nin gi-dagwishinsimin; we went on very fast, but stili we did not arrive in dne time. Pluperfect Tense. Ginmenj Jesus gi-agodjinoban tchi- baiatigong, bwa nibod; Jesus had hung long on the cross, before he died. Kamin mashi kakina gi-dagwishinsibanig, api maiadji- gagikmeng; ali had not yet arrived, when the sermon began. Future Tense. Aw ikwe mikmaming bemossed ta-ojash- ishin ganabatch, ta-apitchishin dash. That woman who walks on the ice, will probably glide and fall bard. 187 Kamin minama nin ga-osamidonsimin, manadad iw ; we will no more talk too much, it is wrong. Second Futuke Tense. Nin ga-gi-dagwishin iteapi, mi dash wedi tchi mabandiiang; I shall have arrived by that time, and so we will see each other there. SUBJUNCTIVE M00D. Present Tense. Ambe bisan bimosseiog tchi palriteshin- siioeg ; walk carefully lest you falL Widbkaw aw aiakosid, tchi givekishid', assist that sick person, in turning on the other side. Apegish bisdnishiieg, kivimisensidog ; I wish you would lie stili, boys. Perfect Tense. Bibonong, gi-tmashinan, gega nibikang nin gi-dapine. Last vvinter, when 1 broke through the ice, I almost perished in the water. Gi-apitchishinan, mi mendji-akosiian; thou art sick, be- cause thou fellest so hard. Plupemect Tense. Osamidonsimegoban, kamin awiia da-gi-nishkadisissi; had you not talked too much, no- body would have been mad. Dagmishindmban ( or gi-dagwishinamban) megwa oma aiad, nin da-gi-gagtnedjima gego ; had I arrived while he was here, I vvould have asked him a auestion. Future Tense. Mino ganamenindisoiog, kamin ki kiken- dansinama api ge-dagwishing anishinabe Ogivissan. Be- ware vvell, for ye know not when the Son of man shall come. Ia'igwa ishpi-gijigad; anin minik ge-jingishinowad kei- abi? It is already late; how long will they yet lie in bed ? Second Fvture Tense. Mi imapi leitchi agaming ge-gi- dagwishinan memija ; at that time I shall have arrived in Europe long ago. 188 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. Kitchi batadouining waiba ki da-pan- gishin, kishpin wissokawad aw oslikinaive-. thou wouldst soon fall in great sins, if thou frequented that young man. Kaurin oiv api ki da-jlrigis/iinsim oma, ki da-anokim sa ; at this hour you ought not to lie here, you ought to be at work. Perfect Tense. Nin da-gi-minoshin tibikong, akosissi- wdmban; I would have lain comfortably last night, had I not been sick. Nibikang da-gi-pangishinog abinodjiiag, bi-ijassiwdm- ban; the children would have fallen in the water, had I not come here. Mi api ge-gi-dagurishindn, or, ge-gi-dagwisliindmban ;* it is at that time I wotild have arrived. IMPERATIVE M00D. Bisanishin, niban, kego bapiken; lie stili, sleep, do not laugh. Bi-dagwishinokan minawa wabang; nin miwendamin bi- ijaian. Please come to-morrow again ; we are happy when thou comest. Kego ta-osdmidonsi aw ikwe; let that vroroan not speak so much. Td-gwekisliin «10 aidkosid inini; let that sick man turn on the other side. Kego osam dananagidonsida, ki nondagonan Debendjiged ; let us not talk too much, the Lord hears us. Bi-dagurishinog naningim, bi-toabamig mekatcwikwanaie ; come often here, come to see the Missionary. Bisan bimosseiog, kego pangishingegon; go on quietly, don’t fall. Ta-ishkwa-dananagidonog anotch ekitodjig; let them cease to talk, those that speak so much. * See Remark 8, gage 119, 189 PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Kitchi onijishiivag anangog ishpiming egodjingig; the stars on high are very beautiful. Kinama besanishiieg kabe-gijig, geget ki kitimishkim; you who are lying stili ali day long, you are really lazy. Imperfect Tense. Kinawa kabe-bibon pckiteshinsiicego- ban, geget ki. mino ganaioenindisom bimosseieg. You who never fell ali vvinter, you walk with great precaution in- deed. Ininiwag nomaia ba-dagwisliingibanig nin gi-ivabamag nongom; I have seen to-day the men that arrived here a short time ago. Perfect Tense. Aw Abinodjl ga-jingishing ningoting pijikimigamigong, mi aw Debendjiged kj. Kije-Manito- minan. The Child that lay once in a stable, is the Lord our God. Jawend&gosiwag wika ga-pangishinsigog kitchi batado- wining ; happy are they who never fell in a great sin. Pluperfect Tense. Mi ogow anishinabe.g ga-twashingi- banig aioassonago; these are the Indians that broke through the ice the day before yesterday. A nindi ejad aw inini ga-dagwishingiban oma sigtoanong ? Where is that young man that had arrived here last spring ? Future Tense. Mi ato ge-dananagidong minama kabe- gijig ; she is the one that will talk again ali day. Orna gc-gawishimodjig, mi igiw geget gc-minosliinsigog ; those who will lie down here, will indeed not lie comfort- able. Second Future Tense. Kakina igiw ge-gi-dagwishin- sigog anamiemigamigong, tchi bwa madjitad mekateicik- manaie, kamin ta-mino-dodansiwag. Ali those that shall not have arrived at the church, before the priest begins the Service, will not do right. 190 III. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. After this present tense are formed the. perfect and the future tenses; as : Nin gi-dagwishinimidog; etc. . . PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gi-dagwiskinowa.mban, Ihad perh. arrived, gi-dagwishinowamban, gi-dagwishinogoban, gi-dagwishinowdngiban, \ gi-dagtcishinowangoban, j gi-dagwis/iinowegoban, gi-dagwishinogwaban, Kawin sinowdmban, “ sinowamban, “ sigoban, “ sinowangiban sinowangiban “ sinowegobbn, “ sigvvaban, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. 2?egwis7waowdnen, that I perh. ar., siwanen, degwishinowanen, siwanen, degwisliinogwen, sigvven, degwisliinowa.ngen,) that we p. siwdngen, degwishinowangon, $ arr. siwangen. 191 degwisJiina^w;is7iinowatnbanen, if I had ar- siwdmbanen, rived I suppose, dagwishinowambanen, siwambanen, dagteishinogobanen, sigobanen, dagwishinowei.ngibanen, 1 I sup. siwangibanen, dagwi.shinowMigoba.nen, J if we .. siwangobanen, dagwishino-wegobanen, siwegobanen, <7agwis7tmowagobanen, siwagobanen. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin degwishinowanen, I who arrive perhaps, kin degwishinowanen, win degioishinogv/en, ninawind degioishi.nowan g en, ) who an , kinaicind degwis/iinow‘dngen, ) kinoma degwishinogwentig, winawa degwishinowegwen, PRESENT TENSE. Nin degwishinsmanen, I who do perh. not arr. kin degivishinsivranen, win dcgwishinsig-wen, ninatoind degwishi.nsi-wa.ngen, kinaioind degwishinsiwangen, kinauia degwishinšiwegwen, winawa degwishinsigwenag. we who do p. not arr. 192 After this present tense are formed the perfect and fu- ture tenses; as : Nin ga-dagwishinowdnen, ... Nin ge- dagwisliinowdnen. . . . PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-dagwishinowb.mba.nen, I who had perh. arr. kin ga-dagwishinowambanen, win ga-dagwishinogobanen, ninaicind ga-da.gwisliinowa.ngiba.nen, j q kinawind ga-da.gwishinowangoba.nen, J ■ binarna ga-dagwishinowegobanen, udnawa_ga-dagwishinogobaxienag. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-dagwishinsiwa.mba.nen, I who did p. not arr. kin ga-dagwishins\wa,’?edoanen, win ga-dagwishinsigobanen, ninawind sa-dagwishinsiwa.ngiba.nen, ) , kmawind ga-dagwishmsvwan._ witan megwa ima aiaian, nin da-gi-bi- widjiwiman. Had his brothers-in-law arrived while I was there, I would have brought them here, (or, I would have come here with them.) PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Avjinini endasso-tibikadinig o ganaioabamananangon ishpi- ming egodinidjin. This man is gazing every night on the stars that are (hanging) on high. Aw ikwe o ganaweniman vnidjanissan ima jengishimmd- jin. This woman is vvatching over her child that is Iying there, PERFECT TENSE. Iniw ogwissan,pitckinago ga-dagwishinmid]m, gi-bimosse- wan orna. His son that arrived yesterday, went by here. Mi iniw od opioaganan assining ga-pangisltinmidpn. This is his pipe that fell down on a stone. 199 Kishpin keiabi jingishinsinig ogivissan, nin ga-wabamiman waka.igani.ng. If his sons are no more in bed, I will see them in the house. derived from the present, PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kishpin dagvishinsmigdbtin omishomissan megiua ima aiaian, kawin nin da-gi-wabamassi. Had his grand- father not arrived while I was there, I would not have seen him. -DagtcisAinsinigoban witan megwa ima aiaian, kawin nin da-gi-ganonidissimin. Had his brothers-in-law not arrived while I was there, we had not spoken to each other, (or, conversed.) PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE, Kikinoamagewinini kawin o minmenimassin iniw ablnodj.- ian wika kikinoamading degwishinsimgon. The teacher does not like those children that never come to school. lniw onidjanissan mashi jengishinsimgon, wdiba ta-gaie- i^himowan. Those of her children that are not yet lying (in bed), will soon go to bed. PERFECT TENSE. Iniw ogwissan, pitchinago ga-dagwishinsimgon, wabang ta-bi-aiawan oma. His son who did not arrive yester- day, will be here to-morrow. Mi iniwwidjikiiveian,wika ga-pakiteshinsmigon bibonong This is his brother who never fell last winter, 200 IV. CONJUGATION. Here now, dear reader, you are at the most important and the most difficult of ali our Conjugations. To this Coujugation belong ali the transitive or active verbs animate, ending at the third person singular, present, indicative, in an. The object upon which acts the subject of these verbs, is always contained in the verb itself. So, niti i/tabama, does not mean: I see ; but, I see him, (her, it.) Ali the verbs belonging to this Conjugation end in a at the first person singular, present, indicative. This final a is placed among the terminations, to facilitate the conjuga- ting process of these verbs ; and this a does not belong to the body of the verb. See the imperative mood of this first paradigm, and the passive voice, p. 224. Note. Ih the follovving two paradigms you will find the singular in the first column of the page in fuli, and the terminations of the plural in the second column. Here are some verbs of the IV- Conjugation : First Person. Nin mabandaa, I show him, (her, it;) Nin nibea, I put him (her, it,) to sleep ; Nin sagia, I love him, (her, it;) Nind amoa, I eat him, (her, it;) Nin nondavta, I hear him, (her, it;) Nin wdbama, I see him, (her, it;) Nin vtidigema, I live with him, (her, it;) Nin jingenima, I hate him, (her, it;) Nin nakomd, I promise him, (her, it;) Nin pisindama, I listen to him, (her, it;) Nind anbna, I employ him, (her, it;) Nind assd, I put him, (her it;) Third Pefson. o wabandaan. o nibean. o sagian. od amoan. o nondaioan. o ivabaman. o loidigeman. o jingetiiman. o nakoman. o pisindawan. od anonan. od assan. 201 Remark. As the Otchipwe language makes no distinc- tion of the two sexes in the personal pronouns, the pronouns of ali the three genders ought to be expressed in English, in some instances, But, to make it shorter and easier, we will ordinarily express only the masculine pronouns ; and the feminine and neuter will be understood. So, for in¬ stance, Nin loabama, can mean, I see him, I see her, I see it, (some animate object.) Waiabamad, can mean, hc, she, or it, who sees him, her, or it, Instead of this we will on]y say : Nin ivabama, I see him; waiabamdd, he who sees him, etc., etc. The feminine and neuter pronouns will be understood, ACTIVE VOICE. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. See page 94. t See Remark 3. p. 102. 202 PERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-wabama, I have seen him, (or, ag, I saw him,) ki-gi-ioabama, ag, o gi-wabaman, an, nin gi-wabamanan, ananig, ki gi-wabamawa, awag, o gi.-wabamawan, awan, PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-wabamaban, I had seen him (or, abanig, I saw him,) ki gi-wabamaban, abanig. Ete., after the above imperfect tense, prefixing gi-. FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-wabama, I will see him, ag, ki ga-viabama, ag, Ete., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-gi-wabama, I shall have seen him. ag, ki ga-gi-wabama, ' ag, Ete., likevvise after the present tense, prefixing ga-gi-. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. IVabamag,* if I see him, agwa, ivabamad, adwa, wabamad, ad, * See the Remarks concerning this and the following two tenses, p, 116. 203 icaJamangid, (ninawindj* tvabamang, (kinawind,) icabatneg, tvabamattad, angidvva, angwa, egwa, awad. Perfect Tense. Gi-wdbamag, when I saw him, agwa, gi-wdbamad, adwa, Ete. , as above in the present tense, prefixing gi~. FLUPERFECT TENSE. Wdbamagiban, had I seen him, udbamadiban, .toabamapan, aoažamangidiban, I udbamangoban, j tudbamegoban, ivdbamawapan, agvvaban, adwaban, apan, angidvvaban, angwaban, ®gwaban, awapan. FUTURE TENSEi Ge-wabamag, that I shall see him, agwa, ge-wabamad, advva, Ete., as above in the pr e. s eni tense, prefixing ge-. SBCOND FUTURE TENSE. Ge-gi-wdbamag, that I shall have seen him> agwa, ge.-gi-wdbamad, adwa, Ete. , likewise after the present tense, prefixing ge-gi-. * See Remark 3. p. 45. 204 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 1’RESENT, TENSE. Nin da-toabama, I would see him, or I ag, ought to see him, ki da-vabama-,. ag, o da-uabaman,. an, nin da-iuabamanan,.. ananig ki da-wabama\va. awag, e» da-wabamanan„ awan, FEREECT TENSE. Ni» da-gi-ivabam-a,, I would have seen. him, I ag, ought, etc., ki da-gi-mabama,, ag, Ete., after thepresent tens&, Ge-gi-icabamag, that I w.ould hawe- seen- agwa, him, IMPERATIVE MOOD. TEiz&am, see him,( thou,)| nabamakan, pleasc see him, akair, & ga-wMama.it, . let him see him, an, uabamada, let us see him, adanig, ■mabamig,. see him, (you,) ig, o ga-ivabanaw.an,. let him see him, awan, PARTICIPLES. P RES ENI TEN SE. SinguTar. Nin icaidbamag, I who see him, tein ivaidbamag, he whom I see, ki n waicbbamad, thou who seest him, win icaidbamad, he whom thou seest, win w he whom we see. mn maiabamang, J kinaica maidbameg, you who see him, min maidbameg, he \vhorn you see, vinawa maidbamad^ig,*- they who see hira, iniw waidbmnawadjin^ he whoni, they see. we see,. Piural. Nin waidbctmagwa, I who- see them^ minama maidbamagig, they whom I see,, kin waidbamadwa, thou whp seest them, minama waidbama.dy.g, they whom thou seest, min maidbamad, he who sees them, iniw waidbamdd\m, they whom. he sees, ninmvind. waidbama,ngidw,a.,. )>■ we w j^ o gee jjj em kinamnd. waidbamangwa., j ' minama maidbamangidiis, I > . ,, o j e? v tnev whom minama maiabamangog, | J kinama waiabamegwa, you.who see them, minama maidbamegog,, they whom you see, minama waidbamAd]ig, they who see them, iniio ivaidbamawadiin, they whom they see. imperfect tense. Singular. Nin maiabamagiban, I who saw him, min ieaial>amag\b?M, he whom I sasv, kin maidbatnadiban, thou, who sawest him, min maidbamadiban , he whom thou sawest, See Remark p. 26. 206 tein maidbam&pan, he vvho savv him, iniw waiabamap anin, he whom he savv, ninawind wai«Jamangidiban, ) , , • ,. . , . 6 , ’ } vve who savv him, kinaunnd uiaiabamangoban, j win w«id5«mangidiban, ) , , . / 7 & , z he whom vve savv, mn tvatabamangoban, j kinazva zvaiabamegoban, you vvho saw him, toin zeaiabamegoban, he whom you savv, zoinazra zvaiabamapanig, they who savv him, iniw waiddamawapaniu., he vvhom they savv. Plural. Nin waidbamagwaban, I vvho saw them, winawa zcaiabamagibamg, they whom I savv, kin w«iažamadwaban, thou who sawest them, winawa naidbamaiNbamg, they whom thou sawest, win zvaiabatnapan, he who saw them, iniw waiabama^anin, they whom he saw, niimwind waiadamaugidwaban, Jcinawind waiabamaxtg\'iaban, zeinmca w«i«6amangidibanig, winawa waiabamangobanig, we who savv them, they whom we savv, kinawa waiabamegv/aban, you vvho savv them, winawa waid Jamegobanig, they vvhom you savv, winawa vaiabamapamg, they vvho savv them, iniw zcaiflJamavvapanin, they vvhom they savv. TEKFECT TENSE. 'Singular. Nin ga-wabamag, I vvho have seen him, win ga-icdbamag, he vvhom I have seen, kin gciriodbamad, thou vvhohast seen him. Plural, Nin ga-wabama.gwa, I vvho have seen them, toinatvagarwabama.gig, they vvhom I have seen, 207 kin ga.-wdbama.dwa, thou who hast seen them. Ete., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-, to the verb. PLVPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin ga-wabamagihan, I who had seen him, win ga-iva Jtmagiban, he whom I had seen. Plural. Nin ga-wdbamagwaban, I who had seen them, tcinatca ga-wdbamagibanig, they whom I had seen. Ete., after the above imperfect tense. FUTUKE TENSE. ' Singular. Nin gc-tcabamag, I who shall see him, uin ge-iodbamag, he whom I shall see. P hiral. Nin ge-wabamagwa, I who shall see them, winawa ge-wabamagig, they whom I shall see. Ete., after the present tense, prefixing ge-. SECOND FUTUEE TENSE Singular. Nin ge-gi-wabamag, I \vho shall have seen him, tein ge-gi-wabamag, he vvhom I shall have seen. Plural. Nin ge-gi-teabamagvta, I who shall have seen them, teinatea ge-gi-tcabamagig, they whom I shall have seen, Eto., likevvise after the present tense, prefixing gc-gi-. 208 MOTIVE VOICE. NEGATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. assibanig, assibanin, . assiwanabanig, assiwawabanig, assiwawabanin. assig, assin.,, assiwananig, assiwawag, assiwawan, Plural. nin w-abamassi, I don’t Kaurin assig, see him, ki wabamassi, o uriibamassin, nin wdbama.ssiwa.neLn, ki wabamass\wa.wa, o ivdbamassiwa.wan, PBESENT TENSE. iSingular. Kaurin PERFECT TENSE. Kaurin nin gi-wabamas&\,. I have not-šeen Kawin assig, him, ,, ki gi-wabamass\^ ,, assig. Ete., after the present tense, prefixing gi- to the verb. PLtlPERFECT TENSE. Kaurin nin gi-ewabaina.ssi.ban, I had Kawin assib,an,ig.. not seen liim, ,, ki gi-wabamassiban, ,, assibanig Ete., after the imperfect tense, likewise prefixing gi-. IMPERFECT TENSE. Kawln nin tvabamassiban,. I diet not Kaurin assibanig, see him, ,., ki teabamassiban, „ o wažamassibanin, nin waJ«massiwanaban, ,, ki w6xzmassiwawaban, ,, o w«6«massiwawabanin, 209 Kamin mn ga~wabamassi, I will not see Kamin assig. . him, ,, ki ga-wabamassi, ,, assig. Eto., after the present tense, prefixing ga-. SECOND FUT-UEE TENSE. Kamin ninga-gi~wabamassi, I shall not have Kamin assig. seen him, ,, ki ga-gi-wabamassi, ,, ' assig, Ete., likewise after the present tense, prefixing ga-gi-. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, PRESENT TENSE. JEaJrtmassiwag,* if I see hira, «»ajffi?nassiwad, wa»i assig; wtzJs'ni, ., nin da-wabamassiwanan, „ ki <7a-waJ«massiwawa, „ o da-wabamassvwa.ynwa, assig, assin, assiwananig, assiwawag, assiwawan. assiwadwaban, assigoban, , assiwangidwaban, assi w ang w ab an, assiwegwaban, assigwaban, waZ>®»assiwadiban, ivabam assigoban, . ?oaZw»assiwangidiban, 1 uoabamassi wangoban, J iMJa/?jassiwegoban, wa&amassigwaban,, Ge-gi-wabamassiwa.g, when I shall assiwagwa, not have seen hiiji. ge-gi-wabama.ssiwad, assitvadwa, 211 PERFECT TENSE., Kawin nin da-gi-ivabamassi, I would not Kaurin assig, have seen him, or, I ought, etc. ki da-gi-wabamassi, „ assig, Etc., as above in the present tense, always prefixing gi- to the verb. Ge-gi-waba?nassrwag, that I would not have seen him, assiwagwa. Etc. , as above in the sacond futurc of the subj. mood. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Nin waiabamassiwag, I who don’t see him, win waiabama.ssiwag, he whom I do not see, kin waiabamassiwad, thou who dost not see him,. 212 tein waiabamassiwad, he whom thou dost not see, min waiabama.ssig, he who does not see him, inim waiabama.ssigon, he whom he does not see, ninamind maiabamassinangid, ) , , ,. , ■ ,. . , . , . ’ > we who don t see him, kinamind n>aiabamassrwang, j min w«i«Z>amassiwanffid, ) , , , . , • ” ’ ; he whom we do not see, mm n>aiabamassiwang, J icinama tcaiabamassiweg, you who don’t see him, min waiabamassiweg, he whom you don’t see, minama maiabamassigog, they who don’t see him, inim icaiabamassigvranin, he whom they don’t see. Plural. Nin waiabama.ssvwagwa, I who don’t see them,, minama maiabama.ssrwagig, they whom I dori’t see, kin waiabamassiwadvia, thou who dost not see them, minama waiabaina.ssiwad\ig, they whoni thou dost not see, min maiabamassig, he who does not see them, inim maiabatnassigon, they whotn he does not see, ninamind mata 5«»iassiwangidwa, •) j on >|. see fh em kinamind waiabamassrwaiig-wa, f v ’ minama waiabamassiwansidng, ) . , . 6 J6> j thev whom we don t see, minama waiaba.massiwangog, J J kinama maiabamassvftegva,, you who dori’t see them, ■minmaa waiabamassiwegog, they whom you don’t see, minama maiabamassigog, they who don’t see theni, inim wai«&ttmassigwanin, they whom they don’t see. OilPBBFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin vjaiabamassvNagdaan, I who did not see him, min wa««Z>a»iassiwagiban, he whom I did not see, kin waztw»assiwangoban, ) kinawa waiabamassiwegoban, you who did not see him, win waiabamassiwegoban., he whom you did not see, winawa tuaiabamassigobanig, they who did not see him, iniw acai«5azj«assigwabanin, he whom they did not see. Plural. Nin wai«&anzassiwagwaban, I who did not see them, mncma waiabamassbxagiban\g, they wbom I did not see, kin wfzi«J«massiwadwaban, thou who didst not see them. minama waiabamassiwadibanig, they whom thou didst not see, win maiabamassigoban, he who did not see them, iniw icaiabamassigobamn, they whom he did not s., ninaioind abamitawassiwadwa kinigiigog ? Why hast thou not listened to thy parents 1 Gi-babamenimassitcegioa ki pijikimiwag, mi ga-ondji-ni- bowad. Your oxen died because you did not take čare of them. Pluperfect Tense. Weweni ganawenimangidtcaban nin joniiaminanig, kamin nongom nin da-kitimagisissimin, Had we well taken čare of our money, we would not be poor now. Da-gi-nibo aw aiakosid, memeni gi-bamiassiwdngidiban. This sick person would have died, had vvenot well taken čare of him. (The person spoken to, not included.) See Remarks, p. 116. 219 Ginaamatvapan oddnan, kamn wedi da-gi-ijasshvan. If he had forbidden it to his daughter, she vvould not have gone there. Kikinoamamegmaban kinidjanissiivag gmaiako-bimadisi- min, kamin da-gi-dodansiwag ga-dodamowad. Had you taught your children uprighteousness, they vvould not have done what they did. Future Tense. Aninimapi ga-nasikamag Jesus ? When shall I go to Jesus? Eji-minmendameg tchi dodagoieg, mi ge-dodawegwa bitij’ anishinabemag. What you like that should be done to you, even that you should do to your fellow-men. Gonirna ningoting kamin ki gad-aiamassi pakmejigan ged-amoad. Perhaps the time will come vvhen thou shalt have no bread to eat. Kije-Manito kid apitchi dibenimigonan; mi ge-ondji- anokitauang mojag, mi ge-ondji-agonwetawassiwang trika. God is our absolute m aster; therefore we will serve him always, and we will never disobey him. Second Future Tense. Enamiad ge-gi-iji~sagiad Kije- Maniton, mi ged-iji-aiad kagige bimadisimning. As the Christian shall have loved God, even so he shall be ih life everlasting, (happy or unhappy.) Ge-gi-iji-kikinoamawad abinodjl, mi im go-dodang ketehi- anishinabemidjin. What thou shalt have taught the chil d, that he will do vvhen he is a grown man. CONDITIONAL MOOR Present Tense. Kishpin mdbamad Kije-Manito, min eji- maba»iik, ki da^gossd, ki da manadjia gaie, kamin dash ondjitu ki da-nishkiassi. If thou eouldst see God as he sees thee, thou vvouldst fear him, thou vvouldst respect him, and thou wouldst not ,p®rposely offend him. Wabameg osama joniia, gonima osam ki da-missaw- enimama. If you saw gold, you would, perhaps, too much covet it. 220 Ki da-nasikawa awga-nislikiik, ki da-mino-ganbna das.,. Tliou oughtst to go to the person that has offended thee, and thou oughtst to speak friendly to him, (her.) Kaioin neta-minikenidjin o da-wissokawassin. He ought not to frequent the company of drunkards. 1’erfect Tense. Nin da-gi-anwenimag wabamagwaban^ I would have reprimanded them had 1 seen them. Kaioin nin da-gi-biassi, kikenimagiban gintcenj tchi bi~ ijassig. I would not have waited for him, had I knovvn that he would not come so long. Odenang ijdiangoban, KitcJii-mekatewikwanaie ki da-gi- wabamanan. Were we gone to town, ire vvould have seen the bishop. Mcioija. ki da-gi-dibaamawawa atawewinilii ; mige-gi'-oni~ jishingiban. You ought to have paid the merchantlong ago ; that would have been fair. Mi iw ge-gi-inag, or, ge-gi-inag iban.* That is w.hat i, would have told him, ’ ' IMPERATIVE MOOD, Anibenim kinidjaniss,. kishpin matclii dedang ; babdmenim ejiwebisid, kegp pagidinaken, ioin enendang tchi dodang^ Reprimand thy child, when he does wrong; turn thy attention to his conduct.; don’t permit him to do as- he pleases. Ashamdkan bčkaded,. jaurenimakan k&timagisid^ki ga-sa- giig dash miši gego Waidbandang. Feed the hungry, and be charitable to the poor, and He who sees ali will loverthee. O ga-nandoman anishinabm, o ga-windamawan dasJi ga-, inag. Let him call the Indiana, and let him teli them vvhat I told him. Kego o ga-matchi-dajimassin widj’ ikioeioan. Let h.er not speak. ill of her fellow-women. See Remark 8* page 119». 221 Weweni sagiada Debeniminang, mamoiawamada; kego dash wilca agonwetawassida. Let us love our Lord, let us be thankful to him ; and let us never disobey him. Mikwenimddanig naningim gijigong eiadjig aiapitclii- jamendagosidjig ; kego gaie manenimassidanig andmak- amig ebidjig kaiagige-kotagitodjig. Let us often think on those that are in heaven, who are exceedingly happy ; and let us not forget those that are in hell, who suffer eternally, Takobinig onindjing, osidang gaie, sagidjivebinig dash kashkitibikadong. Bind him hand and foot, and čast him into outer darkness. . Kego awiia jinge.nimakegon, kego gaie aiviia batamakegon. Don’t hate anybody, and don’t calumniate anybody. Winawa nongom o gad-awawan pijikiwan. Let them to- day use the oxen. Kego animoshag o gad-amoassiwawan iniw pakivejiganan. Let not the dogs eat up this bread. O ga-sagidinaivan gawaskkwebinidjin. Let them turn out the drunkards. PARTICIPLES. Pkesent Tense. Jawendagosi waiabamad Kije-Maniton gijigong. flappy is h.e who sees God in heaven. Nenibikimassigog onidjanissiioan ta-animisiwag dibako- nidiwining. Those who don t reprimand their children, will sufier at the judgment. Kinatca maidwandjieg joniia,. jewenimassiweg ketimagi- sidjig, meshkwat kinmoa ki gadcitimagisim gi-islikwa-bim- adisiieg. You that accumulate money, you that have no charity tovvards the poor, you will be poor in your turn after this life. Batainoioag igiw mdnadjig ge-bisikamowad. Those are many to whom thou givest clothing. Ki mino dodam kin mdnad gego ketimagisidjig. Thou doest vzeli in giving ^omething to the poor. Imperfect Tense. Ato oshkinatoe neganadihan pitcJiina- go,jeba gi-dagwishin. ' The youngman whom thou leftst behind yesterday, arrived this morning. Noss enonapanin gi-g'imiwan tibikong. The person whom my father hired, deserted last night. Winatta enonegobanig toetceni gi-anokiwag. The per- sons whom you hired, worked well. Nind inatcemaganag toaidbamassiwegt>banig sigmanong, nongom minama orna aiatvag. My relatives whom you did not see last spring, are now here again. Perfect Tense. Gi-jateendagosiwag igiw ga-tcabamad- jig Je.susan, ga-nondaii-adjig gaie; aiodshime dash gi- jawendagosiwag ga-babamitawadjig. Happy were they who saw Jesus and heard him; but happier yet were those who obeyed him. Mi ato iktoesens,-trika ga-dgonwetawassig onigiigon. This is the girl that never has disobeyed her parents. Kinatva ga-pagidinassiwegwa ^imidjanissimag nimiiding ki gi-mino-dodam. You who have not permitted your ■children to go to a bali, you have done right. Kinidjanissiwag ga-pegidinassiteegog matchi minatcani- gositvining, ningoting ki ga-tndmoiawamigotvag. Your ■-children whom you did not permit to go to sinful plea- sures, will once thank you. Pluperfect Tense. Igito anishinabeg ga-gagansomang- obanig naningim, nongom weweni anamiatvag. Those Indians to whom we had spoken so often, are now good Christiana. (The person or persons spoken to, inclu- ded.) Anishinabeg ga-gagansoma.ngidiba.nig, gi-madjawag. The Indiana to whomwe had spoken, (whom we had exhort- «d„) are go»e. (The person or persons spoken to, not included.) Kinaica wika ga-nasikawassiwegoban mekatewikwanaie, 223 nongom merneni mamadissig. You who never had gone to the Missionary, pay him now a visit. Jfi aw inini ga-atawamadiban dnokasominan. This is the man from whom thou hadst borrowed tools. Mi ato kwiwisens ga-awiassiwagiban nin masinaigan ; osam sa o banadjiton. This is the boy to whom I had not lent my book, because he spoils it too much. Future Tense. Ato weweni ge-pagossenimad Debendji- genidjin, o ga-jaicenimigon. He who shall well pray to the Lord, will obtain mercy. Enamiad ge-sagiassig widj’anishinaben, ge-bonigidetam- assig gaie, kamin gaie min ta-bonigidetawassi. The Christian who shall not love his neighbor, and shall not forgive him, he shall not be forgiven either. Ge-nopinanadjig gijigong ebinidjin, ta-dagwishinog wedi gaie minama. They that follow those who are in heaven, will also themselves arrive there. Second Future Tense. Aw ge-gi-ishktea-missokatcdd ■netd-gimashkmehinidjin, o ga-boniton gaie min matčhi minikmemin. He who shall have given up the compan.v . of habitual drunkards, vvill stop also himself bad drink- ing Ih in ge-gi-sagiassig Kije-Maniton oma aking, kamin pitchinag medi ajida-bimadisimining ta-madjitassi mi- sagiad. He who shall not have loved God on earth,- shall neither in the next life begin to love him. 224 PASSIVE VOICE. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDJCATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nin lodbamigo, I am seen, Katrin igossi, IMPERFECT TENSE. igossinaban, assiban, igossibanin, igosshninaban, igossimwaban, assibanig, igossiwabanin, igossi, igossi, assi. Nin tcaSamigonaban, I was Kamin igossinaban, seen, ki tcaftamigonaban, “ •mabamrioan, “ o waba.migoba.nin, he was... “ nin wa6amigt>minaban, “ ki jcaJamigoinvvaban, “ tz>«&«mabanig, “ o icaJamigowabanin, “ PERFECT TENSE, Nin gi-wabamigo, I have beens. Kamin ki gi-wabamigo, “ j gi-mabama, “ Ete., after the jnesent tense, prefixing gi-. See Bemark at the end of this paradigra. 225 FLUFERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-ivabamigonriban, I had Kaurin igossinaban, been seen, ki gi-wa&awigonaban, “ igossinaban, Ete., after the above imperfect tense. FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-waham\go, I will be s. Kaurin igossi, ki ga-wabamigo, “ igossi, . Ete., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-gi-icabamigo, I shall have Kaurin igossi, been seen, Ete,, likevvise after the present tense, prefixing ga-gi-. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. lFffi»iigoiang, ) ‘ ' igossivvang, wa6amigoieg, igossi weg, • wabamindwa., assiwindwa, -te abamigoxva.fi, if they . . igossigwa, PERFECT TENSE. J Gi-wabamigoia.n, when I igossivvan, have been seen, gi-wabamigoian, igossivvan, Ete., after the present tense, prefixing gi-. f See Remark 6, p. 117. t See Remark 7, p. 118. 226 PLUPERFECT TENSE. rFa&amigoiamban:, had I igossivvamban, been seen, w«7>a?/?igoiamban, igossivvamban, U'a?>amindiban, assivvindiban, icabamigopm, had he igossigoban, been seen by. . jcažamigoiangiban, ) had igossivvdngiban, joaJamigoiangoban, J we. igossivvangoban, ?ca6amigoiegoban,. igossivvegoban, wa&amindvvaban, assivvindvvaban, wabamigpwapan, igossigvvaban, FUTURE TENSE. Ge-zcaJa»iigoian y when I igossivvan,,. vvill be seen, ge-wabam\goiab amigossivvan, that 1 vvould not have been seen. Ete., as above in tjie second future of the subj., mood. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ki ga-wab'amigo, be seen, (thou,) ta-wabama, let him- be- seen, nin ga-wabamigomm, let. us be seen,,. ki ga-u>abamigdm, be seen, (you,) ta-wabamawag, let them be seen, Kego igossi, “ assi, “ igossimin,, “ igossim, “ assivvag, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE., Nin waiabamigoian, I who am seen, igossivvdn,. kin waidbam\go\an, thou vvho art.. igossiwan, win toaiabamind, he vvho is seen, assivvind, ttin tvaiabamigod, he vvho is seen by.. igossig, ninamind waiabamigoiAng, ) we vvho are igossivvdng, kinawind waidbam\go\wig > J seen, igossivvang, kinawa maiabamigoieg, you vvho are. . igossivveg, winawa waidbammdwa, they vvho are . . assiwindwa, winawa tvaidbamigodjig, they vvho are igossigog, seen by . . . IMPERFECT TENSE., Nin waiabamigoiambfin, I vvho was .., igossivvamban, kin waiabamigoiamban, igossivvamban, mn tnaiabamindiban, assivvindiban, • ninawind waiabamigoietngiban, ) igossivvangiban, kinawi%d ivaiabamigoiangoban, $ we ‘' igossivvangoban. 228 klnaica loaiabamigoiegoban, winawa waiabammdibanig, igossivvegoban, assivvindibanig, PERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-wabamigoia.n, I who have b. s. igossivvan, kin ga-ioabamigoian, igossivvan, Ete., after the above present tense. PLUFERFECT TENSE. Nin ga-wabamigoia.mban, I who had . . igossivvamban, kin ga-ieabamigoiamban, igossivvamban, Ete., after the above imperfect tense, prefixing ga-. . FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-ieabamigoian, I vvho will be s. igossivvan, kin -ge-ioabanngoian, igossivvan, Ete., after the present tense. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ge-gi-tcabam\go\ŠM, I who shall . . igossivvan. kin ge-gi-ivabanngovm, igossivvan, Ete., likevvise after the above present tense . Remark. When a verb in the passive voice in the thirc person, has no report to another third person in the sen- tence, the terminations of the first kind, in a, awag, etc., are employed ; (see p. 224.) F. i. Wabama aw kwiwisens, that boy is seen ; wabamawag igiw ikwesensag, those giris are seen; vvithout any report to another third person. But when there is a second third person in the sentence, the ter¬ minations of the second kind, in igon, igowan, etc., are used. F. i. Ossan o mabamigon ato kwiwisens, that boy is seen by his father. Ogiioan o wabamigowan igiio ikwes- ensag, those giris are seen by their mother. Ossan, his fa¬ ther, and ogiwan, their mother, are the second third persons . in these sentences. (See page 73.) 229 The verbs of this Conjugation ending in awa, are con- jugated exactly after the paradigm Nin loabama, through- out the whole active voice. But in the passive voicethey differ a littie. We shall point out here beloiv the moods and tenses, in which the verbs ending in aioa, differ from the verb Nin toabama. We take the verb Nin nondatea, I hear hini, (her, it,) for an example. Here we don’t put only the fina! a aniong the terminations, as we did in Nin zeabama, but the w also; because we use to consider (in Conjugations.) as the body of the verb only those syllables and letters, which remain unchanged t-hroughout the whole Conjugation. PASS1VE VOICE. AFFIRMATIVB FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nin nondago, I am heard, ki nondago, nondawa, o nondagon, he is heard by . . nin nondagomin, ki nondagom, nondawawag, o nondago-wan, they are heard by... Kazein gossi, “ gossi, “ vvassi, “ gossin, “ gossimin, “ gossim. “ tvassivvag, “ gossiwan, IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin nontZagonaban, Ihaveb. Ji., Kdmn gossinabati, ki nondagonaban, “ gossinaban, nondawaban, ' “ wassiban. 15 230 o nondagobanin, he was h. by . . . nin tiondagominaban, ki nondag o mvvaban, nondavi abanig, o nond«gowabanin, they were beard by . . . gossibanin, gossiminaban, gossimwaban, vvassibanig, gossiwabanin, Form the other tenses of the indicative mood after these two tenses, prefixing gi- or ga-, according to the preceding paradigms ; as : Nin gi-nondago . . . Nin gi-nondagona- ban . . Nin ga-nondago . . . Nin ga-gi-nondago. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD PKESENT TENSE. nondagoim, nondaw'md, nondagod, if he is h. by . non it we are h, nondagmang, J nondagoieg, nondawindwa, nondagmvad, if they are h. by . Kishpin nondago\&.n* ifl am heard, Kish/pin gossiu an, “ ■nnM/-7//ian ‘‘ gOSsitVan, wassiwind, gossig, gossiwang, gossiwang, gossiweg, wassiwindwa, gossigwa, PEKFECT. TENSE. Gi-nondagoian, that I have b. h. gossiwan, gi-nondagoim, gossitvan, Ete., as above in the present tense, prefixing gi-. See Remark 8, page 119. 231 PLUPERFECT TENSE. AVnr/agoiamban, had I been heard, jMmcZflgoiamban, nondawindiban, nondagopan, had he been heard by . . ., ziondagoiangiban, ) had we »ozidagoiangoban, ) been h. ztondagoiegoban, zzonrf«windwaban, nonda gowapan, had they been heard by. . . gossiwamban, gossiwamban, vvassiwindiban, gossigoban, gossiwangiban, gossivvangoban, gossivvegoban, wassiwindwaban, gossigwaban, Form the imofuture tenses after the above presenZ tense, prefixing ge-, and ge-gi-. The tvvo tenses of the conditional mood are easily form- ed after the present and perject tenses of the indicative mood ; as : Nin da-nondago, I wouid be heard. . . Nin da-gi-nondago, I would have been heard. . IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ki ga-nondago, be heard, (thou,) Kego gossi, ta-nondawa, let him be heard, “ wassi, nin ga-nondagomin, let us be h., “ gossimin, ki ga-nondagom, be heard,(you,) “ gossim, ta-nondawawAg, let them be “ wassiwag, heard, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin n-ioandagoidn, I who am heard, kin nwandagoian, thou who art heard, etc., win ntoandavjnd, 232 ninav-ind mvandagoiang, ) who are heard kinamnd mvandagoiang, I kinaica nicandagoieg, w i na zoa nieanda w indj i g, Nin moandagossiwiin, I who aru not heard, kin nwandagossi\van, thou who . . . etc., tein nicandawassiw'md, ninaurind kinmoind kinawa mriiHva nwandamssiwang, ) nzmndagossi« ang, J nwandagoss'vweg, M?candawassiwindjig. we who are not heard, IMPEB.FECT TENSE. Nin reiearedagoiamban, I who was heard, kin nvandagoiamban, tvin MZ0«Md«windiban, ninazcind nwandagoiangiban, ) , kinamnd mcandagmatigonan, j kinaiva nu-andagoiegoban, winawa .mcqndav;indibanig, Nin ntvanda gossiwAmban, I who was not heard, kin nwan d a gossivvamban, zvin n?w/t«Hžeogbiangoban, $ ''' gossivvangoban, paki Zeogoiegoban, gossivvegoban, pakiteondv/aban, vvassivvindvvaban, Form the 'tv/ofuture tenses of the subjunctive after the above presen t tense, viz: Ge-pakiteogoian . . . Gc-gi-pa- kiteogoian ... See Remark 3,.p. 116. 235 The two tenses of the conditional mood are easily formed after the above present and perfect tenses, viz : Nin da-pakiteogo . . . Nin da-gi-pakiteogo . . . The imperative mood. is to be formed after the above paradigm, viz: Ki ga-pakiteogo .. . Ta-pakiteowa . .. etc, P ART ICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin pekiteogoikn, I who am štručk, kin pekiteogoian, win.pekiteond, mnawindpekit.eogoiang, ) gtruck kinaietna pekiteogmang, j kinama pekitecgoieg, tcinatca. pekiteondpg. Nin pekiteogossiiviin, I who am not štručk, kin pekiteogossilvan, tein pekiteoivassiNmd, ninaioiiidpekiteogossivia.iig, ) who not gtruck kinawind pekUeogoesvwa.ng, 1 kinanM pekiieogossi^eg, )Mnawa.pekiieow assivviudjig. 'IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin pekiteogo\iindo;m, I who was štručk, kin pekiteogoiamban, tein pekitemdiban, mnmeindpeldteogpmngi^, j who were gtruck kimanja pekiteogoiegobau, winawa jpeiiieondibanig, Nin 7><7dZcogossiwamban, I who was not štručk, kin pekiteogo&sivtamban, 236 inn y>67«t«owassiwindiban, ninaivind y>e&iteogossiwangiban, ) we who were not ki.na.wind pekiteo gossiwa.ngoba.n, j štručk, kincuva pekiteogossiwegoba.n, mnaiva j>eKteowaSsiwindibanig. Form the other tenses of these participles ofter the abore two tenses, viz : Nin ga-pakiteogoidn . Nin ga-pakitio- goidrnban . . . Nin ge-pakiteogoidn . . EXAMPLES ON THE WH0LE» PASSI VE VOICE-* INllICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Nin vidbamigo, nin nond&go gaie; da- inendam enamiad mojag, misiw£ gaie. A Christian ought to think alvvays and everywhere: I am scen and I am. heard. Aw abinodji kawin inashi sigaandamassi, kamin gaie igiw anishinabeg sigaandamassiieag m,ashi. This child is not yet baptized, npr are these Indiana baptized yet. Maham ikwescns mino ganaicenima, omisseian o gagi- kimigon mojag. This girl is well taken čare of; she is always exhorted by her sister. l.tlPERKECT Tbn.se. Nin uandomigoimnaban gaie ninetmind nimiiding, kawin dasji.nin gi-ijassimin. We vere also invited to the bali, but we did not go. Weweni ki baibamitagammalran wa.iesliltat r kmoin mika, kid agonwetagossimwai>an. Yon were vreli obeyed in the beginning; you were never coutradicted, (disobeyed.) Kaki.na,nawlopiabanig, kamin. dasTl anindpindigessimag. Ali vere called, but some don”t coine in. Perfect Tense. Ketimagis-idjig gi-ashamawag, gi-agwi- awag gaie ; kamin cnviia gi-ikonajaogossi bwa. minindi See. p. 122> 237 gego. The poor have been fed, and have been clothed : nobody has been sent away before he was given some- thing. Gi-bosiaivag na mishiminag ? — Kamin maski bosiassi- mag. Have the apples been shipped? — They have not yet been shipped, (they are not yet on board.) Kitchi nibitva maiechkat gi-kotagidwag , gi-nissawag gaie, anamiemin ondji. In the beginning, great many have been made to suffer, and have been put to death, for religion’s sake. Plupebfect Tense. Nin gi-kiichi-anokiigonaban nibinong, bekish.dash nin gi-mlno-dodaganaban. Much work vvas given to me last suininer ; but at the same time I vvas well treated. Kdkina gi-nitamigiabanig ninidjcmissag gi-bfca-nibod ogimabanin. Ali my children were grovvn up, (had gr.owsji up,) before the-ir mothcr died. Nin gi-anonigaminaban api degmishing nimishomčnan. We had been engaged, (hired, employed,) when our uncle arrived. Fetuee Tense. Ki ga-dibakonigomin gidslikma-bimadis- iiang; gijigang dash ki ga-pindiganigomin, kishpin gmaiak ijiieebisiiang. \Ve will be judged after this life,. and we will be admitted into heaven, if we behave vreli. Kishpin bisan aiaieg, kicivnsensidog, kamin mika ki ga- nanibikimigossim, kamin gaie ki ga-bashanjengossim. If you remain quiet, boys, you will liever be rebuked, and you will not be whipped. Kejemadisid enamiad ta-sagia, ta-bonigidatawa, kagige debisimin dash gijigong ta-mina. 'ITie charitable Chris¬ tian vvill be loved, will be forgiven, and in heaven he will be given an everlasting happine^s. Second Future Tense. Kamin irnapi mashi nin ga-gi- minigossi, ge-minigoian. At that time I shall not have. been. given yet, what I am.to be given, 238 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Apegish mino dodamind mojag aw inini; apegich mika. matchi dajimassimind. I wish that man vvould always be treated well, and ne ver be spoken ill of. Kishpin ossan pisindagod aw oshkiname, kamin gego matchi ikitossi ; nonddgossig dash ossan, kitchi minigijme. When that young man is heard by his father, he does not say a bad word; but when he is not heard by his father. he speaks very indecently. Mi sa enamiekasodjig wendji-mino-dodamowad, anishi- ndben tchi mabamigomad, tchi minominigoicad gaie. The reason why hvpocrites do geod works, is, to be seen and praised by men. Perfect Tense. Gi-waiejimind naningim, gi-gimodimind gaie, mi nongom mendji-kitimagisid. He is poor how, because he has been cheated often, and stolen from, (or, robbed.) Debendjigeian, gi-kotagiigoian, gi-nissigoian gaie, nin "ondji, tni gt-ondji-jameuimiian. Lord, because thou hast been made to suffer and to die for me, therefore have mercy on me. ■Kamin weweni gi-anokissi, debenimigodjin gi-wabanii- ■ gossig. He did not work well, because his iiiaster (or, employer,) did not see hira. ■pLirpERFECT Tense. Gagmedjimigoidmban nin da-gi-di- badjim minik kekendaman. Had I been asked, I woulamawaden, u’aiabama.gwen, ?i'aiabamawangiden, (ninawind,) waiabamawangen, (kinaiolnd,) waiabamnweg\ven, uiaiabamsmagvien, awagwawen, awadwawen, agwen, awangidwawen, awangwawen, awegwawen,' awagwen, FERFECT TENSE., Gti-tvabamav/agen, if I have perh. scen awagwawen, him, Ete., dfter the above present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. IFaJamawagibanen, ifl hadperh. seen awagwabanen, him, >va Jamawadibanen, awadwabanen, maJamagobanen, agobanen, waia»zawangidibanen, I awangidwabanen wJamawangobanen, J awangwabanen, 248 PA R T I C I P L E S. wažawiawegobanen, avvegvvabanen, wai amavvagobanen, avvagobanen The future tense is formed after the present; as : Ge- wabamawagen, etc. . . sees, perh. J we vvho perh. s. them, PRESENT TENSE. Singular. Nin, waidbama.wagen, I vvho perhaps see him, kin ivaidbamavf aden, thou vvho perh. seest him, icin iraidbamagveen, he vvho perh. sees him, i' iw waiabamagxvenan, he vvhom he sees perhaps. ninaioind waidbamnwangiden, | , , . , ,. . , ° > vve vvho see him perh., krnamnd waiaoamawangen, j kihavia loaihbai: aiveg'wen, you vvho perh. see him, winawa waiabamagwenag, they vvho perh, see him, in.v ibaidban.awagwenan, he vvhom they perh. see. PluraL Nin waiabamvwagenag, I vvho perhaps see them, kii, toaidbamaviadenag, thou vvho perh. seest them, win icaiabamagvien, he vvho perhaps sees them, iniw wi abamagwenan, they vvhom h ninawind zoai ažamavvangidenag, ' kinaioind loaiabamavrangenag, kinavia w. iabamawegwenag, you vvho perh. see them, winawa wui.ab agvvenag, they vvho perh. see them, iniw waiabm,axvagwenan, they vvhom they perh. sse. PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin ga-ioalamaxvagen, I vvho perh. have seen him. Piural. Nin ga-wabamawagenag, I vvho perh. have seen them. < Etc.,after the above preše,nt tense . •249 PLUPEEFECT TENSE. Slngular. Nin ga-wabamayvag\banen, I \vhoperh. had seen him, kin ga-waJn»zawadibanen, thou who . . . win ga-mabamagobanen, he who p. had seen him, iniw ga-wabamagobanenan, he whom he .. . ninawind ga-mabamattiinsidibanen, ) , , , , kinamnd ga-i»aoamawangobanen, J 1 kinama ga-?caZ)«mawegobanen, you who had p. seen him, minama ga-wa6«mawagobanenag, they who had p. s. h.. iniw ga-zz>tzZ>amawagobanenan, he whom they . . . P hiral. Nin g-a-w«Z>amawagwabanen, I who p. had seen them, kin ga-wdJaz/zawadwabanen, thou who . . . win ga-wdbamagobanen, he who p. had seen them, iniw ga-wabamagobanenan, they vrhom he p. had s., ninawind gfl-!caJ«mawangidvvabanen, | we who perh. had kinaivind g«.-ze«6amawangwabanen, J seen them, kinawa ga-wabamawegwabanen, you who had p. s. them, mnaiva ga-waZ>«mawagobanenag, they who p. h. s. them, iniie ga-;tazJzzmawagobanenan, they whomthey h. p. s., Note. To form the imperfect tense, (which is not much used,) you have only to take off the prefix ga-, and make the Change,-, as: Nin waiabamaitiagibanen, I whoperhaps saw him, etc. FUTVRE TENSE. Singular. Nin ge-wabama.wagen, I who perh. shall see him, Plural. Nin ge-wabamawagenag, I who p. shall see them, Etc., after the above present tense, 250 ACTIVE VOICE. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Šingular. Kawin »in wdbamassw\og, I don’t perliaps see him, “ ki tvabamassidog, “ o waJa»tassidogenan, “ nin wa»8assiwadogenan, P hiral. Kamin nin ?z>amassiwegoban, “ wa3ffl»iassigwaban, Plural. JCaioin wa5awaesiwagwaban, I did perh. not see them, “ w5amassiwadwaban, 251 “ (»aJamassigoban, “ w«iamassiwangidwaban, ■ “ wabamassiwangwabari, , “ wa&a»zassiwegwaban, > “ waž<»nassigwaban, After these two tenses ali the others of the indic atirr mood are easily formed. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. P hiral. lVaiabama.ssiwa.gen, if Ip. don’t s. him, assiwagwawen, waiaia;«assiwaden, assiwadwawen, waiabamassigwen, assigwen, M'ataJa»iassiwangiden, ) if we p. don’t assiwangidwawen, icaiabamassiwangen, $ see him, assiwangwawen, waiabamassiwegwen, assiwegwawen, ieaiabamassiwagwen, assiwagwen. PERFECT TENSE. 6r6MoaJtwnassiwagen, whether I have assiwagwawen, not seen hira. Ete., as above in the present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Tl r «Ja/?iassiwagibanen, if I had not seen him, jcaiamassivvadibanen, /caiamassigobanen, w«5čz»jassiwangidibanen, ( Mw6a/nTissi\vegobancn, H>a&a»zassiwagobanen, assiwagwabanen, • assiwadwabanen, assigobanen, assiwangidwabanen assiwangwabaneu. assiwegwabanen, assivvagobanen, The future tense to be formed after after the present ; as : (re-wabamdssiwagen, . . . Ge-wabamassiwaden, etc. 252 PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Slngular. Nin waiabamassv,vagen, I vvho perhaps see him not, kin waiaJ«Massivvaden,thou vvho perh. seest him not, win waiabamassigwen, he vvho perhaps does not see him, inivi waidbamassigwenan, he vvhom he p. does not s., ninaurind waiabamassiwangiden, ) vve vvho d on’t perhaps binawind waiabamassiwangen, ) see him, kinawa waidbamass'vwegwen, you vvho perhaps don’t see him, winawa waiabamassigwenag, they vvho perhaps don’t see him, iniw waiabamassiwagwenan, he vvhom they p. don’t s. Pltiral. Nin waiabamassiwagenag, I who perh. don’t see them. kin waiabamassiwadenag, thou vvho dost not p. see them, mn maiabamassigven, he vvho perhaps does not see them, iniw waiabamassigwenan, they vvhom he p. does not see, mnamnd armaftamassivvangidenag, ? vve vvho doirt perh. s. kinaivind toaiabamassiwangenag, $ them, binarna waiabatnassiwegwenag, you vvho p. don’t s. them, imiawawaiabamassigwenag, they vvho p. don’t s. them, iniw u>aiabamastiiwagwenan, they vvhom they do p... PERFECT TENSE. Slngular. Nin ga-wabamass\\vagen t I vvho have p. not seen him, Plural. Nin ga-wabamassiwagenag, I vvho have p. not s. them, Ete,, after the above present tense. 253 PLUPEEFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin ga-w«5«massivvagibanen, I uho had p. not s. him. kin ga-zoaJomassivvadibanen, thou vvho hadst p. . . ir in ga-wabamassigobanen,he who had p. not scen him, iniw ga-zoaZazmassigobanenan, he vrhom he had p. . . ninaioind ga-waJamasšivvangidibanen, vve vvho had perh. kinamnd ga-waJaznassiwangobanen, | not seen him. kinawa ga-wd amassivvegobanen, you vvho had . . . mnawa ^a-ioaJamassiŠvagobanenag, they vvho had,p. not seen him, iniiv ga-w«5amassiwagobanenan, he vvhom they had . . PluraJ. Nin g«-?»a5a»tassivvagwabanen,I vvho had p. not s. th., kin ga-waZ>amassivvadwabanen, thou vvho hadst p. . tein ga-wa6amassigobaiien, he vvho had p. n. s. th. iniw ga-wa&amassigobanenan. they whom he had p. not seen, ninaivind ga-roa&amassivvangidvvabanen, > vve vvho had p.not kinaivind ga-if«&amassiwangwabauen, $ s. them, kinaiva gd-wtf&amassiwegwabanen, you who had p. not s. them, winawa ga.bamag. This is, I suppose, the man who never sees (saw) a Sioax. I have seen many. Kin aiawaicaden nibiiea, joniia, jawenimishin, nin kitchi kitimagis.. Thou who art supposed to have much inoney, have mercy on me, l am very poor. Kakina igiw weiejimagwenag widj’ anishinabetcan, o da-mikiceniniaivan Kije-Maniton misigego kekendamini- djin. AH those who (perhaps) cheat their fellow-men, ought to think on God, vvho knotvs ali. Perfect Tense. Aw ga-matchi-dedaicassigven wika widj' anishinaben, geget kilehi jaicendagosi. He that perhapu never has done wrong to his fellow»men, is very happy jndeed. 257 Awegwen ga-nissagwen nin pakaakueian, nindaiangaie. I don’t know him who has killed my chickens and my dog. lgiw ininitoag ga-sagiagioenag osam joniian, kawin ga- nabatch jaioendagosissiivag ; kitchi batadovining gi-da- pinedogenag. Those men who perhaps have lovcd money too much, are probably not happy; they might have died in great sins. Pluperfect Tense. Igiio ga-anokitawassigobancnag Di- bendjigenidjin, megwa gi-bimadisiicad aking, kawin Kongom o wabama.ssiwawan gi.jigong. Those who had not served the Lord, while they lived on earth, do not see him novv in heaven. Aw mekateioikioanaie, nitam ga-gagikimagobanen Otchi- piocn, kitchi nibiwa o gi-anamie-sigaandawddogenan. That Missionary who first of ali had preached to the Chippevva Indians, must have baptized great many. Futuke Tense. Aw ge-sagiagwen, ge-jdioenimagwen gaie unkanissan, ta-jawenima gaie win He who shall love his brother, (his neighbor,) and shall have merčy on him, he shall also find mercy. Kinawa ge-wi-bon.igidetawassj,ivegivenag kikanissiwag, kawin gaie kinava ki ga-bonigidetagossupa Kije-Manito gd-iji-bata-diieg. You that vvill not forgive your brethren, (your neighbor,) to you also God vvill not forgive vonr sins, (what you have sinned.) 258 PASSIVE VOICE. AFF1HMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Nin icaJaznigomidog, I amper- Kaurin igossimidog, haps seen, ki wa&amigomidog, „ igossimidog, wd66!7»igowamban, I was Kaurin igossiwamban, perhaps seen, MazSamigovvamban, ,, igossiwamban, waJa5wanibanen, igossiwambanen, (»ve iffossitvan^ibanen, wa6amig6wangobanen, f . . . igossivv mgobanen, toa6<™igoivegobanen, igossivvegobanen, wa6rwiawindwabanen, assivvindvvabanen. Sefi Note, p> 249. 260 FUTUKE TENSE. Ge-wabamigowanen, that I will igossitvanen. be perhaps seen, Ete., after the above preselit tense. PARTICIPLES. PRESEST TENSE. JVm loaiabamigovrdnen, I who am perhaps seen, kin wa.iabamigbwanen. thou who art perhaps seen, vin waiabamaw'mden, he who is perhaps seen, iniw waiab(tmigogv/enan, he who is per. .seen by . . . ninavind vaiabamigovidngen, ) , ' . . , . , ° ’ > we who are . . . kmavina waiabamigowangen, ( • kinava waiabamigowegwen„ you are perhaps seen, vinava waiabamawindenag, who are perhaps seen, iniw vaiabamigovvagv/enan, who are per. seen by . . . Nin waiabamigossiwanen, I who am per. not seen, kin waiabamig(>ssiwanen, thou ivlio art p. not seen. vin vaiabamassivnnden, he vvho is p. not seen, iniv vaiabamigossigv/enan, he who is perhaps not seen by . . . ninavind waiabamigošsiwange.n, ) , . , ■ , ’ >we who are .. . KniMinnd w«iaoa?nigosstwangen, t kinawa waiabamigossiweg\ven, you who are p. not seen, ioi?iawa waia&amassiwindenag, they who are p. not seen, iniw waia6«»zigossiwagvvcnan, they who are perhap« not seen by; . . IMPERFECT TENSE. N n w«»ngossiwaban, „ ki w«ia»iigos.«iwabanig. PERFECT TENSE. Ki gi-waham\n, I have seen thee, Kaioin issinon, ki gi-icabamigo, we have seen tbee, ,, igossi, Ete., after the above present tensc, prqfixing gi-. FLUTERFECT TENSE. Kigi-wabammmabm, I had seen thee, Kaicin issinoninaban, ki gi-wa inmigonaban, we had s. thee, „ igossinaban, Ete., after the above imperfeet tense, prefiving gi-. The twe> futurc tenses are easily formed after the present, prefixing ga-, and ga-gi-, as : Ki ga-wabamin . . . Ki ga- gi-wabamin. . . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. FBRFECT TENSE. Kishpin vabannnan* if I see thee, ,, wabamigoiaa, if we see thee, ,, wabam\h, if he sees thee, „ w«6«mikwa, if they see thee, „ w«J«»nnagbg, if I see you, „ icaJamigoieg, if we see you, „ toabamineg, if he sees you, „ wabatninegwa, if they see you, issinovvan, igossi wan> issinog, issinogvva, ■issinonagog, igossivveg, issinovveg, • issinowegwa. PERFECT TENSE. issinowan, igossiwan. Cri-ivabammAn, as I have seen thee, gi-wabam'ygoian, as we haye seen thee, Ete., after the above present tense, prefixipg gi-- * See Remark 1, p. 116. 268 PLUPERFECT TENSE. IFzJaminamban, had I scen thee, wt?&a»zig6iamban, had we seen thee, »aJaz/zikiban, had he seen thee, w«6a»nkwaban, had they seen thee, tMtžaminagogoban, had I seen you, wa6«ntigoiegoban, had we seen you, w«ž>«minegoban, had he seen you, w«Z>a»ngossivvamban, vve vvho did not . . . tein tcaiabamtssmogtban, he vvho did not see thee, toinatca waiaz«igossivvegoban, vve vvho did not see you, tein 2z;aMzZ>a»nssinowegoban, he vvho did not see you, toinatca waiabatmssnwwegobamg, they vvho did not s. y. Form after these tvvo the remaining tenses of these par- tjciples, as : Nin ga-tedbaminan, I who have seen thee,. . . 270 Nin ga-icabamindmban, I vvho had seen thee, . . . Nin ge- tcabaminan, I who will see thee, . . . Remark. In the present tense of the indicative mood, (p. 266,) we have, Ki icabamigo, for, “ we see thee,” and ki wabamigom, for, “ we see you.” Properly, ki icabamigo, ineans, thou art seen ; and ki icabamigom, you are seen. (See p. 224.) But it is certain that the Otchipwe language espresses it as above. You may ask, a hundred times, Otchipwe Indians that understand English: How do you say in Otchipwe : We see thee ; we see you 1 They will always ansvver you : Ki icabamigo ; ki icabamigom. The verbs ending in awa at the first person singular, in¬ dicative, make some little deviations from the preceding paradigm, as you will see bere below. We take again the verb, Nin nondawa, as an example. In conjugating these verbs in our “ First Čase,” we take off the vvhole termination awa, and then apply the termina- tions of the paradigm; because, (as you see,) nothing of this termination remains unchanged in the conjugating process of this Čase. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ki nondon, I hear thee, ki jfondago,* we hear thee, ki nondag, he hears thee, ki nondagog, they hear thee, ki nondeninim, I hear you, ki nondagom,* we hear you, ki nondagova, he hears you, ki nondagovtag, they hear you, Katrin ossinon, „ agossi, ,, agossi, „ agossig, „ ossinoninim, „ agossim, ,, agossiwa, ,, agossiwag, See Remark above. 271 IMPERFECT TENSE. Ki nondoninaban, I heard thee, Kawin ossincninaban, ki jio/tdagonaban, we heard „ thee, ki nvndagoba.ii, he heard thee, ,, ki nondagobanig, they heard „ thee, ki Mondoninimwaban, I heard ,, you, ki' nondagominaban, we heard „ you, ki nondagowaban, he heard ,, you, ki ?!o»dagowabanig,they heard „ agossinaban, agossiban, agossibanig, ossinoninim waban, agossiminaban, agossiwaban, agossiwabanig, you, F'orm the other tenses ofthe indicative mood after these two, as: Ki gi-nondon, I have heard thee. . Ki gi-nondoni- naban, I had heard thee . . . Ki ga-nondon, I will hear thee . . . Ki ga-gi-nondon, I shaH have heard thee. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. nondok, if he hears thee, nondokwa, if they hear thee, nondonagog, if I hear you, nondagoieg, if we hear you, nondoneg, if he hears you, nondonegvva, if they hear you, ossinowegwa, Kishpin nondonan, if I hear thee, ossinowdn, „ ncmdagoian, if we hear thee, agossivvan, ’ 1 ’ ’’ ossinog, ossinogwa, ossinonagog, agossiweg, ossinoweg, 272 PERFECT TENSE. Gi-nondonan, because I have heard ossinovvan, thee, gi-nondagoian, because we have agossivvan. heard thee, Ete., after the above present tense, prefising gi-. PLUPERFECT TENSE. rVo/idonamban, had I heard thee, ossinowamban, nondagoiamban, had we heard thee, nondokiban, had he heard thee, nondpkwaban, had they heard thee, nondonagogoban, had I heard you, nondagoiegoban, had we heard you, nondonegoban, had he heard you, agossivvamban, ossinogiban, ossinogwaban, ossinonagogoban, agossiwegoban, ossinotvegoban, reowdoneg\vaban, had they heard you, ossinowegwaban. Form the two future tenses after the present, as : Ge- nondonan, when I shall hear thee . . . Ge-gi-nondonan , vvhen 1 shall have heard thee . . . Form the two tenses of the conditlonal mood after the present and perfect tenses of the indicative mood, (p. 270,) prefixing da-, as : Ki da-nondon, I would hear thee . . . Ki da-gi-nondon, I would have heard th«e . . , PARTICIPLES. ' PRESENT TENSE. Nin nvandonan, I who hear thee, ninamnd nwandagoian, we who hear thee, tein nwandok, he who hears thee, mnawa nwandokig, they who hear thee, nin nwd.ndpna.gog, 1 who hear you, ninawind nwandagoieg, we who hear you, tein nwandoneg, he who hears you, .wlnawa nicandonegog, they who hear you, 273 Nin nwandossinowan, I vvho dont hear thee, ninaivind nwandagossiwan, vve vvho don’t hear thee, win meandossinog, he vvho does not hear thee, 'winawa nuandossinogig, they vvho don’t hear thee, nin ntvandossinonagog, I vvho don’t hear you, ninairind nwandagossiweg, vve vvho don’t hear you, win n?z’«nafe7eogoian, if we s. thee, “ pakiteok, if he strikes thee, “ pakiteokwa, if they s. thee, “ pakiteonagog, if I s. you, “ pakiteogoieg, if vve strike you, “ pakiteoneg, ifhe strikes you, ossinovvan, ogossiwan, ossinog, ossinogwa, ossinonagog, ogossivveg, ossinoweg, j)akiteonegwa, if they s. you, ossinowegwa, PERFECT TENSE. Gi-pakit eon&n, because I have ossinowan, štručk thee, gi-pakiteogoian because we have ogossiwan, štručk thee, Ete., after the present tense, prefixing gi-. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Fal-iteonamban, had I s. thee, ossinowamban, p«il7eogoiamban, had we s. t., ogossivvamban. jiaZdčeokiban, had he s. thee, ossinogiban, y>afo7eokwaban, had they s. t., ossinogwaban, 2>atoconagogoban,had I s.you, ossinonagogoban, poZ-u^ogoiegoban, had we . . ogossiwegoban, j»aZrz7eonegoban, had he s. you, ossinowegoban, y«ztoeonegwaban, had they s. ossinowegwaban, you, Form the two future tenses after the above present tense: as: Ge-pakiteonan, that I shall strike thee, . . . Gc-gi- pakiteondn, that I shall have štručk thee . . . 276 Form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the present and perfect tenses of the above indicative mood, prefixing da-, as: Ki da-pakiteon, I would strike thee, etc. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin pelcitetman, I who strike thee, ninaioind pekiteogoian, we who strike thee, urin pekiteok, he who strikes thee, winawa pekiteokig, they who strike thee, nin pekifeonagog, I who strike you, ninaioind pekiteogoieg, we who strike you, win pekiteoneg, he who strikes you, minaioa pakiteonegog, they who strike you. Nin pekiteossmowAn, I who don’t strike thee, ninaioind pekiteogossiwan, we who don’t strike thee, loin pekiteossinog, he who does not strike thee, winawa pekiteossinogig, they who don’t strike thee, nin pekiteossinonageg, 1 who don’t strike you, ninaioind pekiteogossiweg. we who don’t strike you, urin pekiteossinowcg, he who does not strike you, luinaioapekiteossinovfegog, they who don’t strike you. IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin pekiteonamban, I who štručk thee ninaioind pekit eogoiamban, we \vho štručk thee, win pekitcokiban, he who štručk thee, urinaiea peAiVeokibanig, they uho štručk thee. nin pekiteonagogoban, I who štručk you, ninaioind jieki teogoiegoban, we who štručk you, urin pekiteonegoban, he who štručk you, ninaioa pekiteonegobanig, they who štručk you. 277 Nin y>eA-z7eossinowamban, I who did not strike tiiee, ninawind /leZriteogossivvamban, we who did not strike teee, win jieHteossinogiban, he who did not strike thee, winawa />efo7cossinogibanig, they who did not strike thee, nin y>e&jZeossinonagogoban, I who did not strike you, ninauind pekiteogossi\vegoban, we who did not strike you, •urin pekiteossinoxvegciban, he whodid not strike you, winawa pekiteossinovregobanig, they who did not strike you. The remaining tenses of these participles are to be form- ed after the above two. EXAMPLES ON THE FIftST ČASE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Ningtoiss, Kego wika malchi dodangen, kego gaie matchi ikitoken; ki icabamig sa Debendjiged, ki nondag gaie. My son, never commit a bad action, and never speak bad words; the Lord sees thee and hears thee. Anindi wendjibaieg kinaica? Kaioin ki kikenimissino- ninim. Where do you come frotn 1 I don’t know you. Ki* jamendagosim, kinidjanissiu-ag ki sagiigotvag, ki babamitagowag gaie. You are happy, your children love you and obey you. Imperfect Tense. Kid inauemaganag ki wi-mawadissi- gobanig, kawin dash kid abissinaban. Thy relationsin- tended to pay thee a 'visit, but thou wast not at home. Kaurin na kid inissinoninimwaban, wika tchi dodansi- weg, nongom ga-dodameg ? Did I not teli you, never to do vvhat you have done now ? Koss nomada, ki baskanjeogoban, minatca dash ki kiwa- 18 278 nis. Thy father vvhipped thee, not long ago, and thou behavest bad again. Pebfect Tense. Nisso bibon kigi-kikinoamoninim, kaki¬ ma ki gi-ivindamoninim ged-ani-dodameg tchi jamenda- gosiieg. I have taught you three yearSj I have told yoti ali you have to do, in order to be happy. Nosse, nind dnmenindis, kamin ki gi-babamitossinon, kam¬ in ki gi-mino-dodossinon. Father, I reproach it to myself that I have not obeyed thee, that I have not treated thee kindly. Kamin na ki gi-minaigossig ishkot.emabo T Have they not given. thee ardent lignor todrink'? Plvperfect Tense. Naningim ki gi-jawenimigobanig igiw ikmemag ga-madjadjig pitchinago. Those women that departed yesterday, had often been charitable to thee. Ki gi-nandotamagowabanig midjim,.bwa dagmishinomad oma. They had asked you for some provisions, before they čarne here. Kaivin ki gi-kikenimigossiminaban, oma gi-bi-ijaiegoban.. We did not know, (we had not knovvn,) that you. had come herc. Future Tense. Nin mddja ; kamin dasli ganabatch mina¬ ma ki ga-zvabamissinoninim oma aking ; n:edi eta gijigong ki ga-mabamininim. I am going away ; and perhaps I will no more see you here on earth ; but there in heaven I will see you. Debenimiian, ged-ako-bimadisiian ki ga-manadjiin, ki ga-mino-anokiton, ki ga-sagiin enigokodeeidn; gijigong dash kaginig ki ga-wabamin. Lord, as long as I live, [ will adore thee, I will well serve thee, I vvill love thee from ali niy heart; and in heaven I vvill eternally see thee.. 279 Kishpin tnadjalan, ki ga-nopinanigo. If thou goest a- way, we will follow thee. Second F.uture Tense. Ki ga-gi-kikenimin ejiieebisiian, tchi biva bibong. I shall have known thee how thou be¬ bavost, (I shall have known thy conduct,) before winter. Sigtoang na ki wi-nagaddn nind odenattensinan ? Kakina ki ga-gi-dibaamago tchi bwa madjaian. Wilt thou leare our little village next spring? We shall have paid thee ali, before thou startest. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Pbesent Tense. Debendjigeian, apegish gieaiak kikeni- miku-a bcmadisidjig; ki da-sagiigog. Kishpin eta aviia kikenimissinog, kawin ki sagiigossi. Lord, I wish ali men would know thee well; they would love thee. He only that knows thee not, does not love thee. Nin gi-gljendam nongom, kaginig tchi debmetonan minik ekitoian ; wika minaiva tchi dgonwetossinowdn. I have firmly resolved now, always to believe thee (to obey thee) vvhatever thou sayest; uever more to contradict thee, jto disobey thee.) Kwiwiscnsidog, wabaminegwa eta kinigiigoivag, ki bisdji a.bim ; kishpin dash kaginig ganmc(nimissinowegwa, pdb- ige ki matchi dodam. Ye boys, only when your parents see you, you are quiet; but \vhen they are not constant- ly vvatching you, you do mischief immediately. Peritct Tense. Nongom nin kikenindis eji-matchi-iji- ivebisiidn, gi-no.ndondn gi-anamiegijigak. Now, after hearing thee last Sunday, I know myself how wi,cked 1 am. Gi-bamiikiva gi-akosiian, mi wendji-sagiangidwa. love them because they took čare of thee when thou wast »ick. 280 Kamin ki kikenimissinoninim eji-nagamoieg,wika gi-non dossinonagog. I don’t know you, what singers you are, (how you sing,) as I never have heard you. Plueerfect Tense. Wegonen dash ga-bi-ondji-ijassiiveg, gi-ano-nandominagogoban ? Why did you not come, al- though I had called you ? Kishpin kinidjanissimag pisindonegicaban, mewija o da- gi-bbniawan wassbkawawadjin. Had your children list- ened to you, they vvould have left their comrades long ago. Enigok bibagimissinogiban, kamin ki da-gi-bi-gimessi. If he had not called thee very loud, thon wouldst not have returned. Future Tense. Jesus Debenimiian, aninimapi ge-tcaba- minan ki kitchitwawisiwining ? Lord Jesus, when shall I see thee in thy glory ? Aioenen ge-nanibikimineg mika, kishpin mojag mino do- dameg? Who shall ever rebuke you, if you always do right ? Osam nanirigim ki gimanim, mi jdigma ge-ondji-debwe- tossinogmabemadisidjig; thou tellest lies too often ; that is the reason why people will now not believe thee. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Ten^e. Kishpin menagmishigin ivi-bi-ijaieg oma, ki da-kikinoamoninim, anotch gaie gogo menijishing ki da-windamoninim. If you vvould come here evenings, I would teach you to read, and I would teli you many use- ful things. Kamin amiia anisha ki da-minigossi gego, ged-apitch- gashkitoian. tchi anokiian; nobody would give thee any thing for nothing, as long as thou art able to work. Ki da-sagiigoma, ki da-jawenimigowa Kije-Manito, kish¬ pin wi-dnwenindisoiegoban; God would love you and would have mercy on you, if you vvould repent. 281 Perfect Tense. Kawin ki da-gi-matchi-dajimigossig, kaurin gaie ki da-gi-bdpiigossig, natoatch, nibioakaiamban. They would not have spoken ill of thee, and they would not have laughed at thee, hadst thou been wiser, (more prudent.) Ki da-gi-windamagom ejiwebak, dibadjimoiegoban ga- mabandameg; we would have told you how it is, had you mentioned what you have seen. Ki da-gi-wdbamin anamiewigamigong, pindigeiamban ; I would have seen thee in the church, hadst thou come in. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Debenimiian saiagiinah, inenimishin tchi apitchi sagiinan enigokodeeian. Lord, whom I love, be it thy will to give me grace to love thee from ali my heart. Kin wika waiabamigossiwan oma aking, gijigong ki wabaminagos. Thou whom we don’t see here on earth, thou art visible in heaven. Winawa minik kekeniminegog,dibadjimowag ejiicebisiieg; ali those who know you, teli how you behave. ImpErfect Tense. Gi-madja aw inini mojag menaikiban ishkotewabo; that man is gone away who always gave thee to drink ardent liquor. Win igo luaiabaminegoban dibadjimo ga-dodameg; he himself who saw you, teliš what you have done. Perfect Tense. Winawa wika mashi ga-nondossinokig orna eiadjig bemadisidjig, wabang ki ga-nondagog. Those who live here and have never yet heard thee, will hear thee to-morrovv. Oshkinawedog, mojag mikwenimig kinigiigoioag ga-mino- kikinoamonegbg; young men, remember always your pa- rents who have so well taught you. 282 Future Tense. Kego ivika-ivanenimaken aw ge-dibakc- nik ; mojag ki. ganamabamig. Do thou never ibrget him who shall judge thee; he is always looking upon thee. Ninidjanissidog, kego loissokaivakegon neta-giwashkwebi- djig\ mi sa igiw ged-apitchi-banadjiincgog. My children, don’t associate with drunkards; they are those who will totally ruin you. Nikanissidog, wika ge-wanenimissinonagog, mojag gair kinaiea miktvenimishig. Brethren, whom I never shall for- get, do also you always remember me. Second Futvre Tense. Debendjigeian, ge-gi-sagiikig aking enigokodcemad, mi igiw ged-apitchi-jawendagosid- jig gijigong. Lord, those who shall have loved thee on earth with ali their heart, shall be most happy in heaven. SECOND ČASE. ( Thou , . . me.) AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ki wabdm, thou seest me, Kawin issi, ki wabam\m, you see me, “ issim, nin ivdbamig, he sees me, “ igossi, nin icabamigog, they see me, “ igossig, ki mabamimin, thou seest us, “ issimin, * ki wabamimin, you see us, “ issimin, ■nin wabamigonan, he sees us, “ igossinan, nin ?£«Ja»rigonanig,they see us, “ igossinanig. ’ See Remark at the ond of this paradigm. 283 IMPERFECT TENSE. Ki »aJaminaban, thou savrest Kazein issinaban, me, ki waJ«mimwaban, you saw me, nin w«b«migoban, he saw me, nin »a&amigobanig, they saw me, ki zoabanmain-aban, thou saw- est tis, ki wa6m, thou hadst Kazein issinaban, seen me, ki gt-wa5a?nimwaban, you had “ issimvvaban. seen me, Ete., after the above imperfect tense prefixing gl-. Form the two futiire tenses after the present, prefixing ga-. and ga-gi--, as : Ki ga-zeabam, thou shalt see me, ... Ki ga-gi-zeabam, thou shalt have seen me, . . . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin zedbazniian, if thou seest me, issivvan, “ zedbamneg, if you see me, issiweg, issimwaban, igossiban, igossibanig, issiminaban, issiminaban, igossinaban, igossinabanig. 284 « »aJctmid, if he sees me, w«Jamiwad, if they see me, waZ>amiiang,if thou seest us, »aJamiiang, if you see us, *M>a&amiiangid, ) if he sees »aJaminang, ) us, *wa&awiiahgidwa, 1 if they ?ztaJ had he seen us, waoummangoban, y wa& they who see us. wtnawa waiabammangog, I J Kin waiabamissiwan, thou who dost not see me, kinawa waiabamiesiweg, you who do not see me, win vaiabamissig, he who does not see me, winawa waiabamissigog, they who don’t see me, See Remark 4. p. 117. t See Nate, p. 284. ‘4B0 they who don’t see us. IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin tcaidbaniiiamban, thou who sawest me, kinatca ičaiabanmegdban, you who saw me, win ivaidbamipan, he who saw me, icinavM waidbamipanig, they who saw me, kin ?,xziaZ>a»ziiangiban, thou who sawest us, kinaua waiai«»iiiangiban, you who saw us, tvin win winawa wai ’ " ~ innaica w«t«£a»rissiwangidjig, winawa u>aiabamissinowangog, in w«ia/><7?7nian£idiban, ) , , . , & , > he who saw us, in ?zw.«oammangoban, ) iaJamiiangidibanig, ) , . , • D , ■ ■ thev ivho saw us, ?rt/?<7«nnangobanig, J J Kin ivaiabamissiwamban, thou who didst not see me kinatea waiabamissiwegoban, you who did not see me, win nmiaba missigoban, hc who. . . winawa icaiabaniissigobamg, tbey who . . . kin »eataJ y thev who hear us, ■z nmandonangog, ' I J Kin nwandawissi\van, thou who dost not hear me, kinawa nwandawissi^eg, you who don’t hear me, win nicandawiss\g, he who does not hear me, winawa mcandamissigog, they who don’t hear me, kin nwaiidawissiwang, thou who dost not hear us. 290 kinaioa nwandawissi\vang, you who don’t hear us, win nw«7id t thev who don t h. us, loinaica nwanaossinowangog, ) he who heard us, IMPEBFE2T TENSE. Kin 7iw«nrZ«wiiamban, thou who heardst me, kinaioa wwa?iŠawiiegoban, you who heard me, win nwandaw\\>an, he who heard me, icinaioa nwandawvpanig, they who heard me, kin nwandawiiangiban, thou who heardst us, kinaioa ?iwanrZawiiangiban, you who heard us, loin nwan(?«wiiangidiban, J tein moandonangoban, J windwa nwcmduwiiangidibanig, > , 7 > they who heard us, imnaioa BtcuMaonangobamg, I J ’ he who . . Kin nwdndawissiwamban, thou who didst not hear me, kinaioa nwandawissiwegoban, you who did not . . . win mmndavvissigoban, he who . . . winawa ?tw«nd«wissigobanig, they . . . kin nzcararZ«wissiwdngiban, thou who didst not h. us, kinaioa nwana?«wissiwangiban, you who . , . win mwm n he em. us, “ anoninang, J ’ “ anojiiangidiva, ) if they “ anoninangwa, J ploy jissiwan, jissivveg, j iss ig> jissigwa, jissiwang, jissiivang,* jissinangid, nissinowang, r em- jissivvangidiva, ploy us. nissinowangwa, PERPECT TENSE. Gi-anojiian, because thou hast jissitvan, employed me, gi-anojiieg, because you have jissiweg, employed me. ■ Ete., after the above present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. .-Inojiiamban, hadst thou em- jissivvamban, ployed me, anojiiegoban, had you e. me, jissiwegoban, anojipan, had he empl. me, jissigoban, anojiwapan, had they e. me, jissigivaban, anojiiangiban, hadst thou jissivvangiban, . employed us, anojiiangi.ban, had you . . jissivvangiban, anojiiangi.diban, ) had he jissiwangidiban, azmninangoban, ) empl. us, nissinowangoban, anojiangidvvaban, ) hadthey jissiwangidwaban, anoninangvvaban, / empl. us nissinovvangwaban, 293 The tmofuturc tenses are formed after the above present. The conditionat mood is formed after the indicative, pre- fixing da-, or da-gi-. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Anojishin, ) employ me, aziojishikan, , (thou,) anojishig, employ me, (you,) nin gad-anonig let him employ me, nin gad-anonigog,\et them employ me, anojishinam, emplov us, (thou,) ancjishinam, employ us,(you,) ■nin gad-anonigonan. let him emp. us, nin gad-anonigonanig, let them em- ploy us, Kego jishiken, “ jishikegon, “ nigossi, “ nigossig, “ jishikangen, “ jishikangen, “ nigossinan, “ nigossinanig, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Kin enojiian, thou who employest jissivvan, me, kinawa enojiieg, you who employ me, jissivveg, min enojid, he who employs me, jissig, winawa enojidjig, they who emp me, jissigog, kin enojiiang, thou who employ- jissivvang, est us, kinawa enojiiang, you who emp. us, jissivvang, win enojiiangid, ) he who em- jissivvangid, win enoninang, j ploys us, nissinovvang, winawa e; ojiiangidjig, ) they that em-jissiwangidjig, winawa ezioninangog, j ploy us, nissinowangog. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin encjiiampan, thou who employedst me, kinawa enojiiegoban, ysu who emploved me, 19 294 NEGATIVE FORM. win enojipan, he who employed me, winawa ertojipanig, they who p t ployed me, kin enojiiangiban, thou who employedst u. kinawa enojiiangiban, you who employed us, win ezmjiiangidibap J he who wtn enonmangoban, S 1 winaiva enojiiangidibanig, ) th who winawa enoninangobanig, ) ■ IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin cncjissiivamban, thou who didst not emplojr me, kinawa e?wjissiwegoban, you who did not employ me, win enojissigoban, he who . . . winawa enojissigobanig, they who . . . kin eratjissiivangiban, thou who didst not emp. us, ki.na.wa ezi jissiwangiban, you who . . , min ensjissivvangidiban, ) । ■ win encnissinoivangoban, , minama en. jissivvangidibanig, | , minama ezzenissinovvangobanig, J J • • - The remaining tenses of these participles are fbrmed after these two. The second kind of irregular verbs comprehends the verbs ending in ssa. (See page 244.) These verbs are perfectly regular in the active and passive voices, except in the second person sing. imper. in the active voice. They also perfectly agree with the paradigin of the “ First Čase,” Ki mabamin; but they deviate a little from the paradigm of the “ Second Čase,” Ki wabam. You vvill see the dif- ference here below. We have seen, (p. 244 ) that these verbs change their termination ssa into shi, at the second pers. sing. imper.; 295 and this sh appears in the moods and tenses, which are ir- regular; as you will see in the following paradigm. AFPIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PKESENT TENSE. Ki gosh, thou fearest me, ki goshim, you fear me, nin gossig, he fears me, nin gossigog, they fear me, ki goshimin, thou fearest us, ki goshimin, you fear us, nin gossigonan, he fears us, nin gossigonanig, they f. us, Kawin shissi, “ shissim, “ ssigossi, “ ssigossig, ‘‘ shissimin, “ shissimin, q ssigossinan “ ssigossinanig, IMPERFECT TENSE. Ki goshinaban, thou fearedst Kavin shissinaban, me, ki goshi nvvaban, you feared me, nin gossigoban, he feared me, nin gossigobanig, they feared shissimwaban, ssigossiban, ssigossibanig, me, ki goshiminaban, thou fear- “ edst us, ki goshiminaban, you feared “ us, nin gossigonaban, he feared “ us, nin gossigonabanig, they fear- “ ?d us, shissiminaban, shissiminaban. ssigossinaban, ssigossinabanig, The other tenses of the indicative mood are formed after ihese two. 296 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin goshiian, if thou fearest “ me, “ goshiieg, if you fear me, “ “ goshid, if he fears me, “ “ goshiwad, if they fear me, “ “ goshiiang, if thou fearest “ us, “ goshiiang, if you fear us, “ “ goshiiangid, i if he fears “ “ gossinang, ) us, “ “ goshiiangidwa, > if they “ “ gossinangvva, $ fear us, “ shissiwan, shissiweg, shissig, shissigvva, shissivvang, shissivvang. shissivvangid, ssissinowang, shissivvangidvva. ssissinowangwa. PERFECT TENSE. (?t-goshiian, because thou shissivvan, hast feared me, gi-goshiieg, because you shissitveg, have feared me, Ete., after the above prcsenl tense. pluperfect tense'. Goshiiamban, hadst thou shissivvamban, feared us, goshiiegoban, had you shisshvegoban, feared me, goshipan, had he f. me, shissigoban, goshiwapan, had they f. shissigvvaban, me, ■, goshiiangiban,hadst thou shissiwangiban, feared us, 297 goshiiangiban, had you shissivvangiban, feared us, goshiiangidiban, ) had he shissivvangidiban, gossinangoban, ) f. us, ssissinovvangoban, goshiiangidvvaban, ) had shissiwangidwaban, gossinangwaban, j they ssissinowangwaban, feared us, Form the two future tenses after the above present; and the conditional mood after the indicative. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Croshishin, ) fear me, goshishikan, j (thou,) goshishig, fear me, (you,) nin ga-gossig, let him fear me, 'nin ga-gossigog, let them fear me, geshishinam, fear us, (thou,) geshishinam, fear 'us, ,(you>) nin ga-gossigonan, let him fear Kego shishiken, “ shishikegon, “ ssigossi, “ ssigossig, “ shishikangen, “ shishikangen, “ ssigossinan, us, nin ga-gossigonanig, let them f. “ ssigossinanig, us, PARTICIPLES. AFFHtMATIVE FORM. PRESENT TENSE. .Kin gteeshiian, thou vvho fearest me, klnawa gtpeshiieg, you' vvho fear me, win gtreshid, he who fears me, winawa giaeshidjig, they'who fear me, kin gtreshiiang, thou who fearest us, 298 us, kinawa gweshiiang, yoU who fear Us, win gieeshiiangid, I he who fears win gwessmang, ) winawa gtehiiangidjig, ) who ietnatva giccssinangog, J J NEGATIVE FORM. FRESENT TENSE. Kiti ^wesbissiwan, thou who dost not fear me, kinatca g-?ecshissiweg, you who don’t fear me, win gieeshissig, lie who does not ■.. . winawa gioeshissrgog, they . . . kin gweshissiwang, thou who dost not fear us, kinawa gweshissiwang, you who . . . win gweshissiwangid, | tein gieessissinoivang, j toinatea greeshisssivvangidjig, wi nam -ga-essissinoivangog, IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin guieshiiamban, thou who fearedst me, kinatea gzoeslriiegoban, you who feared me, tein gweshipan, he who feared me, teinatva gw he who feared us, tem gwessinangoban, ) ’ toinaioa gzceshiiangidibanig, 1 P , ■ । • ? thev who feared us. wtnawa gwessmangobamg, f ’ 1MPERFECT TENSE. Kin giMshissiiamban, thou who fearedst me not, kinatca gweshissiwegoban, you who feared me not, 299 min gttiessigossiban, he who did not fear me, minama gwessigossibanig, they who . . . kin g-weshissiwangiban, thou who didst not fear us, Jcinama g«.-cshissiwangiban, you who . . . wi» gweshissiwangidiban, ) min gioessissinovvangoban, J ' ’ * * ■minama gwcshissiwangidibanig, ) , minama gzoessissinowangobanig, ) j • • ■ The other tenses of these participles are formed after these two. The third kind of irregular verbs contains the verbs end- sag in orna. (See p. 245.) We have already noticed some irregularities of these verbs, (p. 274, etc.,) but there are some more, vvhich you will find in the follovving paradigm. AFFIKMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FOBM. INDICATIVE MOOD. P n E S E N T T E N S E- Ki pakite, thou strikest me, ki pakiteom, you strike me, nin pakiteog, he strikes me, nin pakiteogog, they strike me, ki pakiteomii^ thou strikest us, ki pakiteomia., you strike us, nin pakilcogniiMi, he strikes us, nin pakil eogonanig, they strike us, Kaicin ossi, “ ossim, “ ogossi, “ ogossig, “ ossi m in, " o.-simin, “ ogossinan, “ ogossinanig, IMPERFECT TENSE. Ki pakiteonaban, thou struckest me, Kaurin ossinaban, jki joaZ:tfeomwaban, you štručk me, “ ossinnvaban. 300 nin pakiteogoban, he štručk me, nin pakiteogobanig, they štručk “ me, ki pa7riteominaban,thou struckest “ us, ki pakiteominaban, you štručk us, “ nin pakiteogonabau, he štručk us, “ nin pakiteogonabanig, they štručk “ us, ogossiban, ogossibanig, ossiminaban, ossiminaban, ogossinaban, ogossinabanig. form the remaining tenses of the indicative mood after these two. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. FRESENT TENSE. Pakiteoian, if thou strikest me, ossiwan, pakiteoieg, if you strike me, ossiweg, pakiteod, if he strikes me, ossig, pakiteowad, if they strike me, ossigwa, pakitcovang, if thou strikest us,ossiwang, pakiteoiung, if you strike us, ossiwang, /Mztzfeoiangid, | j g ossiwangid, pakiteonang, ( ' ossinowang, pa/rtt<’oiangidwa, ) if they s. ossiwangidwa, pafatieoaaugvva, y us, ossinowangwa. PERFECT TENSE, Gi-pakitkoian,. because thou hast ossiwan, štručk me, gi-pakiteoieg, because you have ossiweg, štručk me. Ete., after the above present teuse. 301 PLUPERFECT TENSE. PflHZeoiamban, hadst thou ossiwamban, štručk me, pa/ričeoiegoban, had you s. ossitvegoban, me, />aJ?7eopan, had he s. me, ossigoban, y>aA7teowapan, had they s. ossigwaban, me, y?aHteoiangiban, hadst thou ossvvangiban, štručk us, y?aZ:iteoiangiban, had you s. ossivvangigan, us, pzfoteoiangidiban, ( ossiwangidiban, _paArt7eonangoban, j ‘ ossinotvangoban, štručk us, TMzZriteoiangidvvaban, ) had ossiwangidwaban, y>ffllriteonangwaban, j they ossinowangyvaban, štručk us, Form the two future tenses after the above present; and form the tenses of the conditlonal mood after the present, and perfect of the indica t Ive. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pa. /izteoshin, y>aXriteoshikan, l strike me, (thou,) Kego oshiken. pakiteoshig, strike me, (you,) “ oshikegon, nin ga-paki.tcog, let him strike me, “ ogossi, nin ga-pakitcogog, let them strike me, “ ogossig, pakiteoshmom, strike us, (thou,) “ oshikangen, y>aAu7eoshinam, strike us, (you,) “ oshikangen, nin ga-pakiteogona.fi, let him strike us, “ ogossinan, ninga-pakiteogonanig, let them strike us, “ ogossinanig, 302 PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. he who does not strike us. thcy who don’t strike us. IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin pekiteossiwan, thou vvho dost not strike me, kinawa peki.teossiweg, you who don’t strike me, win pekiteossig, he vvho does not strike me, winawa pekiteossigog, they vvho don’t strike me, kin pekiteossiwang, thou vvho dost not strike us, kinawa pekiteossivang, you vvho don’t strike us, win pekiteossi vvangid, ) min pekitcoss'\nowang, J ivinaica peii/gossivvangidjig, winawa pekiteossin.owa.ngog, Kin pekitcoian, thou vvho strikest me, kinawa pekileoieg, you vvho strike me, win pekiteoA, he vvho strikes me, minama pckiteo&pg, they vvho strike me, kin pekiteoiang, thou who strikest us, kinoma pekiteoiiing, you vvho strike us, urin peZt/Zeoiangid, win pekiteonang, mnawa y>eti/eoiangidj’ winawa pckiteonangog. Kinpekiteoiamlian, thou who struckest me, kinaioa ^e/iziroiegoban, you uho štručk me, win pekiteopin. he vvho štručk me, tci-naioa pekiteopanig, they vvho štručk me, kin pekitcoiangiban, thou vvho struckest us, kinaiDcc y>cA't7coiangiban, you vvho štručk us, he vvho strikes us, '* J'S’ l thev vvho strike us. J 303 win peAriigoianrridiban, ) , , , , , • •. , > ne who who štručk us. mn pekiteonvagoban, J ’ winawa »efoVroiancridibanis, ) , winawa petoeonangobanig, p' 16 - 7 who struck us - Krn pekiteassiwamban, thou who didst not »trike me, kinauia pekiteassiwegoban, you who did not »trike me, vin pettcossigoban, he who did not »trike me, toinava peZh/epssigobanig, they who did not »trike me, kin y?eA.-.'/eossiwangiban, thou who dost not »trike us. kinava pekiteossiwangiban, you who . . . vin »eA'(7eossiwangidiban, i , gin 7>eK7cossinowangoban, j " ' ‘ vinaioa ^e/dieossiwangidibanig, ) , vinava pekiteossinowangobanig, j After these two tenses ali the others of the participles are formed. ExAMPLES ON THE SECOND ČASE. INDICATIVE MOOD. 'Present Tense. D&benimiian, mnjag ki ganatodbam, ki nondaib gaie nihgčt ekitoian; kid apitchi kikeidm eji- mebisiidn. Lord, thou lookest always upon me, and thou hearest me when I say something; thou knowest me per- fectly how I am, (or, how I behave.) Kawin ganabdtch ki nissitotaipissim ekitoian; kawin toeioeni ki p'sindawissim. Perhaps you don’t syell under- stand me what I am saying; yo.u don’t well listen to me. Ki sdgiigonan J)ebeniminang, kid inenimigonan gaie, kaginig tc/ii jawenddgosiianggijigogg. The Lord loye.» 304 us, and it is his will, that we should be eternally happy in heaven. Kamin ninidjanissinq,nig mojag nin babamitagossinanig. (The person spoken to, not included.) Our children don’t always obey us. Imperfect TenSe. Ki ganrjinaban, bekish gaie kissaie nin gan'nigo!>an ; kamin dash nin kikindansin ga-ikito- ian. Thou spokest to me, and at the same time thy brothcr spoke to me; and so I don’t know vvhat thou hast said. Nin na ki nandaiodbamimmaban jeba ? Kaurin na gego • ki wi-gagwedjiniissimwaban 1 Did you look for me this morning ? Had you not some question to ask me? Aw anishindbe nin mi-ganonigoban, gi-jagmenimo dash. That Indian wanted to speak to me, but he did not dare. Perfect Tense. Ki gi-gagwedjimigom, kawin dash ki gi~nakmetawissimin, kamin ki gi-ganojissimin. We have asked you, but you have given us no ansvver ; you have not spoken to us. Ki gi-matchi-dodam kin, gaie kinama ki gi-matchi-doda- wim; ki bonigid -toninim dashkakina. Thou hast done me wrong, and you also have done me vvrong; but I for- give you ali. Gicaiak nin gi-dibaamagog kakina ga-masinaamamidjig bibonbng. Those vvhoin I had given credit last winter, have ali paid me vvell. Pluperfect Tense. Nissing nin gi-bidjibiamagobanig nishimeiag bibrnongjnva dagmishinomadorna. My young- er brothers (or sisters) had \vritten to me three tirnes last vvinter, before they came here. Kamin mika ki gi-mindamamissimmaban rji-kitimagisi- mad kinigiigomag, binish nongbm gijigak. You never 305 had told me, before this day, how poor your parents are. Waieshkat naningim ki gi-nishkiiminaban gi-matchi- gijmeieg mojag; nongom dash ki bisdnabim. At first you had made us angry often, bccause you always used bad words ; but now you are quiet. Futuiie Tense. Nagatch kamin ki ga-zoabamissim, min- aiva dash ndgatch ki. ga-wabamim. A little while, and ye shall not see me; and again a little while, and ye shall see me. Kishpin kijemadisUang, ki ga-sagiigonan Kije-Manito, gaie dash anishinabcg ki ga-sagiigonanig If we are charitable, God vvill love us, and people also vvill love us. Kishpin metchi-ijimebisidjig missokamagma, nin ga- matchi-kikinoamagog, nin ga-banddjiigog. If I frequent the company of the vvicked, (or, if I associate vvith the wicked,) they vvill teach me bad principles, they vvill ruin me. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. iksent Tense. Ninidjaniss, kishpin gegct sagiiian, ki ga-babdmitam ; kishpin dash babamitamiian, ki ga-jaw- endagos. My child, if thou truly lovest me, thou vvilt obey me; and if thou obcyest me, thou wilt be happy. Apegish mika ganojissig gamashkmebid inini ; apegish gaie mika avdia dibadjimotamissig inatdhi dajindimin. I wish I would never be spoken to by a drunken man ; and I wish I would never be told any bad reports. Debenimiiang, kishpin anishinabcg jingenimiiangidira, nin bjigidctamananig, kin ondji. Lord, if any persons 306 hate us, we forgive them, for thy sake. (God, who is spo- kcn to, not included.*) Nikanissidog, kishpin anishinabeg ji.ngeniminangica, bonigidetawadanig. Brethern, if any persons hate us,letus forgive them. (The persons spoken to, included.) 1’krfect Tense. Weweni ki mamoiaioamen gi-jawenimi- ian, gi-mino-bamiiian ga-apitch-akosiidn. I thank thee very much, because thou hast had pity on me, and hast well taken čare of me, during my sickness. Kaurin nin. gi-ganonigossig, gi-kikcnimissigwa, wika gi- u>abamissigwa. They have not spoken to me, because thcy have not knovvn me, they have never seen me. Gl-wabamiian, Thomas, ki gi-debwcicndam. Thomas, be¬ cause thou hast seen me, thou hast believed. Pluperfect Tense. Nandomipan nin da-gi-ija indad.— Gagmedjimipan nin da-gi-nakwetawa. If he had called me, I would have gone to his house. If he had asked me, I would have ansvvered hira. Windamawissiwamban ejimebak anamicurin, kdginig nin da-gi-kitimagis. Hadst thou not spoken to me of reli- gion, I would have been miserable for ever. Ninidjanissidog, pisindamiiegoban waie.shkat, kaurin nongom ki da-kashkendansim. My children, had you^js- tened to me in the beginning, you would not be how so sorrowful. Future Tense. Aniniicapi ge-uindaiian ga-wawindama- uriian ? Aniniioapi minama ge-mikweiiimiian? When wilt thou send me vvhat thou hast promised me 1 When wilt thou remember me aga'n? Nisso bibon nin wi-babamadls, mi dash iioapi minama ge- See Remark 3, p. 45. 307 wabamiieg. I will travel three years, and then you shall see me again. TFaJang ta-dagwisliin mekatewikwanaie; mi oma ge-da- ji-gagikiminang. The priest will come to-morrow; and here he will preach to us. CONDITIONAL MOOD.. Present Tense. Nin da-takwamig aw animosh, kishpin nasikawag. This dog would bite me, if I went near him. Pabige. ki da-bi-maioddissigonan ogima, kikendang oma aiaiang. The chief would soon come to see us, if he knew that we are here. Kaurin Debeniminang ki da-bonigidetagoasinan, kishpin t.nigokodeeiang anwenindisossiwang. The Lord would not forgive us, if we did not repent from the bottom of our heart. Pekfect Tense. Kaurin noss nin da-gi-bashanjeogossi, nawdtch bisan aiaidmban. father would not have vvhipped me, had I been a little stiller. Ki da-gi-kikinoamawimin na masinaigan pltchinago, ijaiangoban endaian? Hadst thou taught us to read yesterday, if we were gone where thou dwellest ? (to thy house.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ganawabamishin, Debenimiian, kitimagenimishin; mash- kawendamiishin tchi wika bata-ijiwebisissiwHn. See me, Lord, and Inve mercy on me ; give me strength that I inay never sin. 308 Ninidjanissidog, babamilaicishig, odapinamaiviskig nind ikitojviu ; kego agomoetaioishikegon. My children, lis¬ ten to me, receive my word; don’t disobey me, (gainsay me.) Mano nin ga-nasikagog abinodjiiag bebiwijinidjig, kego nin ga-gossigossig. Let the little children come to me, let them not be afraid of me. Ashamishinatn, nin bakademin. Pindigajishinam cndaian, (ox, endaieg,) nin gikadjimin. Give us to eat, we are hungry. Take us in thy house, (or, your house,) we are cold. Kego sagidjinajaoshikangen, kawin ningotchi nin pindig- essimin. Don’t turn us out, we have no house to go in. Mano nin ga-bbniigonanig met chi-ikitodjig. Let ill-speak- ers let us alone. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Jesus, aiapitchi-sagiiian, ki wi-sagi.in gaie nin enigokodeeidn. Jesus. who lovest me so much, I will also love thee from ali my heart. Debeniminangog mojag ki mino dodagonanig. Our mas- ters treat us always well. (The person spoken to, includ- ed)* Debenimiiangi djig mojag nin mino dodagonanig. Our masters treat us always well. (The person spoken to, not included. Imferfect Tense. Aw ikwe nctd-jawenimipan, o gi-naga- dan kid odenatoensinan. That woman who used to be so charitable to me, has left our little village. See Remark 3, p. 45. 309 Naningim ki mikioenimininim, kinatoa eshamiiegoban mojag, megwa kwiwisensiwiidn kitimagisiian. I rernem- ber you often, you who gave me always something to eat. when I was yet a poor little boy. Perfect Tense. lgiwga-dajimidjig, ga-m.ino-dodawissigog gaie, kawin wika nin wi-jingenimassig. I will never hate those that have slandered me, and those that have not treated me well. Ki bonigidetawananig kakina ga-nislikiinangog,ga-mino- ganonissinoioangog gaie. We forgive ali who have offended us, and who have not spoken kindly to us. (The person spoken to, included.) Nin bonigidetavjananig kakina ga-nishkiiiangidjig, ga- tnino-ganonissiwangidjig'gaie. We forgive ali who have offended us, and whp have not spoken kindly to us. (The person spoken to, not included.) Future Tense. Debenimiian, kin ge-dibakoniian wdiba, gassiamawishin nin matchi dodamowinan, telil bwa nan- domiian. Lord, who shalt soon judge me, blot out my iniquities, be.fore thou callest me. Kinawa, mojag ge-wi-nishiieg, aivenen aw endashiieg ge- debimipan,‘‘gi-bata-dodam,” tclii ijid 1 Youwho want always to kili me, who is the person among you that would teli the truth, if he said of me, “ he has sinned?” Ninidjanissidog, ta-kitclii-mino-dodam aw wika ged- agonwetawissig. My children, he that never shall disobe/ me, will do very right. Second Future Tense. Igiie ge-gi-anojiiangidjig tchi bwa sigwang, gega anisha ta~anokitawawag. Those that shall have employed us before spring, will have their work done almost for nothing. 20 310 Let us now consider the verb, Nin mabama, in the “ Tu-» Cases” of connection with the personal pronouns, me, thee, us, you, when used in a dubitative manner. FIRST ČASE. (I. . . thee.) AFFIRMATIVE FORM, INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESEN! TE N S E, Ki reoJtzmininadog, I see thee perhaps, ki wabamigbdog, we see thee perhaps, ki ivdbamigodog, he. sees thee perhaps, ki uabamigodogenag, they see thee perhaps, ki waža?«ininimwadog, I see you perhaps, ki uabamigdmidog, we see you perhaps, ki wabamigowadog, he sees you perhaps, ki ivabamigowadogenag, they see you perhaps, NEGATIVE FORM. Kamin ki wa&amissinoninadog, I do perhaps not see thee-. „ ki mabamigossidog, we do perhaps not see thee, ki mabamigossidog, he does p. . . . ,, ki tvabamigossidogenag, they . . . ,, ki waminowegwaban, they saw . . . Kanin waJ«missinowamban, I did per. not see thee, ,, wa6«»iig6ssiwamban, we did perhaps not . , , ,, ?z5a&«missinogwaban, they did p. n. . . . ,, wa6<7.missinowagogoban, ,, ?z>a6amigossiwegoban, ,, w«Z>«wissinowegoban, ,, wa5ffimissinowegwaban, Form after these two the remaining tenses of the indic tive mood. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin waiabaminov/Anen, if I see thee perh., ,, waiabamigt>wanen, if we see thee p., ,, waiabaminogwen, if he sees thee, ,, waiabaminogwa.wen, if they see thee, „ waiabaminonogwa.v/en, if I see youp., „ waiabamigowegv/en, if we see you, ,, waiabaminov/egv/en, if he sees you, ,, ic«i«6aminowegwawen, if they see you, Kishpin waiaZ>amissinowanen, if I p. see thee not, ,, waza6amigossiwanen, if we see thee not, ,, waiaJamissinogwen, if he does not see . . . ,, waz«Jamissinogwawen, if they don’t . . . „ waia6a»iissinonogwawen, ,, icaia6a»/igossiwegwen, „ wata6amissinowegwen, „ wata/>a»iissinowegwawen, 312 PERFECT TENSE. G«-wa6aminow£imbanen, if I had per. seen thee, mažamigoivambanen, if we had p. seen thee, wažamigowegobanen, if we had seen you, wa6aminowegobanen, if he had seen you, ica&afeamigossiwegobanen, waZ>amissinowegobanen, waiaminonogwawen, I who perhaps see you, 313 ninaioind waiabamigbwegwen, we vvho perhaps see you, urin waiabaimnowegwen, he vvho perhaps sees you, loinaioa waiabaminowegwenag, they who perhaps s. you. Nin waiabamissinowanen, I vvho per. do not see thee, ninaioind waiabamigossiwanen, we vvho p. don’t . . . ivin waiabamissinog\ven, loinaioa ioaiabamiss'mogwenag, nin waiabamissinonogwawen 1 ninaioind waiabamigossiwegwen, win waiabamissinowegwen, loinaioa waiabamissinowegwenag, IMPEKFECT TENSE. Nin waiabammowamba.nen, I who perhaps saw thee, ninaioind wata6amigowambanen, vve who per. saw thee. win toaiabaminogobanen, he vvho perhaps saw thee, winawa waia&aminogobanenag, they vvho per. saw thee, nin waminagogobanen, I who perhaps savv you, ninaioind waiabamigowegobanen, vve vvho perhaps savvyou, loin loazaJaminovvegobanen, he vvho perhaps saw you, ivinaiva waiabaminowegobanenag, they vvho per. savvyou. Nin loaiabamissinov/ambanen, I vvho perhaps did not see thee, ninaioind tcainJamigossivvambanen, vve vvho . . . win waiabam\ssmogobanm, loinaioa ivaiabamissinogobanenag, nin loaiubamissinagogobanen, ninaioind toaiaiamigossivvegobanen, win aanaiam.issinovvegobanen, loinaioa wa»iiwamban, perhaps thou sawest me, ,, w«5«»žiwegoban, perhaps you saw me, ,, wa6amigoban, perhaps he saw me, ,, wažamigwaban, perhaps they saw me, „ waZ»amiwangiban, perhaps thou savvest us, ,, w«6a?«iwangiban, perhaps you saw us, r«z6amiwangidiban, ) , , ” , k ? perhaps he saw us, „ wao«mtnowangoban, ) 1 315 „ waJrmiwangidwaban, 1 perhapg they saw us ,, «eaoffiminowangwaban, J r Gonimo. kawin w«5a?nissiwamban, perhaps thou didst not see me, „ wa6a»«issiwegoban, perhaps you did not. . , ,, waZ>amissigoban, ,, toaJandssigwaban, ,, wa6amissiwangiban,, ,, wa žamissivvangiban, ,, waZw»issiwangidiban, ) ,, tcaJamissinotvangoban, $ „ wabam\ssi wangidwaban, J ,, ,waJamissinowangwaban, / After these two tenses form the others of the indicative. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PBESBNT TEN6E. Kishpin waiabamrwanen, if thou perhaps seest me, ,, waiabamiwegwen, if you perhaps see me, ,, waiabamigwen, if he perhaps sees me, traiabatnivfa.gvven, if they perhaps see me, ,, waia.bamiwa.ngen, if thou perhaps seest us, t , waiabamiwangen, if you perhaps see us, ,, Wi«Z» if he perhaps sees us, ■„ waiabaminowdngen, r ’ ,, wažaža»iiwanffidwawen, , ■„ w«i«t a minowangwawen, / lf tbe y P erha P S see U< ’ Kishpin waiabamissiwanen, if thou perhaps see me not, ,, v:aiabamisssiweg\ven, if you perhaps . . . „ waiabamissigxven, ,, waiabamissiwAgxven, ,, waiabamissiwnnge.n, waiabaniissiwa.ngen > 316 w®miwangibanen, if thou perhaps hadst seen us, waft«?»iwangibanen, if you perhaps had seen us, w«5aw«iwangidibanen, / ■, , & , > it he perhaps had seen us, waoa?mnowangobanen, l i ’ waž>a»»iwangidwabanen, ) , , D , ? H thev perhaps had . . . waoaminowangwabanen, J 7 ' r WaZaz»tjssiwambanen, if thou, perhaps hadst not seen mev ioa&tmissiw.egobanen, if you perhaps . .. wa6«?Bissigohanen, wnen, waJamissiwangib.aneri', «>ažaz?iissiwangibanen, »aframissiwangidibanen, | w«5aznissinowangobanen, | !4>«Ja?»issiwangidwabanen,, > 2(,’a&«missinowangiyabanen, Form thefuture tenses after the present, as : Ge-K&ia- miivanen . . . Ge-gi-tcdbamiwanen , . , 317 PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. * Kin toaiabamivranen, thou vvho perhaps seest me, kinatva waiabamiwegwen, you who perhaps see me, win waiabamigwen, he vvho perhaps sees me, winawa waiabamigwenag, they vvho perhaps see me, kin waiabamiwangen, thou vvho perhaps seest us, kinatva icaiabamiviangen, you vvho perhaps see us, win waiabamiw an gid en , | he who win tvaiabammowangwen, ) 1 r wlnawa W • tcinatva waiaZ>amissinowangwenag, y JMPERFECT TENSE. Kin waidbam\xvambanen, thou vvho perli. savvest mc, kinatea waiabamrwegobar«7>amiwangidibanen, ) , , . , & , ’ > he vvho . , . wtn wai«o«nnnowangobanen, ( 318 mnatca tcat«Ja»riwangidibanenag, ) , . . • 7 • i / 4.11V/ T >r 11U |7. O« <40* imiaica wataoffl»tinowangobanenag, J Kin tcatdJamissivvambanen, thou who perhaps didst not see me, kinaica waiabamissi\vegobanen, you who per. did not,., tein ivaiabamissigobanen, winawa jcazaJazztissigobanenag, kin mzžajtzmissitvangibanen, kinaiea waia6amissiwangibanen, win waza6azzzissiwangidibanen, ) win zcazaJamissinovvangobanen, ) winawa tcaiabamissi vvangidibanenag, ) winawa a>awzJazzzissinowangobaiienag, ) Form after thcse two tenses ali the otliers of these dubi- rative participles. JEXAMPLES ON THE TWO CASES OF THE IV. DUBITATIVK CONJUGATION. INDICAT1VE MOOD. Present Tense. Kego ow ikitoken : Nin vabamigodog Kjc-Manilo. — Gtvaiak nin mabamig misiwe; ikiton mojag. Do not say : I snppose God sees me, (or per¬ haps he sees me.) Always say : He sees me certainly everywhere. Osam ki sagiigodogcnag kinigiigog, lcawin wika kibash- anjeogossidogenag, mi leendji-matchi-ijiuebisiian. Thy parents probably love the.e too much. they perhaps never tvhip thee, therefore thou behavest so bad. Ki kikinimininadog, anisha dash nongom kawin ki nis- sitaivinossinoninadog. I think I knovv thee, but I cannot noyv recognize thee. 319 Perfect Tense. Ki gi-nondawidog gi-bibagiminan, ka¬ zein dash ki gi-nakzvetazvissi. Thou hast perhaps heard me when I called thee, but thou hast not ansvvered me. Kaurin ki gi-mikwenimigossinadog gi-migizced od aiiznan; kazein sa gego ki gi-minigossinan. Ile has perhaps not re- membered us when he gave away his things, because he has given us nothing. Ki gi-zeabaznigozeadog gi-dagwishineg; u-crba ta-bi- ija. He has probably seen you vvhen you arrived ; he will soon come here. Future Tense. Ki ga-jingenimidog gegapi, osam zziojag kid anzeenimin. Thou wilt perhaps hate me by and by, because I reprimand thee always» Kazein awiia ki ga-ginaamagossiwadog, kazein nizi- got azviia ki gad-igossiwadog, kishpin nri-madjaieg. I think nobody will forbid it to you, (or hinder you,) no- body will say anything to you, if you want to depart, (to go away.) A w oshkinazee ki ga-nandomigodog gaie kin nimiiding ; kego dash ijaken. That young man will perhaps invite thee also to dancing, but don’t go. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Endogwen,ninidjaniss, saiagiiioanezi ; kazein sa ki babamitazeissi. I don’t know, my child, whether thou lovest me ; thou dost not obey me. Kaurin nin kikendansin gemodimigwen, waiejimigwen, endajimigven. I don’t know whether he steals anything from me, whether he cheats me, whether he speaks ill of me. Endogwen ekonigbssiwanen orna, kishpin bonitossiwan ishkotewabo. I don’t know vvhether we drive thee not. away, if thou dost not abandon ardent Iiquor, 320 Perffct Tense. Kanin nin kikendansin ga-bataminowd-' nen ; kaivin awiia nin gi-nondagossidog. I don’t knotv whether I have accused thee falsely ; I suppose nobody has heard me. Orna ga-danenimissiwanen, mi ga-ondji-matchi-ikitoian ; kaivin dash tvika ki da-matclii-ikitossi. Because thou hast probably not thought me present, therefore thou hast said bad words, but thou oughtst never to say any bad words. Mi ga-ondji-bata-diidn, Debenimiian, tveioeni ga-sagi- issinoiednen. Lord, I have behaved sinfully, because, I think, I have not ]oved thee enough. Pluperfect Tense. Kishpin kinigiigog kikeniminogiea- banen ga-dodaman, ki da-gi-baslianjeogog ganabatch. If thy parents had known what thou hast done, they would perhaps have whipped thee. Gagansomissiudngibanen, kawin ganabatch wika nin da- gi-andmiassimin. Had you not exhorted us, we would perhaps never have become Christians. Wabaminoivangwabanen ningotchi, gonima ki da-gi- nandomigonanig. If they had seen us somcwhere, they vvould perhaps have called us. Futuke Tense. Aninimapi idog ge-jawenimiwanen, ge- mino-dodawiwanen ? When shall the time come when thou shalt have pity on me and treat me well. Niogisiss nin gad-inend; mi dash api ganabatch ge- wdbamiwegw> n minama. I will be absent four months ; and then (I think) you will see me again. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Waiabamigwenag nongom ta-dibadji- motvag endodaman. Those who perhaps see me now, will teli what I am doing. 321 Aw .pesindawissigwen ta-kashkendam ningoting. He who does perhaps not listen to me, will be once sorry for it. Gaganodamaioig jangeniminowegwenag. Pray for those who perhaps hate you. Imperfect Tense. Kin wika mcandawissiwambanen, non- gom weweni ki wi-kilcinoamon ge-dodaman. Thou who perhaps never heardst me, (preaching,) I will now in- struct thee exactly what thou shalt do. Aw anishinabe icaiabaminoicegobanen nopiming, ki wi- ganonigoiva. That Indian, who saw you in the woods, (as he says,) vvants to speak to you. Pekfect Tense. Mi sa ogow kwiu>isensag mka ganabatch. ga-agonwetawissinowegwenag; weweni ki babamitago- ivag. These are the boys that yerhaps never have dis- obeyed you ; they listen well to you. Nin bonigidetauag kdkina ga-gimodimigtvenag anotch nind aiiman, megwa wedi gi-aiaidn. I forgive ali those who may have stolen from me some of my things, during my stay there. Kawinninwi-kikenimassiwananig ga-dajimiwangidenag. We don’t want to know those that have perhaps spoken ill of us. Pluperfect Tense. Kin ga-wabamitcambanen megtcii kwiwisensiwiidn, keiabi na ki mikwenim 1 Thou who hadst seen me (as they say) when I was a boy, dost thou yet remember me ? Aw inini wika ga-ganonissinogobanen, ki bi-anamikag. This mah who perhaps never had spoken to thee, comes to salute thee. Future Tense. Awcgwen ge-jawcriiminogu'en, ge-matchi- ganonissinogwen gaie w.ika, nin ga-kitchi-minwendamiig. Whosoever shall do charity to thee, (have pity on thee,) and shall never give thee bad words, he shall do me much pleasure. 322 Anishinabedog, amegmenag mika ge-minaissinowegwenag ish/coteicabo, ta-mino-dodamog. Ye Indians, those who shall ftever give you ardent liquor to drink, shall do well. Amegmen ged-ijimininogmen matchi minamanigosimining, ki ga-kitchi-banadjlig. Whoever shall seduee thee into sinful pleasure, shall do thee great damage. Remarlc. In regard to the second third person in th'e “ Two Cases,” we have to observe that in the I. Čase it does not alter the verb. We say : Am oshkinaioe ki maba- mig, that young man sees thee ; and likewise : Am oshkin- ame ossan ki mabamig, that young man’s father sees thee. But in the II. Čase there is some difference in the subjunc- tive mood and in the participles. F. i. Kishpin am oshkiname ossan mdbamimA, ta-bi-ijavran oma. If that young man’s father sees me, he will come here. Kishpin ossan mabamissinig, kamin ta-bi ijassiv/an. If his father sees me not, he will not come. Au> ikme o gi-inan odanissan tebi ?y7nid im. That woman told her little daughter, to teli me that. O gi-inan odanissan tchi ijissinig iw. She told her little daughter, not to teli me that. Kamin min nin nondagossi, ogmissan inim nmandamimd- jin. He does not hear me, it is his son that hearš me. Anami min nin ganonig iko ; ogmssan dash inim mika ge- no/issinigon. He uses to speak to me; but it is hisson that never speaks to me. Before we close the IV. Conj., let us consider, in short Examples, the verb Nin viabama, in regard to the second and third third person. 323 AFFIRMATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT EENSE. Nin wdbam\mm ossan,* I see his father, ki vabamimm “ thou seest his father., o teabaman ossini,t he sees his father, nin wabamimanan ossan, we see his father, ki waJ«znimawan “ you see his father, o wabama.wan ossini, they see his father. NEGATIVE FORM. Katrin nin waJcwnimassin ossan, I don’t see his father, “ ki wabamimassi.n “ thou dost not s. h. f., ' “ o icabamassin ossini, he does not s. h. f. “ nin waZ>Nin detmetaioa Kije-Manito, nin debieetaiciman gaie Ogtvissan. I believein God, and I believe in his Son. t See Rem. 3. at the end of these Examplesi 324 Kawin nin waJ«mimassibanin ogin, I did not s. his mother, “ ki waZ>«»iimassibanin thou didst n. s. h. m., “ o icažamassibanin ogini, he did not see h. m. •“ nin loaJrajimassinabanin ogin, we did not s. h. m., “ ki waja?»imassiwabanin “ you did not s h. m. “ o wa6amassiwabanin ogini, they did not s. h. m. After these two tenses you can form ali the remaining tenses of the indicative, and the tenses of the conditional mood. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin ivabamimag ogwišsan, if I see his son, ivabamimad “ if thou seest his son, tvabamiid ogivissini, if he sees his son, icažamimangid ogioissan, wdbaimvaw,g “ ivabamimeg “ if we see h, s. if you s. h. son, wabama.wad ogivissini, if they see his son. Kishpin ?ca6amimassiwag ogioissan, ifl don’t see h. s. “ wab«mimassiwad “ if thou dost not see his son, “ toabamassig ogivissini, if he does not see h. s. “ joaJ«mimassiwangid ogioissan, ) if we don’t see “ wabamimassiwangoban “ J s. his br. ?wz5a»jimassiwegoban “ had you not seen his brother, K'd6 we who see his sis. kinamnd matabamimang „ kinawa ivaiabatnimeg „ you who see his sister, ioiriaiva waiabama.dfig omisseini, they who see his sister. Nin vmiabamvaiassvffag omisseian, I who don’t see his sister, kin wa?aJ«mimassiwad ,, thou who dost not see his sister, mn tcaiaba/nassig omisseini, he who does not see his sister, ninainnd waia6amimassiwangid omisseian, ) we who don’t kinawind teaiabamimassiv/ang „ j see his sister, kinawa waiabamimassiweg „ you who don’t see his sister, winawa waiabamassigog omisseini, they who don’t see his sister. IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin icaiabandmagiban oshimeian, I whq saw his brother, kin tcaiaJaTiiiniadiban „ thou who sawest his brother, win icaiabamapan oshimeini, he who saw his brother, 327 ninamind waiaZ>a«imassiwagiban oshimeian, I who did not see his bro. k in wataža»iimassiwadiban „ thou who didst not s. his bro. win maiabamassigoban oshimeini, he who did not see his brother, ninaurind ?«waJamimassiwangidiban oshimeian 1 we w. did kinawlnd waiaJamimassiwangoban „ J not s. . . . kinaioa t». . PERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Gi-apeniinoidn, because I have ssiwaa. trusted in him, (them,) Ete., after the above present tense. ELUPERFEOT TENSE.. Singular and Plural 4pe?iih«oiamban, had I tr, in him, (them,) apimmoiamban,. apenimopan, apenimoiangiban, ) had we apenimoiangoban, f trusted. apenimoiegoban, apenimow apan,. ssiwamban>, ssiwamban T ssigoban, ssiwangiban, ssiwangoban, ssiwegoban, ssigwaban, The future tenses to be formed after the present; as Ged-apenimvian, .. . . Ge-gi-apenimoidn. . . . The tenses of the conditional mood are formed after the' present and perfect tenses of the indicative ; as : Nin da~ apenimonan, I would, (or, I ought to) trust in him Nin da-gi-apenimonan, I would have trusted in him. .. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. and Plur. Apenimtm, I trust (thou)in Kego ken. apenimo\ian, j him,(them,) 333 » gad-apenimonan, let him tr. in h. (them,) apenimoda, let us tr. in him,. apemmodanigjet us tr. in th. apenimoiog, trust (you)in h. (them,) o gad-apenimanawan, let them tr. in h. (them,) “ ssinan, “ ssida, ssidanig, “ kegon, It “ ssinawan. PARTICIPLES-. PEESENT TENSE. Singular and PluraL Nin epenimoidn, I who tfust in him, (them,) kin epenimoian, thou who trustest, win epenimoA, he who trusts, ninawind evenimoiang, ) , ,. . , . • ~ > we who trust, kinavnnd epemmoiang, J kinawa epenimoieg, you who trust, winawa epenimodjig, they who trust, ssiwan, ssiwan, ssig, ssiwang, ssiwang, ssiweg, ssigog. IMPERFECT TENSE.. Nin epenimoidmban, I who trusted in him, (them,) kin epenimoiamban, thou who trustedst, win epenimopan, he who trusted, ninaioind epenimoiangiban, ) , * kinawind epenimoiangoban, $ we trusted, kinawa epenimoiegoban, you who trusted, •uiinaioa epenimopanig, they who trusted, ssiwdmban, ssivvamban, ssigoban, ssiwangiban, ssivvangoban. ssivvegoban, ssigobanig. The other tenses of the particlples are formed after tke above two; as : Nin ga-apenimeidn,. .. Nin ga-apenima 334 iamban,. . . Nin ged-apenimoian, . . . Nin ge-gi-apeni- moidn,. . . Remark. The verbs of the V. Conj. cannot be given in the Tino Cases by themselves, but only by the help of the follovving substantives with possessive pronouns, viz : niiatv, my body; kiiato, thy body ; tviiatv, his (her) body; niiatv- inanin, our bodies; kiiaioinanin, our bodies; kiiatvitvan, your bodies ; tviiatvitvan, their bodies; which are employed to express the personal pronouns, I, me; he, she, it, him, her ; we, us ; you, ye ; they, them. In the “ Examples on the V. Conj.,” and “ on the V. Dubit. Conj.,” you will find several which contain the above words, by which, as you will see, the “ Two Cases” are expressed, (I . . . thee; thou . . . me.) These expressions are so natural to the Otchipvve language, that they are correctly applied even to the Lord God, who has no body ; because they stand for the personal pronouns, and* are not used with the intention to signify a material body. Here follovv some Examples illustrating the use of the above surrogates of personal pronouns. Mi aw inini bemitod niiatv; (mi aw inini bcmiid, nin widi- gemagan.) This is the man that takes čare of me, (my husband.) Nin jawendan niiatv; (nin jatcenindis.) I have pity on myself. Kishpin matchi ijitvebisiidn, nin kikendan jingendamdn niiatv', (jingenindisoidn.) If I behave bad, I know that I hate myself. O gi-niton tviiatv ga-apitch-kashkendang; gi-nissidiso.) He was so sad, that he killed himself. Jesus o gi-kitimagiton tviiatv, kinatvind ondji ; (gi-kitima- giidiso.) Jesus made himself poor for our sake. Ato oshkinatve o mino dodan tviiato mino ijitvebisid; (mino dodaso.) This young man does good to himself in be- having well. Nin wi-mino-ganawendamin niiatvinanin tchi-bata-ijiweb- isissitodng; (nin tvi-mino-ganawenindisomin.) Wewil! 335 take well čare of ourselves, that we may not sin; (the person spoken to, not included.) Ki banadjitomin kiiatvinanin, kishpin babamendansiwang anamietvin; (ki banadjiidisomin. We ruin (injure) ourselves, if we don’t čare for religion; (the person spo¬ ken to, included.) Enamiaieg, weweni ganawendamog kiiawiwan, tchi matchi ijiwebisissiweg; (weweni. ganawenindisoiog.) Christiane, take well čare of yourselves, in order not to behave bad. Enamiassiweg, jatvendamog kiiatcitoan; (jawenindisog;) kagiffe kotagitotvining kid apagitonatoan kiiawiwan, kishpin jingendameg anamietvin ; (hid apaidisom.) Pa- gans, have mercy on yourselves; you are precipitating yourselves into eternal misery, if you hate religion. Osam nibiwa icassinidjig od akosilonatcan wiiawiwan: (ako- siidisotoag.) Those that eat too much, make themselves sick. Nind inag abinodjiiag tchi binitowad wiiawiwan, tchi bwa bi-ijawad kikinoamading, (tchi biniidisotead.) I teli the children to clean themselves before they come to school. The Indiana are fond of these expressions. This you will experience very soon, if you observe them attentively when they are speaking. EXAMPLES ON THE V. CONJUGATION. IND1CATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Debendjiged nind apenitnomin, kawin bekanisid aioiia nind apenimossimin. We trust in the Lord, we don’t trust in any other. Anishinabeg na kid ijanag ? Katoin norigom nind ijassi- nag •, Wemitigoji aiakosid nind ijanan. Dost thou go to see the Indians? No, I don’t go to see them to-day ; I go to a sick Frenchman. 336 Aw kmiioisens naningim o bi-gimodinan mishiminan. That boy comes often bere to steal apples. Nind apenimon kiiam, Debendjigeian. Kinaiva dash, bemadisiieg aking, kamin gmetch nind apenimossinan kii- awiwan. Lord, I trust in thee, (in thee I put my confi- dence. But in you, men living on earth, 1 don’t put much confidence. Imperfect Tense. Waiesh.kat naningim nind ijanaba- nig anishinabeg, anamietoin gi-kikinoamawagwa. In the beginning I went often to the Indians ; I taughtthem to say prayers. Kabe-bibon kamin kid ijasslmmabanig kid inamemagani- wag kitchi odenang. Ali winter you d id not go to see your relations in the city. Ninidjanissidog, binish nongom mojag kid apenimomma- ban niiaiv, gi-ondinamonagog kakina gego ; nongom dash kincma bamiidisoiog. My children, until now you al- ways depended (relied) on me, because I gave you ali you wanted ; but now take čare of yourselves. Meioija od anokinabanin akikon, kamin dash mashi oji- tchigasossiman. She ordered a kettle to be made, long ago, but it is not yet made. Perfect Tense. Juda o gi-atdwenan Jesusan, nissimida- na dassmabik joniian gi-missawenimad. Judas has sold Jesus, because' he has coveted the thirty pieces of silver. Osam ginmenj ki gi-apenimonawag kinigiigomag, mi wendj'i-nita-anokj.ssiweg nongom. You have relied too long on your parents, therefore you don’t like to work now. Anishinabeg enamiassigog o gi-gimodinawan abinodjtian odenang. Some pagan Indians have stolen a child in the village. 337 Ki gi-bbdawenag na nabagissagonsag oma ga-abidjig ? Kaivin nin gi~bodawessinag. Hast thou burnt up the little boards that were here ? No, I have not burnt them up. Plupeefect Tense. Weweni o gi-apenimonaban kiiato, Debendjigeian, megwa gi-bimadisid aking ; nongom dash ki tvabamig kid ogimawiwining gijigong. He had put ali his trust in thee, o Lord, during his lifetime on earth ; and novv he sees thee in thy heavenly kingdom. O gi-ijdnawabanin na mekatewikwanaien, bwa gopimad ! Kawin sa o gi-ij'assinawabanin. Had they gone to see the priest, before they went in the vvoods? No, they had not gone to him. Ningotbshkin opinig nin gi-atawangenabanig tagwa- gong, bwa dagwishineg. oma. I had borrovved a bag of potatoes last fall, before you arrived to this plače. Futuke Tense. Debendjiged nin gad-apenimonan ged- ako-bimadisiwdnen aking. In the Lord vvill I put my trust, as long as I shall live on earth. Mandaminag anisha nin gad-ashangenag, ketimagisidjig nin w.i-jawenimag ; mishiminag dash nin gad-atawenag. The corn I vvill give (for food) for nothing, I vvill do charity to the poor; but the app.les I vvill seli. Gigoutg na gaie ki gad-ashangemin ? Kawin kakina ki gad-ashangessimin ; anind eta. Shali vve give also the fishes 1 We vvill not give them ali; only a fevv. Nin ga-bi-gimodin kiiaw ningoting; o gi-inan nishimeian bejig anishinabe enamiassig. A pagan Indian (notpray- ing) has said to my little brother: I vvill come once and steal thee away. 338 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Ki mimoendam na, kid inawemaganiwag ijaieg nongom 2 Are you glad to go on a visit to your relations to-day ? Kishpin wi-atdwessiwan paktoejigan, mi go gaie nin tchi wi-atawessiwan. If thou dost not want to seli any flour, then I don’t want to seli any. . Nin gossag anishinabeg, tchi bi-gimodiwad niiaw; ikito nishime. I am afraid of the Indians that they come and steal me, says my little brother. Kishpin kakina o joniiamlwan migiwewad, ta-kitimagis- itoag gaie winawa. If they give away ali their money, they vvill be poor themselves. Pekfect Tense. Ki gi-jawenimag igiw enamiadjig, De- bendjigeian, kin eta gi-apenimowad kiiaw. Thou hast had mercy on these Christiana, O Lord, because they have trusted in thee alone. Ka/urin ki gi-tnino-dodansi gi-ijassiwan mekatewikwanaie, Pak gi-odjitchisseg. Thou hast not done right that thou hast not gone to the Missionary at Easter, (in the Easter-time.) Ki gi-nonddm na, anishinabeg gi-gimodiwad abinodjl- ian 2—E, nin gi-nondamin. Have you heard that the Indians have stolen a child ? Yes, vve have heard it. Gi-apenimoidn Debendjiged, nin gi-nodjimoig. Because I put my trust in the Lord, he restored me to health again. Plltehfect Tense. Atawangessiwamban jeba pakweji- gan, kawin nongom ki da-amoassi ; kantin auriia pakwe- jigan kid aiawassiwanan. If I had not borrowed this morning some flour, thou wouldst not eat bread now; we have no flour. 339 Naujatch wdiba anokipan odabanan, nongom o da-gi-na- dinan missan ; kissinamagad. If he had ordered the sledge sooner, he vvould have fetched some wood to-day ; it is cold. Gimodissiwegoban joniia, kawin ki da-gi-kibakwaigas- ossim. Had you not stolen money, you would not have been imprisoned. Future Tense. Aninitoapi ged-apenimoian niiau: enigoko- deeian ? kid iji gagwedjimig koss gijigong ebid. Thy heavenly father asketh thee: When wilt thou put thy trust in me with ali thy heart ? Aninitoapi ged-ijdian ki nigiigog ?—Namandj api ged- ijaiodnen. When wilt thou go to thy parents ? I don’t know when I shall go. Aninitoapi ged-atatoangeieg minatva ninpijikimag ? Pa- nima sigwang. When will you borrovv my oxen again ? Next spring. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. Kaurin kakina kokosh, ki da-atawessinan t gegapi ki ga-bakade gaie kin. Thou oughtst not to seli out ali the pork ; by and by thou wilt starve thyself. Nibtoakaiegoban* kawin ki da-gimodissinawag nind opinimag nin kitiganing. If you were prudent, (honest,) you would not steal my potatoes in my field. Kaurin nin da-atawessinag nin bebejigoganjimag, kitima- gisissitvdn. I would not seli my horses, vvere I not poor. Perfect Tense. Nongom ki da-gi-ijamin kimissenan, osam dash kissinamagad, sogipo gaie. We vvould have gone to-day to see our sister, but it is too cold, and it snows. Kauin aw anishinabe ki da-gi-apenimossinan, osam toaiejingeshki. Thou oughtst not to have relied on that Indian, he is too deceitful. See Remark 8, p. 119. 340 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Debendjiged ki Kije-Manitom eta enigokodee.ian apenimo/i, kego dash gioetch atviia bemadisid apenimoken. Trust in the Lord thy God only from ali thy heart, but don’t trust much in anybody living on earth. Ijakan ato aiakosid inini, jaioenim, geget kitchi kotagito. Go to that sick man, be chantable to him, he suffers much indeed. O gad-atawenan od opwa.ga.nan, kego dash o mo sliv: man o gad-atawessinan ; nind ina aw anishinabe. I say to that Indian thus : Let him seli his pipe, but let him not seli his handkerchief. Ijadanig anishinabeg awi-gagikimangwa; kego dash ata- wewinini nongom ijassida. Let us go to the Indians to preach to them, (to exhort them,) but let us not go to- day to the trader. Enishinabemieg, kego gimodikegon opinig kitiganing; ki gad-animisim. Ye Indians, don’t steal potatoes in the field ; you will be punished for it. O gad-ashangenawan kokoshan, pakwejiganan gaie. Let them give pork and flour , (for food, not for šale, etc.) PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Kanin wika nin ga-wanenimassig epenl- modjig niiaw, kaginig nin ga-widokawag; ikito Debeni- minang. I will never forget those who trust in me, I will always assist them, saith the Lord. Epenimod anishinaben, naningim loaiejima; Kije-Mani- ton dash epenimod, ka wika waiejimassi. He that trusts in man, is often deceived ; but he that trusts in God, is never deceived. Apitchi matchi dodam aw masinitchiganan menitoked. Enamiassigog mi igiw menitokedjig masinitchiganan. 341 He that adores an image, (idol,) does exceedingly wrong. Pagans (heathen) are those who adore images, (idols.) Imperfect Tense. Nibiiva enamiadjig gtvetch epenimossi- gobanig kiidw, Debenimiiang,.nongom anwenindisowag. Many Christians who didnot much trust in thee, O Lord, are now repenting. Winawa epenimopanig anishinaben, nongom agatchiieag gi-waiejimindwa. Those who trusted in man are ashamed now, because they were deceived. Kinawawikaetawangessiwegoban joniia, ki kitchijawen- dagosim. You who never borrovved any money, you are very happy. Perfect Tense. Kinaurn trika ga-apenimossiweg joniia, osawa joniia gaie, geget ki kitchi danim, ki jateendago- sim gaie. You who never put your trust in silver and gold, you are truly rich and happy. Ato ikwe ga-anokid akikon, o ga-bi-nanan. The woman that ordered a kettle, may come and fetch it. PluFERfect Tense. Igiw ga-manitokepanig masininin, nongom meshkioat Kije-Maniton eta o gad-anokitaioa- tran. Those that had vvorshipped images (idols) before, shall new in return serve God only. Kinatca ga-apenimoiegoban aio inini, gi-bwa-kikenimeg , ki wabandanawa nongom, gi-glwanimigoieg. You who had trusted in that man before you knew him, you see now that you have been belied, (deceived.) Future Tense. Awged-atawangeSsig mika joniian, ioetoeni dasli teki anokid, ta-mino-bimadisi; aw dash nibitoa ged-atawanged joniian, mojag ta-animendam. He who never shall borrotv money, but shall be industrious, (work well,) shall live well, (contehted,) but he who shall bor- row much money, shall always be troubled in his mind. Aicenenag igiw ged-ashangedjig nongom paktoejiganan ? IVho are those that shall give bread (to eat) to-day. 22 312 V. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD, ssinadogenag, ssinadogenan, ssiminadogenag, ssimwadogenag, ssinawadogenan.- ssinadog, ssinadogenan, ssiminadog, ssirmvadog, ssinawadogenan, PRESENT TENSE, Singular. Nind apenimonadog, I trust per- Kawin ssinadog, haps in him, kid apenimonadog, od apenimonadogenan, nind apenimominadog, kid apenimomvfadog, od apenimonavradogenan, Plural. Nind apenimonadogenag, I trust Kawin ssinadogenag. perhaps in them, kid apenimonadogenag, od apenimonadogenan, nind apenimominadogenag, kid apenimonv/vadogenag, od apenimonawadogenan, The perfect tense is formed by prefixing gi- to the verb as : Nin gi-apenimonadog, . . . PLUPERFECT TENSE.* Singular and Plural. Gonimo. gi-apenimo-wam\>an, I had Katoin ssitvamban perhaps trust- ed in him, (them,) gian, „ ssivvamban, See second Note, p. 142. 343 ,, gi-apenimogoban, „ ssigoban, „ gi-apenimowangiban ) we ,, ssitvangiban, ,, gi-apenim6wangoban f . . . ,, ssiwangoban, >> gi-apenimowegoban, ,, ssiwegoban, ,, gi-apenimbgwaban, „ ssigvvaban, Form the/atare tense after the present by prefixing gac- to the verb, as : Nin gad-apenimonadog, . . . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Epenimove anen, that I perhaps trust in ssitvanen, him, (them,) epenimovanen, ssitvanen, epenimogwen, ssigvven, epenimovrangen, 'i ssiwangen, epenimovtangen, > ssiwangen, ep«n?»mwegwen,) ssiwegwen, fpenimowagwen, ssiwagwen, PERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. G a-a p enimow anen, that I perhaps have trusted ssiwanen, in him, (them,) Ete., after the above present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. 4pfinimowambanen, iflhadp. trusted in ssivvambanen, him, (them,) /zpeni»wwambanen, if thou hadst . . . ssiwambanen. upentmogobanen, if he .. . ssigobanen, 344 a^enJBioivdngibanen, } apemnimvangobanen, > apenimovegobanen, apenimo vvagobanen, ssiwangibanen, ssiwangobaiien, ssiwegobanen, ssiwagobanen, The futtire tenses to be formed after the present. PART ICI PLES. PRESENT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Nin epenimovanen, I who perh. trust in him, (them ,) kin epenimov? anen, thou who perliaps tr. , . . win epenimogvren, he who perhaps tr. . . . ninaivind epenimovangen, ) we who perhaps trust in kinaivind epenimow angen, j him, (them,) kinawa epenimowegwea, you who parhaps tr winawa epenimogvenag, they who perhaps tr. Nin epenimossiwanen, I who perhaps do not tr. . . . kin epenimossiwanen, thou who . . . win epenimossigmen, ninawind epenimoss™ angen, ) we who do nQt kinamnd epenimossiwangen, | kinawa epenimossiwegwen, winawa epenimossigwenag’, IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Nin epenimov/ambanen, I who perhaps trusted in him, (them,) kin epenimov/ambanen, thou who ... win epenimogobanen, ninatoind q?e?wmowangibaneu, ) kinamind epenimov/angobanen, \ 345 kinawa ej>enimowegobanen, winawa epenimogobanenag, Nin epemmossiwambanen, I who perhaps did not . . . lan epenimossimambanen, thou who . . . win epenimossigobanen, ninatirind epenimossiwangibanen, ) kinavrind epemmossiwangobanen, J kinaiva epenimossiv/egobanen, winawa ey>em’mossigobanenag, The remaining tenses of these participles are to be formed after the above two, according to many preceding paradigma. ESAMPLES ON THE V. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Kaurin Kije-Maniton od apenimossinad- ogenan, mi apitchi toendji-segisid. He does probably not put his trust in God; that is the reason he fears so much. Kaurin abissiioag; anishinaben od ijanawadogenfrn. They are not at home; they probably are visiting the Indians, (on a visit to the Indians.) Kid apenimomwadog niiaw, ininiuidog, mi ganabatch wendji-nasikawiieg nongom. Men, I suppose you plače your confidence in me; that is perhaps the reason you come to me to-day. Perfect Tense. Kid inamemaganag ki gi-ijanadogenag pitchinago; kamin sa kabe-gijig ki gi-wabamissinon. Thou hast probably been to see thy relations yesterday ; so I did not see thee ali day. Aw oshkinauie osam o gi-apenimonadogenan, kakina gego anisha tchi ondinamagod; kawin dash gi-anokissi. That young fellow relied perhaps too much on him, that 346 he would let him have ali things for nothing ; and so he did not work. Kamin mashi o gi-ij assinadogenan mekatcioikioanaien, panima wabang ganabatch o gad-ijanan. He has proba- bly not yet been to see the Missionary; he will perhaps go to him to-morrow. Future Tense. Nin gi-agonabanig awassonago nind agimag wedi ejad aw anishinabe ; o ga-gimodinadogenan nind agiman. J had hung up, the day before yesterday, my snow shoes, there where that Indian is going ; he will perhaps take my snow-shoes. Ininiioidog, kanrin nongom gmetcli ki gad-apenimossim- icadog niiaic, kamin sa mika ki babamitossinoninim. Men, you will now probably not put much confidence in me, because I never do what you ask me. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Kaurin nin kikendansin daie-apenimo- wdnen Debendjiged aiapitchi-kijemadisid, miši gego gaie kekendang. I know not whether I trust enough in the Lord who is so exceedingly merciful, and who knows ali. Endogmen aw inini epenimogmen niiaw ; kamin givaiak nin kikenimigossi. I doubt whether that man has any confidence in me; he does not know me well. Namdndj ejitchigegmen, ejagmen ossan, gonima gaie ejassigmen. I don’t know what he is doing, and whether he goes to his father, or not. Perfect Tense. Kaurin ki kilcenimissinon ga-ijawanen aw aidkosid inini; endogmen gaie John ga-ijagwen. I do not know whether thou hast been to that sick man ; and I do not know whether John has been. Kaurin nin kikenimassi ga-apenimogwen kiiaw gi-kitima- gisid. I don’t know whether he had recourSe to thee, when he was poor. 347 Endogtden ga-apenimowagwen kiiawiwan gi-akosiv:ad. I don’t know whether they had recourse to you when they were sick. Pluperfect Tense. Gimodissiicambanen mandaminag kitiganing, ki da-gi-ashdmin nongom pakwejigan. Hadst thou not stolen corn in the field, (as I understood,) I would have given thee now some bread, (or, flour.) Apenimossiwdmbanen kiiato, nissgi, tchi mdokaioiian, kamin nin da-gi-m.adjitassiii. iw anokimin ; kego nongom nagajishikcn. Had I not relied on thee, brother, that thou vvouldst help me, I would not have commenced that work ; do not now forsake me. Future Tense. Namandj minik ged-atawegwen kitchi moshioen aw atameminini, osam sa o sanagagiman. I don J t know how many shawls that merchant shall seli‘ he sells them much too high, (dear.) Kishpin apitchi kitiniagisid, mi api ganabatch ged-ape- nimogmen kiiawiwan, teki jamenimeg minama. When he becomes very poor, then perhaps he will have recourse to you, that you might do him charity again. PARTICIPLES. PkeseNT Tense. Kinoma ketchi-apenimoroegmen niiaio, megonen ge-iji-gashkitoiodmbdnen tchi dodonagog 1 You who have perhaps much confidence in me, what would I be able to do for you 1 Kin aidpitchi-apenimoicanen aw inini, ki ga-kitchi- tcaiejimigo ningoting. Thou who trustest so much in that man, (as I heard,) thou shalt be once much de- ceived. Kinaioa ejdmegmen mojag aidkosidjig, ki ga-jamenimigo- maJesus dibakonige-gijigak, kishpin winwmdji-dodameg. You who visit frequently the sick, (as I understood,) Jesus will be merciful to you on the day of judgment, if you do it for his sake. 348 Imperfect Tense. Ningvaiak epenimossiwambanen kiiaie, Debcnimiian, ki pagossenimin tchi bonigidetawiian; weweni nin wi-apenimon kiimo nongom. I vvho did per- haps not perfectly trust in thee, O Lord, I beseech thee forgive me ; henoeforth I will perfectly trust in thee. Mamig oshkinaweg, endasso-gijigadinig ejdgobanenag etageshkinidjin, nongom ka wika od ijassinawan. These voung fellovvs vvho associated, every day before, vvith card-players, (as I heard,) novv never go to them. Perfect Tense. Awegwen aw ga-bi-atawangegwen jeba nin bebejigoganjiman, kamin nin gi-wabamassi. I don’t knovv vvho vvas the person that came this morning to borrow my horse, I did not see him. Kin mika gmetch ga-apenimossiwanen niiaw, ki kikenim na eji-sagiinan, eji-kitimageniminan gaie ? Thou, who perhaps hast never put much confidence in me, dost thou knovv hovv I love thee, and hovv I pity thee? Awegwenag ga-ashangegwenag paktoejiganan, kokoshan gaie. Geget mino dodawawag mamig anishinabeg beka- dedjig. I do not knovv vvho are those that distributed flour and pork. A good work indeed is done to these starving Indians. Futuke Tense. Ninidjanissidog, awegwen ge-wi-ijagwert ivabang omishomissan, weweni nongom o ga-wabandan o masinaigan. Children, vvhoever vvishes to go to-morrovv to visit grand-father, mast well study to-day his book, (his lesson.) Awegwen ge-migiwegwen naningim joniian, minik eji- gashkitod, mi sa % ketimagisidjig tchi mino dodawindwa, apitchi kitchi daniwin o ga-mikdn gijigong. Whoever shall often give money, as much as he can, vvith the in- tention to do good to the poor, shall find an immense treasure in heaven. Narng.ndj api ged-ijdssiwanen wika etagedjig, menik- rnedjig gaie. I don’t know when the time will como, vvhen thou shalt not associate any more vvith card-play.ers and drinkers. 349 VI. CONJUGATION. o o o 3. pers. debivetan. kikendan, miniktoen. To this Conjugation belong ali the verbs transitive or ac- tive, inanimate. The object, upon which acts the subject of these verbs, is always comprised in the verb; as: Nin mabandan, does not mean only, I see; but, I see it, (some inanimate object. See page 18.) Ali the verbs of this Conjugation end in n, (an, en, in. on,) at the first person sing. present, indicative; and like- wise so at the characteristical third person. Here are a few verbs belonging to this Conjugation. 1. pers. Nin debmetan, I believe it, Nin kikendan, I know it, Nin mi.nikwen, I drink it, Nind apandjigen, I eat it with some other od apandjigen thing, Nin midjin, I eat it, (some in. obj.,) o midjin. Nind agioln, I put it on, (clothing,) od agwin. ‘ Nin bidon, I bring it, o bidon. Nin biton, I wait for it, o biton. Note. In the paradigm this final n, is placed among the terminations, because it does not always remain with the verb, 350 AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TE NSE. Singular. Nin wabandan, I see it, Kawin nsin,* ki wabandan, “ nsin, o mabandan, “ nsin, wabandam, they see it,(on le voit,) “ nsim, one sees it,+ nin uabandamm, ,, nsimin, ki wabandanawa, ,, nsinawa, o wabandanawa, „ nsinawa, Plural. Kawin Nin wabandanan, I see them, (in. obj.) nsinan, ki wabandanan, “ nsinan, o wabandanan, “ nsinan, nin wabandam\n, “ nsimin, ki wabandanawan, “ nsinatvan, o,.wabandanawan, “ nsinawan, IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin wabandanaban, I saw it, .ki wabandanaban, o wabandanaban, Kawin nsinaban, “ nsinaban, “ nsinaban, See Remark p. 160. t See Remark p. 92. 351 nin wabandammaban, ki wabandana\vaban, o wabandana\Naban, Plural. Nin wabandanabanin, I saw them, (m. objects,) ki toabandanabanin, o teabandanabanin, nin ttaJandaminabanin, ki tra6a?irfanawabanin, o wa.bandana'wabanin ) Nin gi-wabandan, I ki gi-wabandan, o gi-wabandan, PERFECT TENSE. Singular. have seen it, “ nsiminaban, “ nsinawaban, “ nsinawaban, Katrin nsinabanin, “ nsinabanin, “ nsinabanin, “ nsiminabanin, “ nsinawabanin, “ nsinavvabanin. Katrin nsin, “ nsin, “ nsin, Katrin nsinan, “ nsinan, “ nsinan, Ete., after the above present tense. Plural. Nin gi-wabandanan, I have seen them, ki gi-wabandanan, o gi-wabandanan, Ete., after the present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Nin gi-wabanda.naban, I haandangiban, jcačicmrfamingiban, (si on l’eut vu,) wa5andamangiban, ( wzzZ>«ndamangoban, ) toflJdnrfamegoban, ica6azid«mowapan, nsiwamban, nsivvamban, nsigoban, nsingiban, nsivvdngiban, nsiwangoban, nsiwegoban, . nsigwaban, * See Remark 3. p. 45 t See Remark 3, p. 116. 353 Form the two future tenses after the above present tense; as: Ge-wabandamdn , . . Ge-gi-ivabandamdn. ... And form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the present and perfect tenses of the indicative ; as : Nin da- wabandan, I would see it, (or, I ought to see it,) . . . Nin da-wabandanan, I would see them, . . . Nin da-gi-waban- dan, I would have seen it. etc. . IMPERATIVE MOOD. Wabandan, ) .. x , , ’ , > see it, (them,) wabanaamok.an, J ' ' o ga-wabandan, let him see it, o ga-wabandanan, let him see them, wabandanda, let us see it, (them,) waba.nda.mog, see it, (them,) o ga-wabandana.wa., let them see it, o ga-wabandanawan, let them see them, Kego ngen, “ nsin, “ nsinan, '* nsida, “ ngegon, “ nsinavva, “ nsinawan. P ARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Nin wa.idband.amdn, I who see it, (them,) kin ivaiabandaman, thou who seest it, (them,) win waiabandang, he who sees it, (them,) ivaiabandammg, (ce que l’on voit,) ninawind waiabandam&ng, ) wg who gee . ( . kinawind waiabandamang, | ” kinawa waiabandameg, you who see it, (them,) winawa waiabandatigig, tliey who see it, (them,) Nin waiabandansiw&n, I who do not see it, (them,) kin waiabandansiv/an, thou who dost not , 354 vin waiabandansig, he who does not see it, (them.) . vaiabandansmg, (ce qu’on ne voit pas,) ninaicind vaiabapdans^ang, ) we who don > t gee hinauind waiabanaansvwang, ) kinaioa waiabandansiweg, you who don’t see it, (the: winawa vaiabandansigog, they who don’t . . . IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plurdl. Nin waiabandama.mban, I who saw it, (them,) kin waiabandamamban, win vaiabandangiban, vaiabandamingiban, (ce qu’on voyait,) ninamnd waiabandama.ngiban, ) g kinaivind waiabandamangoban, ) kinawa vaiabandamegoban, windwa waiabandangibanig, Nin waiabandansiwamban, 1 who did not see . . . kiti waiabandansiwamban, vin mtidbandansigoban, uaiabandansingiban, (ce que Fon ne v. pas,) ninamind waiabandanswiang\ban, ) , , ,. . , •, 7 • 5 , ’ } we who did not. . . ktnamnd wa/abandansiviangoban, ) kinawa waiabandansiwegoban, winawa ivaiabandansigobamg, After these two tenses ali the others of these participles are formed ; as : Nin ga-wabandaman, . . . Nin ga-wa- bandamamban, . . . Nin ge-wabandarndn, etc. . . . Remark. 1. The verb, nind aidn, I have it, makes an exception from the above paradigm in the third persons of the subjunctive mood and the,participles; as' follovvs : 355 AFFIEMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT, TENSE. Singular and Plnral. Aiad, because he has it, (them,) atdng, because one has it, atdvvad, because they have it, ssig, ssing, ssigwa. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Aiapan, had he had it, (them,) aiavvapan, had they, . . ssigoban,, ssigvvaban, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Singular and Plural. EM, vvho has it, (them,) ««djig, vvho have it, (them,) ssig, ssigog, IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Eidpan, vvho had it, (them,) etapanig, vvho had it, (them,) ssigoban, ssigobanig, In ali the moods, tenses and persons, not mentioned here above, this verb is exactly conjugated after Nin icaban- dan. 356 Remark. 2. Ali the verbs of this Conjugation, ending in an, are exactly conjugated after the preceding paradigm, Nin wabandan. But the verbs ending in en, in, and on, undergo a little difference in some moods and tenses. We shall point out here this difference. The moods and tenses which are not mentioned in the following paradigm, are conformable to the above paradigm, Nin wabandan. We take the verb, Nin sagiton, I like it, for an example; but the verbs in en, and in, are conjugated exactly like those in on. In the affirmative form the whole indicative mood of Nin sagiton, is exactly conjugated as in Nin vabandan. But in the negative form you have to remember, that in the terminations of this form, the letters ns in the preced¬ ing paradigm, are always changed into ss, for the verbs in en, in, and on. So, for instance, you say: Kawin nin wabandansin ; change this ns in ss, for the verb, Nin sagi¬ ton, and you will have : Katrin nin sagitossin. And so on, ahvays changing ns into ss. This is the only little differ¬ ence betiveen Nin wabandan and Nin sagiton, etc., for the whole indicative mood. But in the subjunctive mood there is some more discrepance; as you see here bekrtv. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Siiigular and Plural. Sagitoian, because I like it, ssiwAn, (them,) in. objects, sagito\w, ssivvan, sggitod, ssig, sagitong, (qu’on haime^.) ssing, 357 sagitoiang, ) we like . .. ss ! w ^’ sagitoiang, j ssiwang, sagitoieg, ssiweg, sagitomad, ssigwa, PERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Gi-sagitoia.n, as I have liked it, ssiwan, (them,) Ete., after the above present tense. PLUPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural iSagitoiamban, had I liked it, ssiwamban, (them,) sagztoiamban, ssiwamban, sagrtopan, ssigoban, sngitongiban, (si on l’eut aime,) ssingiban, sagitoiangiban, ) j we ssiwangiban, sagitoiangoban, j ' ssiwangoban, sagi/oiegoban, ssiwegoban, sagitov/apan, ssigwaban, The future tenses to be formed after the present. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sagilon, ) Hite it, (them,) sagitokan, j ' ' ’> o ga-sagitun, let him like it, o ga-sagitonan, let him like them, sagitoda, let us like it, (them,) r4“,~ g ';». o-.) 23 Kego ken, “ ssin, “ ssinan, “ ssida, “ kegon, 358 o ga-sagitonawa, let them like it, ssinawa, o ga-sagitonavran, let them like them, ssinavvan, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Sing. and Plur. Nin saiagitoiAn, I who like it, (them,) kin saiagitoian, thou wholikest it, (them,) min saiagitod, he who likes it, (them,) saiagitong, what one likes, ninawind saiagitong, ) we who hke R (th , kinammd sazagitoiang, J ' kinama saiagitoieg, you who like it, (them,) minama saiagitodjig, they who like it, (them,) Nin saiagitossiwan, I who don’t like it, (them,) kin saiagitossiwan, thou who dost not like . . . min saiagitossig, he who does not like it, (them,) saiagitossing, what one does not like, ninamind saiagitossvnang, ) , , ,. .j . °.. • ° > we who don t . . kinawina saiagitossiv/ang, ) kinawa saiagitossiweg, you who don’t like, winawa saiagitossigog, they who . . . IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular and Plural. Nin saiagitoiamban, Iwho liked it, (them,) kin saiagitoiamban, thou who likedst it, (them,) win saiagilopan, he who . . . saiagtčongiban, (ce qu’on aimait,) 359 ninaioind saiagitoiangiban, ) , , j • • 7 . • i z we wno hkcu < kinamnd saiagičoiangoban, ) kinoma saiagitoiegoban, you who liked . . . minama saiagitopanig, they who . . . Nin saiagitossiv/amban, I who did not like it, (them,) /cin saiagitossivramban, thou who didst not like . . . tein saiagitossigoban, he who did not. . . sniagztossingiban, what one did not like, ninaioind saiagi7ossiwdngiban, ) , kinamind saiagito^angoban, J we who dld not ’ ’ ' kinama saiagitossbnegoban, you who did .. . minama sazagičossigobanig, they who . . . Form after these two tenses ali the others of these parti- ciples. Exactly as the verb, Nin sagiton, are conjugated the verbs which we call personifying. (See page 85.) They ali end in on. These verbs pcrsonify inanimate things, that is to say, they represent them as doing actions, which only persons or other living beings can do. F. i. Kid ikitomin nin nibtcakdigon. Thy word makes me wise. Anamieioin nin ginaamagon matchi dodamouin. Religion forbids me bad actions. Kitchi akosimin ki gi-odissigomin. A great sickness has come to us, (has visited us.) Nitam batadomin kakina anishinabeg o gi-inigaigonawa. The first sin has injured ali men, (ali mankind.*) Here are some moods and tenses of these verbs, only ex- empli gratia. See other Examples on page 85. 360 AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PREŠE NT TENSE. Singular. Nind odissigon, it comes to me, kid odissigon, “ “ “thee, od odissigon, “ “ “ him, nind odissigomin, “ “ “ us, kid odissigonavra, “ “ “ you, od odissigonawa, “ “ “ them Plural. Kaurin ssin, “ ssin, ssin, “ ssimin, “ ssinawa, “ ssinavva, Nind otZissigonan, they come to me, (in. obj.) kid odissi‘gonan,they come to thee, od odissigonan, “ “ “ him, nind odissigomin, “ “ “ us, kid odissigonawan, “ “ “you, od odissigonawan,“ “ “them, Kawin ssinan, “ ssinan, “ ssinan, “ ssimin, “ ssinawan, “ ssinawan, IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. Nind odissigona\>an(\t came to me, kidodissigonairan, “ “ “thee, od odissigonaban,“ “ “him, nind ocZissz^ominaban, etc. . . kid odissigonav/aban, od odissigonawaban, Kalvin ssinaban, “ ssinaban, “ ssinaban, “ ssiminaban, “ ssinawaban, “ ssinawaban, 361 Plural. Nind orfissigonabanin, they came to Kaivin ssinabanin, me (in. obj.) kid odissigonabanm, th. ca. toth., “ ssinabanin. Ete. . . Ete. . . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Ete. . . Ete.. . PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Nin wedissigoian, I to whom it comes, (they come,) kin wtdissigoian, thou to whom .. . win wedissigod, he to whom . . . ninaioind toedissigoiang,) , kinamind wtdissigoiang, $ we 0 " om ' * ’ kinawa vedissigoieg, you . . . winawa wedissigoA\\g, they . . . 362 PRESENT TENSE. Nin wedissigossiwa.n, I to whom it does (they do) not come, kin wedissigossiwan, thou . . . win wedissigossig, he . . . ninawind wedissigossiv/a.ng, ) kinaioind wedissigossiwa.ng, j kinaua wedissigbssiweg, you . . . winawa wedissigossigog, they . . . Ete. . . etc. . . Hemark. The formation of these. personifying verbs is easy. You have only to add the letter n to the first person sing., present, indicative, of the passive voice in the IV. Conjugation, (page 224,) and you form these verbs. Ezamples. 1 pers. pass. voice, personifying verbs. Nin vsabamigo, I am seen, nin wa.ba.mig on, it sees me. Nin nissigo, I am killed, nin nissigon, it kills me. Nin ganbnigo, I am spoken to, nin ganonigon, it speaks to me. Nin nishkimigo, I am made angry, nin nishkimigon, it makes me angry. Nin sagiigo, I am loved, nin sdgiigon, it loves me. Nin nopinanigo, I am follovved, nin nopinanigon, it follotvs me. Nind anivenimigo, I am reproached, nind anwenimigon, it reproaches me. Nin jingenimigo, I am hated, nin jingenimigon, it hates me. Nin kikenimigo, I am known, nin kikenimigon, it knovvs me. Etc. .. etc. . . 363 VI. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. > PRESENT TENSE* Singular. Kato in Nin teabandanadog, 1 see it perhaps, ki tvabandanadog, o toabandanadog, nin loabandaminadog, ki toabandanaMadog, o tcabandanawadog, nsinadog, “ nsinadog, “ nsinadog, “ nsiminadog, “ nsinawadog, " nsinawadog, Plural. “ nsinadogenan, “ nsinadogenan, “ nsiminadogenan, u nsinavvadogenan, “ nsinawadogenan, tenses are fornied after the Kawin Nin teabandanadogenan, I see them nsinadogenan, perhaps, (in. objects,) ki teabandanadogenan, o teabandanadogenan, niti ifadandaminadogenan, ki toabandanav/adogenan, o wa6andanawadogenan, The perfect and the future above present, by prefixing to the verb gi-, go^, ga-gi-. PLUPERFECT TENSE.* Gi-wabandama\\amk>an, I had perhaps Katvin nsiwamban, seen it, (them,) See second Note, p, 142. 364 gi-wabandamowamban, “ nsiwamban, gi-wabandamogoban, “ nsigoban, gi-wabandamowangiban, ) “ nsitvangiban, gi-wabandamowangoban, J “ nsiwangoban, gi-wabandamowegoban, “ nsiwegoban, gi-wabandamogwaban, “ nsigwaban. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Waiabandamow&nen* whether I see it, nsiwanen, (them,) teaiabandamowanen^ nsivranen, waiabcmdamogwen, nsigwen, waiabandamowžngen,) wlietherwe nsiwangen, waiabandamowangen, y ' ' ' nsitvangen, waiabandamowegweii. > nsivvegvven, waiabandamowagwerk* nsiwagwen, PEREECT TENSE. Ga-wabandamow&nem, whether l haveseen it, (them,) Ete., after the above present tense. PLUPSRFECT TENSE. nsiwanen, Waba n^«mowambanen, if I had seen it, nsiwambaners, • (them,) je»fia?Mfamowambanen, nsiwambanei», loabandamogobanen, nsigobanen, wa6 we who per. see ... ktnauind watabandamowangen, ) ‘ kinawa waiabandamowegwen, zoinazva waiabandamogwenag, PRESENT TENSE. Nin waiabandansiwanen, I who p. don’t see it, (them,) kin waiabandansiw anen, thou who p . . . zvin waiabandansigwen, ninawind zeaiabandansiwangen, | we w ]io kinawind waidbandansiwangen, J we w ° P' ■ • kinatva waiabandansiwegwen, winawa waiabandansigwenag. IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin waiabandamowam\ianen, I who perhaps saw it, (them,) kin zvaiabandamowam\>a.nen, thou who p. . . zvin zeaiabandamogobanen, ninaivind ivaiabandamowang\banen, ) kinazoind icaiaJanrfamovvangobanen, ) kinawa zoaiabandamowegobanen, zvinawa zeaiabandamogobanenag, Nin zcaiabandansbvambanen, I who did perhaps not see it, (them,) kin zcaidbandansiwambanen, thou who . .. 366 win tcaiabandansigobanen, ninawind maiabandansb.vangibanen, ) kinavnnd waiabandansvwangobanen, ) kinaioa waiabandansiwegobanen, winawa waiabandansigobanenag. Form the other tenses after these two. Remark. Respecting the verbs ending in en, in and on, (page 349,) you will please remember, that in ali the cases where the verbs ending in an, take the syllable mo in the Dubitative Conjugation, this syllable is taken out, for the verbs ending in en, in and on. So you say : Waiaban- damoiodnen, waiabandamogwen, etc ... but you will not say : Saiagitomowdnen, saiagitomogmen ; but: Saiagito- toanen, saiagitogioen ; and so forth, always taking out. the syllable mo, for the verbs in en, in, on. EXAMPI.ES ON THE WHOLE VI. CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Bejig eta makaigan nin icdbandan, ka¬ min nij nin viabandansinan. I see only one house, I don’t see two. Nin bitomin nabikwan tchi bagamassing. Kaioin nin kikendansimin api ge-dagwishinomagadogwen. We are waiting for the vessel to come in. We don’t know when it shall arrive. O debwetanadog dajindimin ga-nondang pitchinago; gaie ogotv ikwewag o debwetanawadog. He probably be- lieves the calumny he heard yesterday; and these wo- men, I think, also believe it. Imperfect Tense. Aw kwiwisens kamin gego o kikendan- sinahan ba-dawishing orna, nongom dash weweni o wa- bandan masinaigan. This boy knew nothing when he came here, but now he reads well. 367 Nin kitchi sagitominabanin masinaiganan ga-u-anitoi- ang. We liked very much the books we have lost. (The person spoken to not included.) Mokoddssowinini nibiiva od ojitonabanin apabimnan, adopowinan gaie, bibonong ; nongom dash mojag akosi. The joiner made many benches and tables, last winter ; but now he is always sick. Perfect Tense. Ki gi-giwewidonan na anokasotvinan'! Bejig eta nin gi-giwewidon ; nij dash kamin mashi nin gi-aiossinan. Hast thou carried back the tools ? I have carned back (returned) one only; but the other tvvo I have not yet used. Nin gicinamabandan wiiass oma ga-ateg ; animosh o gi- bi-gimodinadog. I cannot find (I miss) the meat that was here; I suppose a dog has stolen it away. Anotch matchi ijitchigeminan ki gi-webinanawan jaigwa, giwashkwebiwin gaie ki gi-bonitonawa ; gaginawishkiwin dash ki gi-ishkonanawa. You have already rejected many bad practises, you have also abandoned drunken- ness ; but the habit of telling lies you have retained. Pluperfect Tense. Bwa dagwishinan oma, nin gi-gish- pinadominabanin iniw mokomanan, patakaiganan gaie. We had bought these knives and forks, before thou camest to this plače. Nij masinaiganan jaigwa nin gi-ijibianabanin, bejig dash kamin mashi nin gi-dc-gijitossinaban, api pandiged nishime. I had already vvritten tvvo letters, but I had not quite finished another one, when my brother (sister) came in. Nibinong bwa bi-giwciang, Moningivanekaning gi-ijai- dng, pijikiioag o gi-banadjitonawabanin nin kitiganin- anin. Last summer cattle had destroyed our fields, (gardens,) before we came back from our journey to La- pointe. 368 Future Tense. Weweni nin ga-ganainendanan Kije- Manito o ganasongewinan, kamin minama ondjita nin ga-wi-bigobidossinan. I will faithfully keep the com- mandments of God, I will no more break them purposely. Nin gad-atawemin nin makaiganinanin oma, bekanakin dash odenang nin ga-gishpinadomin, kamin dash kitigan nin gad-ojitossimin. We will seli out our houses here, and we will buy others in the town, but we shall make no field, (garden.) Kishime o ga-banadjitonadogenan masinaiganan nijike- ivabid; ami-ijan. Thy little brother (sister) will per- haps spoil the books, as he (she) is alone; go to him, (her.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense, Ninidjaniss, kishpin gego dibddodaman, gonima gaie gego ojitoian, mikmenim Debendjiged miši gego maiabandang. My child, if thou art telling some- thing, or doing something, remember the Lord who sees ali. Kishpin v:a-ai amowan.cn gego, gagmedjimishin, ki ga- minin. Bidadjimomin nmandamomegmen, kego pabige debmetangegon. 11 thou perhaps vvishest to have something, ask me, I will give it to thee. If you happen to hear re- ports, don’t believe them immediately. Jaigma apitchi inendamog tchi bonitomad minikmemin, mi dash tchi odapinamoicad miniktoessi-masinaigansan. They already think firmly to give up (to abandon) drink« ing, and to take the pledge, Perfect Tense. Nin jamendagossimin nongom gi-tvebi- namang anishinabewitchigewin, mi dash anamiemin gi- odapinamdng. We are happy now, because we have re- jected (abandoned) the Indian mood of living, and have taken religion. 369 Mi ganabatch wcndji-dodamowad, ga-nondansiwagwen gagikwewin gi-anamiegijigadinig. They perhaps do that, because they probably have not heard the sermon last Sunday. Kawin John keiabi ta-kitimagisissi, ga-bonilogwen ish- kotewabo. John will be no more poor now, because he has quitted ardent liquor, I understand. Pluterfect Tense. Nmoatch waiba mikamangiban tchi- man, mewija nin da-gi-dagwishinimin. Had we found a canoe. sooner, we would have arrived long ago. Minikwessiwamban iw wenijishing mashkikivabo, gin- tvenj ki da-gi-akos. Hadst thou not taken this good medicine, thou vvouldst have been sick a long time. Ningotchi bakan mikansitoegoban anokiwin, nin ki da-gi- mininim. Had you not found work elsevvhere, I would have given you some. Future Tense. TVegonen iw ge-gashkitod enamiad, ga- nauendang ganasongewinan ? What shall the Christian obtain (earn) by keeping the commandments ? Ninidjanissidog, minik nwandameg gagikwewin anamic- nigamigong, mi iio mojag ge-mindjimendamcg, mi iw ge- wanendansiweg ivika. My children, the preaching you hear in the church, is the thing you should always keep in memory, and never forget, Second Future Tense. Ge-gi-kitigadameg Kije-Manito o kitiganing, enamiaieg, mi iw ge-mamaieg wedi, gi-ish- kwa-bimadisiieg aking. Whatever you shall have sown on the field of God, Christians, that you shall reap there, after your life on earth. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. Ki da-toanen. : :awa Debeniminang od ikitouiin, hishpin wika nondansiv:eg gagikivcviin. You 370 vvould forget the word of the Lord, if you never heard sermons. Nij jaigva teakaiganan o da-dibendanan, nij gaie kiti- ganan o da-aianan aw inini, minikwessig. That man vvould already possess two houses, and would have two fields, (gardens,) if he did not drink. Ki da-wabandan masinaigan, wendamitassiwanin. Thou oughtst to read when thou hast leisure time. Perffct Tense. Nibiwa masinaiganan nin da-gi-gish- pinadonan, kawin dash givetch nin gi-ojoniiamissi. I would have bought many books, but I had not much money. Nisswi masinaiganan ki da-gi-odissigonan, abiiamban. Kimishome o gi-madjidonan. Three letters vvould have come to thee, (thou vvouldst have received three letters,) hadst thou been at home. Thy uncle took them. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Weweni sagiton kid anamievdn, minotan anamie-gagikue- win, mino inabadjiton dash. Like well thy religion, Listen with pleasure to religious sermons, and make a good use of them. Gijigado-masinaigan ojitokan, tchi kikendamang gijiga- don. Please make a calendar, that we may know the days. Kego wika gego gimodiken, ki tudbamig sa aw ge-dibakonik. Never steal anything, because he who will judge thee, sees thee. Nin nagadanan orna anind nind aiiman ; kego auiia o ga- mamossinan. I leave here some of my things; let nobody take them away. Ambe ijada, awi-wabandanda ga-ijiwebak Betldeheming. Let us go, let us see what happened in Bethlehem. 371 Kego babamendansida matchi minawanigosiwin aking, telil wanitossiwang iw kagige minaivanigosiivin gijigong. Let us not čare for sinful pleasures on earth, lest we lose that everlasting joy in heaven. Jingendamog maianadak, sagitoiog odapinamog gaie weni- jishing; kego missawendangegon bekanisid odaiim. Hate what is evil; like and accept what is good ; don’t covet the property of another person. Ishkoteng o gad-apagitanaivan o matchi masinaiganishi- wan. Let thein throw into the fire their bad books. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Jawendagossiwag zcaiabandangig waia- bandameg, nwandangig gaie nwandameg. Happy are those who see what you see, and who hear what you hear. Azcegicen menotansigioen Kije-Manito od ikitowin, kamin geget o sagiassin Kije-Maniton. Whoever does not like to hear the word of God, he does not truly love God. Imperfect Tense. Kazein nin debwetawassig winawa debadodangibanig ejiwebadogwen odenang. I don’t believe those who reported what happened in the village, (or town.) Ki,n zcaidbandamamban nibizca maianadak, kego iw ba- pish kikinozoabandangen. Thou who sawest so many evil things, do not take any example on those things. Perfect Tense. Nin, ga-pisindamdn iw gigitoicin, nin igo nin dibddjim ; debwetawishig. I who have listened to that discourse, I do report; believe me. Kazein bekanisidjig da-gagwedjimassiivag ; igiw sa in- iniwag ga-wabandamogwenag matchi dodamoivin, da- gagwedjimawag. Not others ought to be questioned ; those men who have seenthe ill doing, (as I understood,) ought to be called. 372 Jawendagosiwag ga-wabandansigog, anaivi dash gi-deb- icetamog. Blessed are they that have not seen, and yet have believed. Future Tense. Ge-mino-ganawendang od anamiewin ged-ako-bimadisid, kaginig gijigong ta-debisi. He who shall keep well his religion (be a good Christian) as long as he shall live, shall eternally be happy in heaven. Oto leid inininim kija : Igiw ge-minikwedjig ishkotewabo, A few Ezamples in regard AFFIRMATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Katrin ivin gego o icabandansin, ogioissan o uabandamini. He sees nothing, his son sees it. Katrin winawa o bi-nadissinawan masinaiganan, oshimei- wan sa o bi-nadimmi. They don’t conie for the books, their brothers (sisters) come for them. And so on in ali the tenses SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin ossan 'ivabandamimd ga-iji-anokimd, ta-mintoen- damon. When his father sees how he has worked, he vvill be contented. Kishpin onigiigon wabandamimd minik ga-ojitonid, o ga- minigon gego. When his parents see how much he has done, they will give him something. 373 ge-bonitossigog gaie bishigwadisiwin, kamin wika metoeni ta-anamiassiwag. I teli you beforehand : Those who shall drink ardent liquor, and those who shall not aban- don impurity, will never be good Christians. 'Aioegmen ge-sagitogwen osam od aiiman waiabamadjin ketimagisvhidjin, kamin gaie win ta-jawenimassi. Who- soever shall like too much his things, (be avaricious,) when he sees a poor person, shall not find charity (mercy) himself. to the second third person. NEGATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Win eta o kikendan, kamin ossaieian o kikendansinini. He only knows it; his brother knows it not. Winawa geget o sagilonawa anamieioin, kamin dash. onid- janissiman o sagitossinini. They truiflike religion, but their children don’t like it. derived from the present. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. j • PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin ogin odapinansinig iw maboian, min igo o gad- odapinan. If her mother does not take that blanket, she will take it herself. Kishpin onigiigon gego odapinansinig, anisha ta-gi-ano- Hwan. If his parents take no payment, they shall have worked for nothing. 24 374 PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Mi sa vritan waiabandamm\d]m mojag masinaigan. It is his brother-in-law that is always reading, (looking in the book.) Kaurin urin o dibendansin iw ; omishomissan mi iniw deben- cfaminidjin. He does not ovvn this ; it is his grandfather that owns it. And so in other tenses VII. CONJUGATION. In order to accommodate ali the verbs of the Otchipve language, we must establish tbree more Conjugations, for the unipersonal verbs ; (see page 87.) One of these Con¬ jugations will be^for the unipersonal verbs ending in » v on: el; the two others vvill be for those ending in a eon- sonant. To this VII. Conjugation then belong ali the unipersonal verbs ending in a vowel. This vowel niay be a, e, i, or o. Here are a few verbs belonging to this Conjugation. • Kissina, it is cold, (speaking of the vveather.) Sasagd, it is full of brushes, or undervvood. Jibeia, there are no brushes, no undervvood. Ijinikdde, it is called, (some inanimate object.) Ijitchigdde, it is made, constructed. Dagonigade, it is mixed with . . . Kijdte, it is vvarm, (speaking of the vveather.) Ate, there is of it; it is. 375 PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Mi iniw onidjanissan gego kekendansinigon. This is his child that knows nothing, (or, these are his children that know nothing.) Nibitva win o dibendan aki; widjikiweian dash iniw gego debendansinigon. He owns muoh land ; it is his friend (brother) that owns none. derived from the present. Odjltchisse, it arrives, (speaking of a certain day or time.) Dimi,, it is deep, (a river, etc.) Maslikaivagami, it is strong, (a liquid.) Miskivdgami, it is red, (a liquid.) Makateivagami, it is black, (a liquid.) Dagb, there is, it is. Sogipo, it snows. To this Conjugation also belong ali the verbs which we tali Abundance-verbs, (see p. 87,) which ali end in ka, and dre unipersonal. You will find a few of these verbs on the same page. And some of the in. Numeral verbs, which have only the phiral, ending in wan. Some verbs of this Conjugation have only the third per- son singular, as: Kissina, kijate, sogipo, etc. Others have the third person singular and plural, as : Ijinikade, ijinikadewan ; ate, atčican, etc. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. IND1CATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ijinikade, it is called, Kaurin ssinon, ijinikadevim, they are called, (in. obj.) „ ssinon. 376 IMPERFECT TENSE. Ijinikadeban, it was called, ’ Katrin ssinoban, ijinikadebanin, they were called, „ ssinobanin. Form the remaining tenses of the indicative after these two, as : Gi-ijinikade, . . . Gi-ijinikadeban, . . . Ta- ijinikade,. . ■ Ta-gt-ijinikade, . . . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Kishpin ijinikadeg, if.it is called, ssinog, „ ijinikadeg, if they are called, ssinog. PERFECT TEN^E. , , ( because it has been called, » Gi-ijint a eg, | ] jecause th e y have been called, ) SSU1O S- PLUPERFECT TENSE. T .. 7 j ( had it been called, ) ■ IjmMgiban, J haJ they bce „ called , J ssmogiban. The future tenses are to be formed after the present, as: Ged-ijinikadeg, . . . Ge-gi-ijinikadeg, . . . The two tenses of the conditional mood are to be formed after the present and perfect tenses of the indica¬ tive, as : Da-ijinikade, it would be called, .... Da-gi- ijinikade, it would have been called, . . . IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ta-ijinikade, be it called, let it be called, ta-ijinikadvNan, let them be called, ssinon. ssinon. 377 P ARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Ejinikadeg, called, (which is called,) ssinog, ejinikadegm, called, (which are called,) ssinogin, IMPERFECT TENSE. Ejinikadegiban, which was called, ssinogiban, ejinikade gibanin, which were called, ssinogibanin. Form the remaining tenses of these participles after the above two, as: Ga-ijinikadec/, which has been called, . . . Ga-ijinikadeban, vvhich had been called, . . . Ged-ijini- nadeg, which will be called, etc. VIL DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION. AFF1RMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ijinikadedog, it is perhaps called, ssinodog, ijinikadedogenan, they are perhaps called, ssinodogenan, (inanimate objects,) IMPERFECT TENSE. Ijinikadegoban, it was called, (they say,) ssinogoban, ijinikadegobanin, they were called, (they s.) ssinogobanin. Form the remaining tenses of this mood after the above two, as : Gi-ijinikadedog, . , , Gi-ijinikadegoban, . . . Ged-ijinikadedog, . . . 378 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Gonima ejinikadegwen, whether it is Gonima ssinogwen, called, „ ejinikadegwen, whether they „ ssinogwen. are called, PERFECT TENSE. r whether it has been j Ga-ijinakadegwen, < called, > ssinogwen. ( vvhether they have b. c. ) PLUPERFECT TENSE. ( if it had been called, t Ijinikadegobanen, < if they had been > ssinogobanen, ( called, J Form the future tenses after the jiresent, as: Ged-ijini- kadegwen, etc. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Eji.nikadegwen, which is probably called, ssinogvven, ejinikadegvtenan, which are probab. called, ssinogwenan, IMPERFECT TENSE. Ejinikadegobanen, which was probably ssinogobanen, called, ejinikadegobanenan, which were pro. c., ssinogobanenan. Form the other two tenses of these dubitative participles after the above two. 379 EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE VII. CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Adopotvin ijinikade ow; onow dash apabvtvinan ijinikadewan. This is called a table; and these are called chairs, (or benches.) Kitchi sogipo nongom, kaivin dash anaivi Jcissinassinon. It snows much to-day, but it is not very cold. Nopiming atedog ki wagakwad; ki makisinan dash ka- -ivin wedi atessinodogenan. I think thy axe is in the vvoods; but thy shoes, I think, are not there. Imperfect Tense. Orna ateban jeba nin masinaigan, nij gaie nin mokomanan oma atebanin ; amgtcen ga-bi-ma- mogtoen. My book was here this morning, and my two knives also were here; 1 don’t know who came and took them. Awdss nibinong kawin sasagassino^an oma; nongom dash apitchi sasaga misitce. The summer before last there was no underwood here; but now there is very much undervvood everywhere. Perfect Tense. Gi-kitchi-kijatepitchinago gi-bimosseidng; kamin dash aivassonago gi-kijdtessinon. It has been very wann yesterday, when we walked; but it has not been warm the day before yesterday. jPangi eta oma gi-sogipo; nibiioa dash wadjiwing gi- sogipodog. It has snowed here only a little ; but on the mountains, I suppose, it has snowed much. Pluperfect Tense. Gi-apitchi-dteban kid ishkotemiwa . bwa bi-madjaidn. Your lire had been quite out, before J started to come here. Kawin gwetch gi-sogipossinoban bibonvng biva Nibd- anamiegijigak. Last winter it had not much snowed before Christmas-day. 380 Future Tense. Wa'iba ow vmkaigan ta-bigobidjigade, bekanak dash namatch metchag ta-ojitchigade. This house will soon be taken down, and another one larger than this will be constructed. Kamin ta-webinigadessinon ow magakmad, ta-nanaitchi- gade dash, ginmenj dash keiabi ta-onijisliin. This ase will not be thrown away, but it will be repaired, and will be useful yet a long time. Pindigadoiog nibima missan; ta-kissinadog tibikad; (ta-kissintibikad.) Bring in much wood; I think it will be cold to-night. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Kamin tvemeni anokissim, kishpin osam kijateg ; kamin gaie mino bimossessim, kishpin sogipog ledbe-gijig. One does not work well when it is too warm; and one does not travel well when it is snovving ali day. Kishpin pangi eta bodaivadeg kijapikisiganing, pabige kitchi kijide oma pindig. When a little fire only is made in the stove, it is immediately very warm in this room. Endogmen degonigadessinogmen ishkotemabo oma mish- iminabong. I don’t know vvhether there is no ardent liquor mixed with this cider. Pekfect Tense. Anamikodading gi-odjitchisseg, mi api ga-wabamag islikmatch. When New Year’s day was arrived, (on New Year’s day,) I have seen hira the last time. *Gi-sanagad ganabatch minissing bibonong, midjim gmetch gi-atessinogwen. It has probably been distressing on the island last winter, because there have not been many provisions there, I think. See Note, p. 97. 381 Osam, gi-kissinag kabe-gijig, mi ba-ondji-ijassigmen. He did probably not come, because it has been so cold ali day. Pluperfect Tense. Gtoaiak ganaivendjigadegiban ki kitiganima, kamin pijikimag da-gi-pindigessiwag. Had your field been well guarded, (taken čare of,) cattle vvould not have come in. Weweni ijibiigadessinogiban ki masinaigan, kamin niti da-gi-nissitaminansin. Had thy letter not been written vvell, (distinctly,) I would not have been able to read it. Futuke Tense. Aninimapi ged-odjitchisseg Paki—Mi api ged-ishkwa-sogipogwen. When vvill Easter be, (ar- rive ?)—I suppose it vvill cease snovving at that time. Aninimapi ged-ishkwa-ateg maianadak orna aking ?—• Gi-ishkwa-akiwang sa. When shall no more evil be on earth ?—When earth shall be no more. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. Akositvin, nibomin gaie kamin da-atessi- non, kishpin batadomin atessinog. There would be no sickness and no death, if there be no sin. Da-kitchi-kijate nongom, kishpin nodinsinog.—Da-giji- gate nongom tibikak, kishpin mijakmak, (mijakmanitibi- kak.} It vvould be very warm to-day if there be no vvind. —It vvould be light this night, if there be clear vveather. Perfect Tense. Memija onom makaiganan da-gi-sakide- man, kakina da-gi-tchagidewan, orna aiassimamban. These houses vvould have caught fire long ago, and vvould have ali burnt dovvn, had I not been here. Kamin mashkossiman da-gi-debissessinon kabe-bibon, bejig pijiki nissassimindiban. Hay vvould not have been sufficient ali vvinter, had one of the oxen not been killed. 382 Nibitoa mino dodamouinan jdigwa da-gi-wabandjiga- dewa.it orna odenang, nond nibossigoban aw inini ga- mino-gagikimad oma enamianidjin. Many good vvorks would have been seen here in the village, were that man not dead so soon, who exhorted so well these Christians. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Wewib ta—bosidjigadewan nind aiiman,ninwi-madja. Let my things be shipped iuimediately, 1’11 go away. Kego ta-bodawadessinon, kawin sa kissinassinon, abaira jaigwa. Let no lire be made, it is not cold, the weather is already mild. PARTICIPLES. Present Tense. Minile ejibiigadeg Kije-Manito o ma- sinaiganing, apitchi debiveurinagad. Ali that is written in the Bible, (in God’s book,) is parfectly true. Kakina aking eteg kawin nin babamendansin, mekuend- amanin minik gijigong endagog.* For ali that is on earth I don’t čare, as soon (or, as often) as I remember what is in heaven. Ijiperfect Tense. ~Wegonen iw mdagogobanen kitchi kitiganing, ga-daji-bimadisiwad nitam dnishinabeg ? What is that that was (or, what was) in the great garden, (Paradise,) where the iirst men lived ? Pitchinago kakina nind aiiman misiwe etegibanin nin gi-mawandjitonan ; nongom weweni nin wi-ganawenda- nan. Yesterday I gathered ali my things together, that vvere scattered about; I will now well take čare of them. Perfect Tense. Mi mandan masinaigan ga.-apitclii-srm- gitrJiigadeg; kawin aiciia o ga-bigobidossin. This is * See Remark 1, p. 130. 383 the document which has been so much strengthened ; nobody shall break it, (make it void.) Nin bidon kakina ga-ishhvasseg gi-ojitoian ki babisi- kamagan. I bring ali that has remained when I have been making thy coat. . Pluperfect Tense. Iw assini-ajogan menija namatch ga- ojitchigadegobanen, kamin mashi nin mabandansin. That slone bridge which had been constructed (built) a considerable time ago, I have not seen it yet. Nongom pitchinag nin nondamin im menijishi.ng ikitomin, mika mashi ga-wawindjigadessinogiban oma. Now only we hear that excellent word, (doctrine,) which never had been announced here before. Future Tense. Anin iw minik ge~debisseg ?~Namandj minik ge-debissegwen. How much will be enough ?—I don’t know how much shall be enough. Minik nongom metchi~dodameg gimodj, mi im kakina ge-kikendjigadeg dibakonige-gijigak. Ali that you are doing riovv wrong, secretly, that vvill ali be known on the day of judgment. Some Exampl.es in regard to the second. third person, er- pressed by an inanimate object. Wawiiatan ijinikadeni odena endanisid; kamin bakan ijinikadessinini. The city where he lives, is called De¬ troit, it is not called otherwise. Gagikmc-masinaiganan ijinikadeniwan o masinaiganan. kamin bakan ijinikadessmm.Ywim. His books are called sermon-books, they are not called othenvise. Kishpin bakan ijinikademg ow od aiim; kishpin gaie onom od aiiman bakan ijinikademg, (or, i/znitarfenigiban,) ki da-windamon. If this his property (his thing,) be called otherwise; and if these his things be called otherwise, I would teli thee. 384 Kishpin bakan ijinikadessinmig ow od aiim, kishpin gaie onow od aiiman bakan ijinikadessminig, ki gi-debice. If this his thing be not called othervrise, and if these his things be not called othenvise, thou hast told the truth. VIII. CONJUGATION. To'this Conjugation belong ali the unipersonal verbs ending in ad, as : Sanagdd, it is difficult, hard, disagreeable; dear, high in priče. Wenipanad, it is easy ; cheap. Manadad, it is bad, wrong, malicious. Mlndokad, there is dew on the ground. Anakwad, it is cloudy. Mijaktoad, the weather is fair, clear, no clouds. Ete. etc. Note. The verbs of the preceding Conjugation become often verbs of this VIII. Conjugation, by taking the termi- nation magad, which does not alter at ali their significa- tion, as : Kijate, it is warm weather ; Kissina, it is cold weather ; Sogipo, it snows ; Mitcha, it is big, large ; Agassa, it is small, narrow ; kijatemagad, kissinamagad, sbgipomagad, mitchamagad, agdssamagad. To this Conjugation also belong the personifying verbs of the second kind, (see p. 85,) which are formed by add- ing magad to the third person singular, present, indicative, 385 of verbs belonging to the I. II. and III. Conjugations. (See Examples of these verbs on the same page.) Note. Some verbs of this Conjugation have only the third person singular ; others have the plural also. Here is the paradigm of a verb of the VIII. Conjugation. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Sanagad, it is difficult ; dear, Kawin ssinon, sanagadon, they are dear, (inan. obj.) „ ssinon, IMPERFECT TENSE. Sanagadoban, it was difficult; dear, Kamin ssinoban, sanagadobanin, they were dear ; diff. ,, ssinobanin. The remaining tenses of the indicative mood are formed after the above tvvo, as : Gi-sanagad,. . . Gi-sanagado- ban', . . . Ta-sanagad,. . . Ete. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PEESFNT TENSE. Sanagak, because it is (they are) diff. . . ssinog. PERFECT TENSE. Gi-sanagak, because it has been (they have ssinog. been) diff. . . PLUPERFECT TENSE. * iStoiagakiijan, f [ laf ] .', t ’ >e ? n ’ ssinogiban. 6 ’ ( had they been dear, ... ° 386 The future tenses are formed after the present: as : Gc- sanagak, . .. etc. Form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the present and perfect of the indicative, prefixing da-, to the verb. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ta-sanagad, be it diff.; dear, Kego ssinon, ta-sanagadon, let them be dear, “ ssinon. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT TENSE. Senagah, something difficult; dear, ssinog, •sS«nfflgadiniwan aio atawewinini od aiiman. O toaboianan kamin gwetch sanag«ssininiwan. The goods (or things) of this trader are dear. His blankets are not very dear. Missama sanagadinig od alcosiicin, weweni od odapinan. Although his sickness be difficult, (painful,) he accepts it well, (he takes it with resignation.) Kishpin osam sanagadinig od anokinrinan, ka.nrin kakina o ga-gijitossinan. If his works are too difficult, he will not do them ali. Kishpin sanagassininig bimosseioin, wabang ta-dagicishin. If walking is not difficult, he will arrive to-morrow. Kishpin s«n See Remar\i at the end of this paradigm. 403 win ge-digid, (gc-did,) he (she, it) who . . . iio ge-ing, it that shall be, (in. obj.) Nin ge-dissiwan, I who shall not be, do, kin ge-dissitvan, thou who, etc. . . Ete., after the above present tense. Ilere are some of the most common cases of Change in this defective verb. PRESENT TENSE. Mi endiidn, it is thus I am, I do, I bebave, mi endiian, it is thus thou art, thou art so, mi endid, mi eng, it is thus it is, it is so, mi endiidng, (ninatoind,) ) mi endiiang, (kinawind,) $ mi endiieg, mi endouiad, if is thus they are, they do so, etc., Endiidnin* when I amso, when I do so, etc., endiianin, when thou art so, etc., endidjin, endiidngon, (endiiangon,) endiiegon, endoivadjin, PERFECT TENSE. Mi ga- diidn, it is thus I have done, I have been, etc., mi ga-diian, mi ga-did, (ga-digid,) mi ga-ing, , it was thus it happened, ithasbeen so, etc., mi ga-diidng, mi ga-diiang, mi ga-dowad, so they have been, done, etc., See Remark at the ertd of this paradigm. 404 Future tense. Mi ge-diian, it is thus I shall be, so I will do, mi ge-diian, mi ge-digid, (gc-did,) mi ge-ing, it is thus it shall happen, it will be so, or, be it so, (in the imper. mcod,) (ainsi soit-il.) Remark. The prefix en in endiidn, endiian, etc., is only an effect of the Change-, (see p. 130.) It is ornitted in compositions: as: Ga-diian, ge-diidn; nin baiatdrdiian, I a sinner ; baiatd-digid, a sinner ; baiata-didjig, sinners, etc. The end-sy]lab]e in, in endiianin, etc., is likevvise an effect of the Change, in another čase ; (see pages 139. and 140.) Here are some specimens of the Dubitative of this defec- tive verb. Endowdnen, I don’t know how I am, how T do, etc., endowanen, endogieen, endowangen, I endoteangen, ) endowegwen, endoicagiven, Endogobanen, endowagobanen, ‘ how thou art, etc., ‘ how he (she, it) does, etc., ‘ how vre are, do, behave, etc., 1 how you are, do,. . . ‘ how they are, behave, etc; how he (she, it)was, did, how they did, were, etc., Ga-dmvdnen, how I have been, how T h. done, ga-dmoanen, how thou hast been, etc., ga-dogwen, how he, . . . ga-inogwen, how it has been, (in. obj.) ga-dowdngen, how we have been, etc. 1 Etc. . . Ge-dowanen, how I shall bo, how T will do, etc., ged-inogwen, how it shall be, how it will happen, ge-dmvdngen, how we shall be, how vre will do, behave, etc. Etc. 405 Afew Examples on the Defective Verbs. Wabang nin wi-maclja, kitchi gimoenj dash nin gad-inend, iwd. Ile says ; I will depart (start) to-morrow, and will be absent very long. Ki gi-wabama na ? nind ano gagmedjima.—Kamin ki wi- ■mlndamossinon. ima dash. I ask him indeed: Hast thou seen him 1 but he says : I will not teli thee. Nin ga-gosimin mabang ; imibanig pitchinago. They said yesterday : We will move to-morrow. Megonen ga-ikilod amishtoia ?—Nin gad-ojiton magakzoad; gi-iwa sa. What has the blacksmith said ?—Me has said : I will make the axe. Egatchingin nind indimin, mojag bata-diidng. We be¬ bave shamefully, because we are sinning ahvays. Kamin gwaiak nind indissimin ; nin pagwanawadisimin. We do not. act right, (not behave well,) we live in dark- ness, (in uncertainty.) Wejimongin ani-ino matchi minawanigosiwin. Sinful pleasure is like a thing that flies away. Esluvamanissongin ino aw inini. kamin gmaiak dissi. He is like a man that is afraid ; he is not vvell. Kinama baiata-diicg, aidndj kid indiju nishkiiicg; ki gad-animisim anmenindisossimeg. Ye sinners, you always behave so as to offend me; you will suffer if you do not repent. Delfedimiian-, bi-widokawishin tchi mino dlidn. Lord, help me, (assist me,) that I may behave well. Wanendamawishin ga-bi-diidn; kazein minazoa nin ga-ioi- dissi. Forget what I have done ; I . will not do so any more. Debenimiiang, ividokamishinam ningot endiiangin; ango- tamawishinam gaie ga-bi-aindiiang, (ga-bi-diidng.) Lord, assist us when anything happens us ; and take from us what we have done, (committed,) (our sins.)- 26 406 Enenimiwanen mi ge-diian.—Eji-minwendaman, mi kagi- . nig ge-wi-diidng. Whatever is thy will in regard to me, so I will do.—We will always behave according to thy pleasure. Endiiang nongom, mi endowagobanen gaiat ga-bimadisigo- banenag aking. As we are now, so were probably those • who had lived on earth in olden times. Debenimiian, ganaivenimishin minik ge-dowanm. Lord, take čare of me, whatevermay happentome, (hovvever I may be.) Aianjenimian, anin dasli iwged-inogwen 1 Angel, how will that be ? Debenimiiang, kaginig dibendan ge-dowdngen, minik gaie ge-kitimagisiivdngen. Lord, always govern, (be master of,) vvhatever we shall be, and whatever misery (poverty,) shall befall us. Anin endiian nongom 1 Endiian sa nind ind. How dost thou do to-day 1 I do as I do. FORMATION OF VERBS. There are several kinds or modifications of verbs in the Otchipwe language, which are formed from principal verbs,* or from substantives, to express different circumstances, vvhich use to be expressed in other languages by the com- bination of two or more parts of speech. We will exhibit bere these kinds of verbs, and give the rules for their formation, in as much as Rules ,can be indi- cated for that. I. Recjprocal Verbs. They show a reaction of the subject on itself. They ali end in as or dis, at the first person singular, indicative, * We call principal verbs ? the transitive-proper, and the intransitive- proper verbs. 407 present; and at the third person in o, belong to the L Con- jugation. Here are the Rules for their formation. Rule 1. Transitive verbs ending in awa, change their last syllable wa into s, in order to form reciprocal verbs. Examples. Nin habdmitawa, I obey him ; nin babamitas, I obey my- self. Nin nondawa, I hear him ; nin nondas, I hear myself. Nin kikinoamcma, I teach him; nin kikinoamas, I t. mys. Nin pisindatoa, I listen to him ; nin pisindas, I 1. to mys. Nind anokitaua, I work for h.; nind anokitas, I w. for m. Rule 2. Transitive verbs ending in aa, ea, ia, oa, or d vvith a consonant before it, (excepting m and w,) change the final a into idis. Examples. Nin minaa, I give him to drink ; nin minaidis, I give to drink to myself. Nin tvabandaa, I show it to him ; nin wabandaidis, I show it to myself. Nin bakadea, I make him starve; nin bakadeidis, I make myself starve. Nin gagibishea, I make him deaf; nin gagibisheidis, I make myself deaf. Nin sdgia, I love him; nin sagiidis, I love myself. Nin bdpia, I laugh at him; nin bapiidis, I 1. at myself. Nin nodjimoa, 1 save or cure h.; nin nodjimoidis, I c. my. Nin mba, I make him weep ; nin moidis, I make mys. vv. Nin nissa, I kili him ; nin nissidis, I kili myself. Nin ganona, I speak to him ; nin ganonidis, I s. to mys. Rule 3. Transitive verbs ending in owa, change their last syllable wa into dis. 408 Examples. Nin pakiteoiva, I strike him; nin pakitcodis, I s. myself. Nin bashanjemoa, I whip him; nin bashanjeodis, I w. mys. Nind agivanaoma, I cover him ; nind agtoanaodis, I c. m. Nin bashibaowa, I štab him ; nin bashibaodis, I s. myself. Rule 4. Transitive verbs ending in na, change this sylla- ble into ndis. Exampi.es. Nin loabama, I see him; nin toabandis, I see myself. Nin kikenima, I know him; nin kikenindis, I know mys. Ninjaioenima, I have mercy on him ; niti janienindis, I have mercy on myself. Nin kitimdgenima, I pity him; nin kitimogenindis, I p. m. Nind dnivenima, I reprimand him ; nind anwenindis, I r. m. II. COMMUNICATIVE VERBS. These verbs show a mutual action of two or more sub- jects upon each other. They have only the plural number, and they ali end in dimin, at the first person plural, indica- tive, present. (To the I. Conj.) They are formed after the reciprocal verbs, according to the following Rules. Rule 1. The reciprocal verbs ending in as, change this as into adimin, in order to make communicative verbs. Examples. Nin nondas, I hear myself; nin nondadimin, we hear each other. Nin nissitotas, I understand mys.; nin nissitotadimin, we understand each other. Nin mino dodaš, I do good to myself; nin mino dodadimin, we do good to each other. Nin pisindas, I listen to myself; nin pisindadimin, we listen to each other. 409 Nind anokitas, I work for myself ; nind anokitadimin, we work for each other. Rule 2. The reciprocal verbs ending in dis, change this svllable into dimin. Examples. Nin bamiidis, I take čare of myself; nin bamiidimin, we take čare of each other. Nin nishkiidis, I make myself angry ; nin nishkiidimin , we make each other angry. Nin gashkiidis, 1 prevail upon myself; nin gashkiidimin, we prevail upon each other. Nin pakiteodis, I strike myself; nin pakiteodimin, we st. each other. Nin jingenindis, I hate myself; nin jingenindimin, we hate each other. Nin gagikindis, I recommend to myself ; nin gagikindi- min, we recommend to each other. Nin ganawcnindis, I take čare of myself; nin ganawenin- dimin, we take čare of each other. Note. The personal pronoun ki is to be employed instead of nin in the communicative verbs in the first person, when the person spoken to is induded. (See Rem. 3, p. 45.) III. Peksonifving Verbs. They serve to represent an inanimate thing as doing actions of an animate being. There are two kinds of these verbs ; the one ending in on, and the other in magad, I have already spoken of the formation of these verbs, and I have here only to refer you for the formation of those of the jirst kind to page 362; and of the second kind to page 85. 410 IV. Reproaching Verbs. A reproaching verb is used in order to signify that its subject bas a habit or quality, which is a reproacli to him. They are ali derived from intransitive verbs of the I. Con- jugation, and they also ali belong to this Conjugation, be- cause they ali end in i at the characteristical third person. The only Rule for their formation is this : Take the verb you want to transform into a reproaching verb, in the third person singular, indičative, present, affirmative form, and add slik to this person, and you have the reproaching verb. Examples. Nin niba, I sleep ; 3 pers. niba; nin nibashk, I sleep too much. Nin minikwe, I drink ; 3 pers. minikwe ; nin minikweshk, I drink too much ; I am a drunkard. Nin masinaige, I make debts ; 3 p. masinaige; nin masi- naigeshk, I make always debts. Nin maw, I weep, cry ; 3 p. maivi; nin maioishk, I cry too much or too often. Nin nim, I dance; 3 p. nimi; nin nimishk, I dance too often, too much. Nin migaš, I fight; 3 p. migaso; nin migasoshk, I am in a habit of fighting. V. Substantive Verbs proper. This kind of verbs is derived from substantives. They end in i at the third person. (I. Conj.) In regard to the formation of these verbs, two Rules are to be observed, viz : Rule 1. To a substantive animate or inanimate, endingin a vowel, only a w is added, to form a verb. Examples. Inini, man ; nind ininiw, I am a man. Ikwe, woman ; nind ikwew, I am a woman. 411 Ogima, chief; nind ogimaiv, I am a chief. Aki, earth; nind alciw, I am earth. Šibi, river ; nin sibiio, I am a river. Ezception. To a substantive ending in a vowel that has the nasal sound after it, (a, e, ?, 6,*) you have to add the syllable iw, to form a verb. Examples. Akiwesi, an old man : nind akiwesliw, I am an old man. Mindimole, an old tvoman; nin mindimoieiio, I am an old vvoman. Abinodji, a child ; nind abinodjliu, I am a child. Gigo, a fish ; nin gigoiiv, I am a fish. Rule 2. To a substantive, animate or inanimate, ending in a consonant, the syllable iw is added, to make a verb of it. Only those substantives ending in a consonant, whose mutative vowel is o,t (which make their plural in og, and some in wag,) take the syllable ow, to become verbs. Examples. Wabigan, clay; Jiwitagan, salt; Assin, a stone; • Pakwejigan, bread; Jishibens, a little duck ; nin icabiganiio, I am clay. ninjiwitagdniw, I am salt; nind assiniio, I am a stone. ninpakwejigamw, I am bread. nin jishibensitc, I am a little duck. Jaganash, an Englishman; nin Jaganashiic, I am an Eng- lishman. Gisiss, the sun ; Mitig, a tree; Arnik, a beaver; Bitvabik, iron; nin gisissow, I am the sun. nin mitigow, I am a tree. nind amikow, I am a beaver. nin biwabikow, I am iron. * See p. 10, No. 3. f See page 85, 412 Note. There is yet another kind of substantive-verbs in this language. They are unipersonal and belong to the IX. Conjugation. They are derived from inanimate sub- stantives ending in ivin; and their formation consists in adding iwan to the end-syllable win. Examples. Minawanigosiwin, joy ; Kashkendamovin, sorrow; Bapitvin, laughter ; Mawiwin, vveeping ; Bakadewin, starvation ; minawanigositeiniwan ) there isjoy. kaslikendamowiniwan, there is sorrovv. bapiwiniioan, there is laugh. mawiwinuvan, there is w. bakadeinniwan, there is st. VI. Abundance-Vekbs. These verbs are also substantive-verbs, being formed from substantives. But as they signify at the same time abundance of what they express, they justly form a distinct class of verbs, called as above. They are unipersonal verbs, belonging to the VII. Conjugation. There are two Rules for their formation, somevvhat rela- ting to those of the preceding number. Rule 1. To form an abundance-verb, add the syllable ka to a substantive ending in a vowel, may it be animate or inanimate. Examples. Anishinabe, Indian ; anishinabeka, there is plenty of Indians. Sagime, moscheto ; sagimeka, there is plenty of mos. Nibi, vvater ; nibika, there is much water. Animiki, thunder; animikika, there is a thunder- storm. Name, a sturgeon; namtka, there is abundance of s. 413 Ezception. Substantives ending in a vowel which has the nasal sound, take ika, to become abundance-verbs. Examples. Gigo, fish; gigoika, there is plenty of fish. Abinodji, a child ; abinodjiika, there is abundance of children. Assabikeshl, a spider; assabikeshiika, there is abundance of spiders. Mishike, a turtle ; mishikcika, there is plenty of tur. Rule 2. Substantives, animate or inanimate, ending in a consonant, require the addition of ika or oka, to be transformed into verbs of this class. (The mutative vowel o requires oka.) Examples. Mikwdm, ice ; Gon, snow; Ashislik, dirt, (on the road, etc.) Namegoss, trout; Miskioimin, a raspberry ; Anang, a star; Mitig, a tree; IVdbos, a rabbit; mikiodmika, there is much ice. gonika, there is much snow. ashishkika, there is much dirt, mud. namegossika, there is abundance of trout. miskioiminika, there is plenty of raspberries. anangoka, there are many stars. mitigoka, there is abundance of trees. mabosoka, there are many rab. VIL Possessive Vf.rbs. These verbs indicate possession or property, in a very peculiar manner. They are substantive-verbs, being de- rived from substantives, animate or inanimata, by prefix- ing o or od, and the personal pronoun nin or nind in the first person, etc.; and they belong to the I. Conjugation, 414 being intransitive verbs, ending in a vowe'l at the charac- teristical third person ; that is, in i or o. (This o refers to the mutative o.) Those that terminate in a consonant at the first person singular, indicative, preš., do ordinarily not take the pos¬ sessive terminations. (See page 53.) Some may take them occasionally. But those that end in a vowel at the said person, take the possessive terminations. These ali end in i at the characteristical third person. Note. These end in o nind owdgakwad, I have an axe. nind omakah, I have a box. nind odakik, I have a kettle. nind omitig, I have a tree or wood. Joniia, silver, money ; Pijiki, a cow ; Opin, a potatoe; Aki, earth, land; Ishkote, fire ; Note. These have the possessive terminations, ending in i at the third person, ojoniiami, opijikimi, ... Examples. nind otchlman, I have a canoe. nind omokoman, T have a knife. nind ododaban, I have a sledge. at the third person, owagakwado,. ■ nind ojoniiam, I have money. nind opijikim, I have a cow. nind odopinim, I have potatoes. nind odakim, I have land. nind odishkotem, I have fire. Tchiman, canoe ; Mokoman, a knife; Odaban, a sledge; Noss, (n-oss,) my father; nind ooss, I have a father. Ningwiss, (nin-gwiss,) nind oguiss, I have a son. my son; Note. These end in i at the third person, otchimani, etc. Wagakwad, an axe; Makak, a box ; Akik, a kettle ; Mitig, tree or wood ; 415 VIII. WoRKING VERBS. The verbs of this class signify the doing of a work; and so I think tbey are proper]y called, working verbs. They are substantive-verbs, ali being derived frotn substantives, animate or inanimate, and follow the same Rules in their formation, as the abundance-verbs ofNo VI. These verbs belong ali to the I. Conj. To make a working verb out of a substantive, you have to prefix to it nin or nind, and to add ke, ike, or oke, ac- cording to the same Rules, as you added ka, ika or oka, in No. VI. Examples. Mikana, path, road ; nin mikanake, I make a road. Ishkote, fire ; nind ishkoteke, I make lire. Akakanje, charcoal; nind akakanjeke, I burn coal. Joniia, silver ; nin joniiake, I work silver. Mashkikiwabo, medicine ; nin mashkikiioaboke, I prepare medicine. Ishkwandem, a door ; nind ishkwdndemike, I make a door. Mitchikandkobidjigan, fence; nin mitchikanakobidjigan- ike, I am making a fence. Tchiman, a canoe ; nin tchimanike, I am making a canoe. Gigo, fish ; nin gigolke, I am storing up fish. Sisibakioad, sugar ; nin sisibakivadoke, I am making sugar. Makak, box, barrel; nin makakoke, I make barrels. Biwdbik, iron, metal; nin biwabikoke, I make metal, I work in a mine. IX. Feigning Verbs. These verbs are used to designate/ezgnirng or dissimula- tion. A verb of this kind represents its subject doing something for show only, or by dissimulation. They ali terminate in kas, at the first person singular, indicative, present; and in o at the characteristical third person ; and 416 consequently belong to the I. Conjugation. Some of them are derived from other verbs, and some from -substantives. Those derived from substantives, follovv in their forma- tion exactly the Rules established in No. VI. Ali you have additionally to do is, to add s to an abundance-verb, and to prepose nin (nind,) and you have a feigning verb, as: Anishinabeka; feigning verb, nind dnishinabekas, I play or act the Indian, I feign to be an Indian. Abinodjii.ka; feigning verb, nind abinodjiikas, I play the child. Wabo- soka; feigning verb, nin ivabosokas, I feign to be a rabbit, (in fables.) Those feigning verbs that are derived from verbs, add the syllable kas to the characteristical third person of the verbs from which they are formed. Examples. Nin niba, I sleep ; 3 person, niha ; nin nibakas, I feign to sleep. Nin gagibishe, I am deaf; 3 p. gagibishe; nin gagibishe- kas, I dissemble to be deaf. Nind akos, I am sick; 3 p. akosi; nind akosikas, I feign to be sick. Nin nib, 1 die; 3 p. nibo; nin nibokas, I feign to die. X. Causing Vekbs. These verbs are called so, because they indicate that the subject of such a verb causes some animate object to be in a certain circumstance, or to do something. They are ali animate verbs, belonging to the IV. Conjugation. They are obtained from the characteristical third person of in- transitive verbs, by adding a, ia, or oa; according to the follovring Rules. Rule I. When the characteristical third person ends in a vouel, the letter a only is added, to form a causing verb. 417 Examples. Nind abitchiba, T rise from the dead ; 3 person, abitchiba; nind abitchibaa, I raise him from the dead. Nin manisse, I chop ; 3 p. manisse; nin manissea, I make him chop wood. Nin toidige, I am married; 3 p. widige; nin uidigea, I make him be married. Nind anoki, I work ; 3 p. anoki: nind anokia, I make him work. Nin wab, I see, 3 p. wabi; nin uabia, I make him see. Nind ogimaw, I am a chief; 3 p. ogimaioi: nind ogimaioia, I make him a chief. Nin jdbos, I purge myself; 3 p.jaboso; nin jabosoa, I cause him to take a purge. Rule 2. When the characteristical third person ends in a consonant, the syllable ia or oa is added to make a causing verb. (The syllable oa refers to the mutative vowel o.) Esamples. Nin kashkcndam, I am sad; 3 person, kashkcndam; nin kashkendamia, I make him sad. Nin mashkmccndam, I am firmly resolved ; 3 person mash- kaicendam; nin mashkaioendamia, I cause him to be firmly resolved. Nin dodam, T do it; 3 p. dodam; nin dodamoa, I make him do it. Nin tiodshin, I break through the ice ; 3 p. tnashin ; nin twashinoa, T cause him to break through the ice. Note 1. Ali the verbs of the II. and III. Conjugations, when transformed into causing verbs, ought to end in oa, because their mutative vowel is o. But usage seems to require to add ia to those that are composed of inendam, (he thinks,) as the first tvvo of these Examples, and many others. 418 Note 2. It must be observed here, that not ali the verbs of the first three (or otber) Conjugations use to be trans- formed into causing verbs; and some have their own way of becoming verbs of this kind, aš : Niba, he sleeps; nin nibea, I cause him to sleep. Kitimagisi, he is poor: nin kitimagia, I make him poor. Widigendiwag, they are married together ; nin widigendaag, I marry them together. O icabandan, he sees it ; nin vabandaa, I cause him to see it, I show it to him. O kikendan, he knows it; nin kikend- amona, I cause him to know it, I make it known to him, etc., etc. These are verbs by themselves. XI. Frequentative Verbs. This kind of verbs is used to indicate a repetition or reit- eration of the action expressed by the verb. The contri- vance which makes common verbs become frequentative, is, ,to double the first syllable of the verb. Examples. Nin pakiteowa, I strike him; nin papakiteoioa, I strike him repeatedly. Nin tangishkavM, I kick him ; nin tatdngishkava, I kick him several times. Nin bashanjeoioa, I whip him ; nin babashanjeowa, I whip him repeatedly. Nin bapinodama, I mock or scoff him ; nin babapinodavia, I continue to scoff him. Nin ganona, I speak to him ■ nin gaganona, I converse with him a certain Jength of time. Etc. . . etc. . . . But somtimes, especially when the first syllable of the common verb has the vowel i, this i is changed in a in the first syllable of the frequentative verb. Examples. Nin gigit, I speak (a short time;) nin gdgigit,! speak long, much. 419 Nin pindige, I come in ; nin p&pindige, I c. often in. Nin nibato, I stand ; nin ndnibato, I s. here and there. Nin migitoe, I give ; nin mdmigiu-e, I give often, or to sev- eral persons. Nin mina, I give him ; nin maminag, I g. to several persons. XII.’ Pitving Verbs. We will exhibit here some of them ; English phrases which express their Subj, mood.pres. debimasluin. bakadeshan. gagibisheshan. akosislian. ijiuiesishan. 3. pers. debimashi; bakadeshi; gagibisheshi; akosishi; ijiwebisishi ; This modification of verbs is used to manifest pity, vyhich the subject of these verbs has on himself, or on others. In English it requires a vvhole phrase to express the mean- ing of such a verb. and belovv are the meaning. Pit. v. 1. pcrs. Nin debimash; * Nin bakadesh ; t Nin gagibishesh ; J Nind akosish; || Nind ijibesish; § * It is but too true what they say of me. + 1 am worth pity, being so hungry. J I am worth pity, being deaf. || I am worth compassion, being sick. § I am miserable, being so. Debimashinadog; I think, what they say of that poor fellow, is but too true. (Thirteen words for one.) Piemark 1. Many active verbs ending in amawa, indi- cate by this termination something belonging to the object of the verb, or relating and alluding to it. This modifica¬ tion of verbs is much used in the Otchipwe language, and is expressive. Some Examfi.es. Nin wabandamawa od inanokiwin; I see his work. Nin gi-wabandamawa od ojibiigan; I have seen his Wri- ting. 420 Nin jingendamawa o batadmoin; I hate his sin. Nin jingendamawa o gaginawishkiwin; I hate his habit of tying. Nin kikendamatva od ijiwebisiwin ; I know his conduct. Nin wi-kikendamawa o dodamowin; I want to know his do- ings. Nin gi-nondamawa o matchi gijwewin ; I heard his bad speaking. Nin wi-nondamawa u -migamo w in ; I want to hear his sing- ing. Nin gi-ojitamawa babisikauagan, I have made his coat. {N'md, ojiton.) Nin nitamaica gego, I kili something for him. (Ninnilon.) Nin bositamaica nibdgan, I embark a bed for him. (Nin bositon.) Ete. . . etc. . . . You could, indeed, say : Nin icabandan od inanokivrin ; nin jingendan o gaginawishkiwin; nin kikendan od ijiice- bisiivin; nin nondan o matchi gijwewin; etc. . . This would be understood by Indians, but it is not genuine Ot- chipwe. You see by these Examples, that the last syllable of the verb, (which always is a verb of the VI. Conj.,) from which a verb of this diseription is formed, is changed into amawa, (vrhich makes it become a verb of the IV. Conj.) But in some verbs ending in on, this last syllable is not changed in amawa, but-in awa : as : Nin madjidon, I carry it away ; nin madjidawa, I carry it to him. Nin bidon, I bring it; nin bidawa, I bring it to him. Nind aton, I put it; nind atawa, I p. it to him, or for him. Nin kadon, I hide it; nin kadawa, I conceal it to him. Nin sagiton, 1 like (keep) it; nin sagitawa, I don’t give it to him. Etc. . . etc. . . . 421 It is evident that the verbs ending in an, change invaria- bly this syllable in amawa, to become verbs of this desCrip- tion. But for those ending in on, I can discover no Rule which could show us those that change this on in imava, and those that change it in awa. Try to get the right use of this kind of verbs, by an at- tentive observation of correct speakers of this language. Remark 2. Let me now say a word of contracted verbs. The Otchipwe language is full of them. There are no fixed Rules for this contraction; usage contracted or abbreviated them, and established them in the language. Nor is it the business of the Grammar, to give a detailed account of them ; this is the duty of the Dictionary. I will here only give you a few specimens of contracted verbs, and at the same time a hint, to be attentive and diligent in the anal- yzing of compound and contracted verbs and other parts of speech. Here are a few specimens. Nin nddondam, I fetch and bring it on my back, [Nin nddin, I fetch it; nin bimondan, I carry it on my back.) Biddssimishka, he is coming here in a canoe. [Bi, deno- ting approach; ondass, come here ; bimishka, he goes or comes in a canoe, boat, etc.) Nin bidadjim, I come and teli something. [Bi, denoting coming; nin dibadjim, I teli it.) And innumerable others. 27 422 CHAPTER IV. OF ADJECTIVES. An Adjective is adjected or added to a substantive to express its quality or manner of existing. The Otchipwe adjectives, like the English, are perfectly invariable, respecting gender, number and čase. So we say : Mino kwiwisens, a good boy ; mino ikmesensag, a good girl ; mino dodamowin, a good action. As long as they are adjectives, they are invariable ; but they are ordinarily transformed into verbs, and then they are conjugated. There are only a few adjectives proper in the Otchiptve language, they are almost ali adjective-vcrbs. 1. Here are some oj thefirst sort, adjectives proper. Mino, good. Geget mino inini kissaie; thy brother is in- deed a good man. Mino iktveban aw, o gi.-kitchi-nita-jaweniman widj’ani- shinaben; she was a good woman, she was very charit- able towards her neighbor. Mino akt na endaji-kitigeieg ? Is the soil good vvhere your field is? Matchi, bad, evil. Matohi manito ki wi-mimgonan matchi inendamouinan ; the evil špirit suggests us bad thoughts. Matchi anishinabeg anotch matchi ijiwebisiwinan od aianaioan, matchi nibi gaie o sagitonaiva ; bad Indians have many evil habits, and they also like liquor, (bad water.) Matchi abinodjiiag ; bad children. 423 Geti, old, ancient. Gete anishinabeg gi-kitchi-batdinoivag; the Indians of old were very numerous. Nin gete mastnaigan nin bidon, bekanak dash mijishi- kan; I bring my old book, please give me another one. Gete kitiganan; old fields. Oshki, new, recent; young. Oshki masinaigan ki bi-nan- dotamon; I come to ask thee for a new book. Oshki nagambnan ki wi-kikinoamoninim; I will teach you new hymns. Oshki abinodji, a young child. Oshki ininiwag, young men. Gwaiak, good, just, right, upright, straight.— Gwaidk inini, a good or just man; gumidk atawewininiwag, good traders. Geget kitchi apitendagivad gwaiak ijiwebisiwin ; a good upright conduct is greatly valuable. Kagige, eternal, everlasting.— Givaiak enamiadjig kagige bimadisiioin gijigong ta-minawag; to good Christians life everlasting vvill be given in heaven. Kagige minaivdnigosuvin dagomagad gijigong ; there is eternal joy in heaven. Ki dd-gotan iw kagige ishkote andmakamig; thou oughtst to fear that eternal fire in hell. Kitchitwa, holy, saint.— Kitchitwa Marie; Saint Mary. Kitchitwa Paul; Saint Paul. Kitchitwa Anamietmg- amig; the holy Church, Nibiwa, much, many. Nibiiea aki o gi-gishpinadon; he bought much land. Nibiwa odenawan o gi-ioabandanan gi-babamadisid; he saw many cities on his travel. Jesus nibiwa ketimagisinidjin o gi-jaioeniman, nibiiea 424 aiakosinidjin o gi-nodjimoan. Jesus did cbarity to many poor people, and healed many sick persons. Pangi, some, a little, a few.— Pangi jiwitagan mijishikan; give me some salt. Pangi opinin o gi-ashaman ; he gave him a few potatoes to eat. Pangi bimide mijiskinam, gi-dtezoan sa nin wassakwa- nendjiganinanin. Give us a little of your oil, for our lamps are gone out. Note. These two adjectives, nibiiva andpangi, are oftener adverbs than adjectives. 2. Here are some of the second sort, adjective-verbs. Ntbioakd aw inini; this is a wise man. Nita-anoki ate ikwe; this is an industrious woman. Neta-anokidjig kitigtwininiwag kitchi daniwag; indus¬ trious farmers are wealthy. Kakina ninidjanissag akosiviag, my children are ali sick. Bakade, he is hungry ; nibdgvie, he is thirsty ; kitimagisi, he is poor ; jatvcndagosi, he is happy. Kis sina, it is cold ; kijate, it is warm; anivatin, it is calm; nbdin, it is windy. Reniark 1. Where we use in English an adjective with the auxiliary verb to be, the Otchipvve language will em- ploy a verb, in which the adjective and the auxiliary verb are joined in one verb. For this reason we call these words adjective-verbs. So, for instance, in the above sen- tences, nibwakd, does not signify only tvise, but, he is vise; bakade, means not only hungry, but, he is hungry ; kissina, not only cold, but, it is cold, etc. Remark 2. These adjective-verbs are true verbs denoting quality, and are conjugated. They don’t belong ali to the 425 same Conjugation. The characteristical third person and the quality of the verb indicate the Conjugation to which an adjective-verb belongs. The enumeration of these verbs is the business of the Dictionary. Here m the Grammar we will merely give some Examples of adjective-verbs be- longing to different Conjugations 3 as : Nin wabishkis, I am white ; nin makateicis, I am black; nin jawendagos* I am happy ; nin sagiigos, 1 am ami- abie, (or loved.) To the L Conjugation. Nind agodjin, I am hanging; nin minoshin, I am well placed, (Iying down.) To the III. Conjugation. VVabishka, it is white ; bigoshka, it is broken ; icasseia, it is light; minosse, it is convenient, (itgoes well, fits well.) To the VIL Conjugation. IVabishkamagad, it is white; manadad, it is bad ; kash- kmdagwad, it is m.elancholy 3 sorrovvful. To the VIII. Conjugation. Gwandtchiwan, it is beautiful ; songan, it is strong ; oniji- shin, it is fair, useful. To the IX. Conjugation. DEGB.EES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. There are three degrees of qualification or comparison which can be expressed in adjectives, the Positive, Coni- parative and Superlative. In the Otchipwe language these degrees of comparison are expressed in the adjective- verbs, by placing before.them certain adverbs, as the Ex- amples of No. 2 and 3 wi'll show. * By the intercallation of the syllable wi, between the finale and s, in the last syllable of adjective-verbs ending in gos, the Otchipwe lan¬ guage gives to these verbs the signification of the influence of Divins Poioer or Goodness. F. i. Nin jawendagowis, I am happy through the goodncss of God. Nin sagiigowis, I am loved by God, (God loves me ) 426 1. The Positive. Adjectives in the Positive express the quality of objects simply, vvithout respect to other objects, as : Bekddisi, tabassenindiso gaie aw oshkinawe ; this young man is meek and humble, (without respect to the meek- ness and humility ofothers.) Giu>ashkwebiwag igiw anishinabeg; these Indians are drunk, (vvithout expressing whether they are more or less drunk than others.) Gwanatchiwan ki kitigan ; thy field is beautiful. Onijishin ow mashkiki ; this medicine is good. Note. Ali the adjectives proper, and the ajective-verbs of the Dictionary are in the Positive. 2. The Comparative. Adjectives in the Comparative express the quality of an object in a higher or lower degree than that of another ; and according to these two kinds of comparison, the com- paritive also is double,—the comparative of superiority, and the comparative of inferiority. z. The comparative of superiority is formed, in the Otchip- we language, by placing the adverbs awdshime or naivatch before an adjective-verb in the positive. These two adverbs have both the same signification ; they signifv more. Examples, Paul nawatch kitimi, John dash; Paul is more lazy than John. Awashime apitendagwad anamiemn, kakina dash aking endagog; religion is more worth than ali other things on earth. 427 Nin jaivendagos geget,awashime dash kin ki jaivendagos ; I ara happy indeed, but thou art more happy, (happier.) Naivatch gisiss toassesi, tibikigisiss dash; the • sun is brighter (more bright) than the moon. b. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing be- fore an adjeclive-verb the two adverbs naivatch pangi, which signify less, or not so much, as : Naivatch pangi kissinamagad nongom, bibinong dash; it is not so cold now than it was last vvinter. Nawdtch pangi akosi nongom, pitchinago ga-digid ; he is not so sick to-day, than he was yesterday. 3. The Superlative. Adjectives in the Superlative express the quality in a very high or loiv, or even in the highest or lowest degree in one object compared with one or more others ; and ac- cording to this distinction, the superlative also is double, relative and absolute. a. The relative superlative (which expresses a very high or low, but not the highest or lowest degree of ali,) is constructed by placing the adverbs apitchi, or kitchi, before an adjective-verb. These adverbs signify very, very mudi. Sometimes also, to give more strength to the superlative, both adverbs, apitchi and kitchi, are put together. Examples of this Superlative. Kitchi ginosi ato inini; this man is very tali, (but not the tallest of ali.) Apitdii mino bimadisi aw kiviivisens ; this is a very good- natured boy. 428 Kitchi minioendagosucag ogoio abinodjiiag ; these are very amiable children. Apitchi kitchi akosi; he is extremely sick. Apitchi kitchi kitimagisi netd-giwashkwebid; a drunkard is extremely miserable. b. The absolute superlative, (which expresses the highest or lowest degree of ali,) is constructed by placing before an adjective-verb, the adverb mamami, which signifies together, or, at ali. (In the Change it sounds maiamaun.) ExAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE SUPERLATIVE. Mi aw maiamawi-ginosid inini ; this man is the tallest of ali. Aw kwiwisens mamami nibmaka endashimad nin kikinoama- kanag; this boy is the wisest of ali my scholars. Maidmami-niganisid Kitchi-mekatewikwanaie ; the Sove- reign Pontiff, (the highest or foremost Bishop.) Maidmami-Ishpendagosid; the Most-High. Remark. By the right use of the above adverbs, the strictest distinction of the degrees of comparison can be expressed. It must, however, be observed, that in com- mon speaking the adverb apitchi is often employed to de- note the absolute superlative. F. i. Kije-Manito apitchi kijeicadisi, apitchi gaie gmaiak ijiv/ebisi ; God is most merciful and most just, (in the highest degree, of course.) 429 C H A P T E R V. OF NUMBERS. Numbers, (which are properly adjectives, adverbs and verbs,) serve to express exactly the quantity and succession of objects that can be counted. There are in the Otchipwe language five distinct sorts of numbers. These sorts of numbers I have arranged here according to their derivation from each other. This order is unusual in Grammars, but natural in the Otchipwe Grammar. (Nij, nenij. Nijing, nenijing, eko-nijing.) 1. Cardinal numbers, which express an exact quantity of objects without any report. 2. Distributive numbers, which denote distribution and repartition. 3. Multiplying numbers, which indicate reiteration or repetion. 4. Multiplying-distributive numbers, which combine the idea of multiplication and distribution in one expression. 5. Ordinat numbers, which mark the order and succes¬ sion of objects. 430 CARDINAL NUMBERS. Bejig, .... Nij, z Nissrn, .... Ninin, - - - ’ Nanan, - Ningotwdsswi, ... Nljwasswi, ... Nishwdsswi, ... Jangassvd, ... Midasswi, Midassvsi ashi bejig, Midassivi ashi nij, Midasswi ashi nisswi, “ niivin, “ nanan, “ ningotwasswi, “ nijwasswi, “ nislmassivi, ” jangasswi, Nijtana, - - . Nijtana, ashi. bejig, “ nissivi, Nissimidana, . . . Nissimidana ashi bejig, Nimidana, Nanimidana, Ningotwassimidana, Nijwassimidana, Nislmdssimidana, Jangassimidana, Ningotioak, one. two. three. four. five. six. seven. eight. nine. ten. eleven. twelve. thirteen. fourteen. fifteen. sixteen, seventeen. eighteen, nineteen. twenty. 21. 22. 23. 30. 31. 40. 50. 60. 70. 80. 90. 100. 431 Ningotwak ashi bejig, . . - “ nij - “ midassivi, - “ midasswi ashi bejig, ‘‘ “ ningotioašsioi, “ nijtana, “ nijtana ashi nanan, Nijtoak, - “ ashi nanimidana ashi nij, - Nissivdk, - - - - - Niwak, - - - - - Ncmwak, - Ningotviassioak, - . . - Nijwasswak, - Nishwasswak, - Jangasswak, - Midassivak, . . . - Midassivak ashi bejig, “ midassioi, - “ nijivak ashi nissimidana, Nijing midassivak, . . - Nissing “ Niwing “ Naning “ Ningotioatching midassivak, Nijivatching “ Nishiodtching “ Jangatching “ Middtching “ Midatching ashi dbiding midassivak, Middtching ashi abiding midassivak ashi ningot- wak ashi midassioi ashi bejig, Middtching ashi nijing midassivak, “ nissing “ ‘‘ nishivatching ,l Middtching ashi jangatching midassivak ashi nij- uassivak ashi nishivassimidana. ashi ningo- tivassivi, 101. 102. 110. 111. 116. 120. 125. 200. 252. 300. 400. 500. 600. 700. 800. 900. 1,000. 1,001. 1,010. 1,230. 2,000. 3,000. 4,000. 5,000, 6,000. 7,000. 8,000. 9,000. 10,000. 11,000. 11,111. 12,000. 13,000. 18,000. 19,786; 432 Nijtana dasso midasswak, - - 20,000. “ ashi nanan, - 20,005. “ ashi midassivak, 21,000. “ ashi midassivak ashi ningotivak ashi miiddssivi ashi nij, 21,112. Nijtana dasso midassivak ashi ndning midassivak, 25,000. “ nishivdtching mi- Ete., etc. Remark 1. To express 2000, they also say: nijtanak; 3000, nissimidanak; 4000, nimidanak; 5000, nanimida- nak ; 6000, ningotivdssimidanak; 7000, nijivassimidanak; 8000, nishivdssimidanak ; 9000, jdngassimidandk. This is the same as : twenty hundred, thirty hundred, forty hun- dred, etc. Remark 2. In counting from eleven up to twenty, they ordinarily omit midasswi, and only say : ashi bejig, eleven; ashi nij, twelve ; ashi nissivi, thirteeen, etc. Remark 3. In common quick counting they say jang, instead of jangassivi, nine ; and kivetch, instead of midass- wi, ten. This is however not to be imitated. EXAMPLES. Adam, nitdni inini, jdngassicak ashi nissimidana dasso li- 433 P bon gi-bimadisi orna aking. Adam, the first man, lived nine hundred and thirty years on earth. Nissioak ashi ningotioassimidana ashi nanan gijigadon, mi bejig kikinonowin. 365 days make a year. Aiodshime ndnioak masinaiganan nind aidnan. 1 have more than 500 books. Nimidana dassb tibdigan kitagigin nin gi-gishpinadon, nijtana ashi ndno tibdigan dash manitowegin. I have bought forty yards of calico, and twenty-five yards of cloth. Nijo bibon gi-anoki, mi etash ndnwak dasstvabik jbniian gi-gashkiad. He has worked two years and earned 500 dollars. Naning midassmak ininitoan Jesus o gi-ashaman pagwada- kamig, ndnan dash eta pakwejiganan o gi-aioan. Jesus fed 5000 men in the desert with only five loaves of bread. Debeniminang Jesus nissimidana ashi nisso bibon gi-bima¬ disi aking. Onr Lord Jesus lived 33 years on earth. Ningiviss midassogiean eta gi-bimadisi, mi dash gijigong gi-ijad. My son lived only ten days, and went to heaven. Nisswi kwlwisensag keidbi nind aidwag. I have yet three boys. Remark 1. The Cardinal. numbers from one to ten un- dergo a little changebefore substantives signifying measure, of time or of other things; and these substantives always remain in the singular number. Instead of bejig, nij, nis- swi, etc., we say before those substantives : ningb, ntjo, nisso, nio, ndno, ningotioasso,nijwasso, nishw&sso,jangasso, midasso. Some instances of this you have seen in the above Esamples, and I will give you some more here. Ningb gisiss nin gi-anonig. He hired me for a month, or for one month. 434 Kamin na ki da-mijissi ningo tibdigan manitoivegin ? Wouldst thou not give me a yard of cloth. Nijo bibon gi-aia Moniang. He was two years in Mon¬ treal. Nisso tibdigan papagiioaidnigin ki minin. I give thee three yards of cotton. Gega ningotivdsso gisiss gi-inendi. Ile was absent nearly six months. Midasso tibdigan ashi niwin, or midasso tibaigan ashi nib tibdigan, or ashi nio tibdigan. Fourteen yards. Midasso bibon ashi ndno bibon nin gi-danis Wawiidta- nong. I lived fifteen years in Detroit. Remark 2. Cardinal numbers from ten to nineteen, when before subatantives denoting measure, are expressed in three manners, viz : 1. Midasso bibon ashi bejig, eleven years. “ nij, twelve years. “ nanan, fifteen years, etc. 2. Midasso bibon ashi ningo bibon, eleven years. “ gisiss “ nijo gisiss, twelve months. “ dibaigan ashi jangasso dibaigan, nineteen bush- els, etc. 3. Ashi ningo bibon, eleven years. Ashi nisso dibaigan, thirteen yards, bush., feet., etc. Ashi nano gisiss, fifteen months, etc. Note. These three manners of expressing numbers are to be applied also to the subsequent Remarks; mutatis mu- tandis. Remark 3. When the Cardinal numbers before substan- tives denoting measure, are expressed in round numbers, twenty, thirty, fifty, hundred, thousand, etc., the word das- 435 so * is put betvveen the number and the substantive, this latter remaining invariably in the singular. But when num- bers under ten are joined to the round numbers, the rules of the foregoing Remark take plače. You have already seen some cases of this in the above Examples, and here are some more. Gwai.dk nijtana dasso bibon gi-bimadisi nindanissiban. My deceased daughter has lived just twenty years. Nimidana dasso tibdigan siniba nin gi-gishpinana. I bought forty yards of ribbon. Nijwak dasso tibdbishkodjigan anokadjigan o bimbndan. He carries on his back 200 pounds of goods. Wika nongom awiia ningotwalc dasso bibon bimadisi; gaidt dash dnind ningotwdsswak, anind dash aw- dshime jdngasswak dasso bibon gi-bimddisiwag. Novv- a-days seldom a person lives a hundred years; but in ancient times some lived 600, and some upvvards of 900 years. Nimisltbmissiban ningbtvak dasso bibon ashi nijo bibon gi-bimadissi. My deceased grand-father lived a hundred and two years. Nissimidana ashi nano tibdbishkodjigan pakwejigan- an nin gi-ashamig. He gave me thirty-five pounds of flour. Remark 4. When the substantive following a Cardinal number, from one to nineteen, signifies objects of wood, Stone, metal, etc., or when days are mentioned, the Cardinal num¬ ber is connected with certain syllables alluding to the ma¬ terial, or shape, of the object expressed by the substantive : according to the follotving scheme. Note. The word dasso signifies nothing in itself; it is only used iti connection with words signifying measure, of time or of other things. 436 a. With the syllable gwan, to indicate days ; as : Nijogioan nin gi-bimosse. I walked two days. Ja'iawa nissbgivan katoin wissinissi. He has eaten no- thing now three days. Ndnogwan gi-aid omd. He stayed here five days. Niogioan, nishwdssogwan, midassogioan ; midassogioan ashi nijogioan, or only : ashi nijogioan, etc. To exprets one dag, they will say, ningo gijig. b. With the syllable ssag, to denote wooden vessels, such as barrels, kegs, boxes, etc., as: Ningotossag manddminag nin ga-gishpinanag. I vvill buy a barrel of corn. Nijossag paktvejigansan od aiaioan. He has two barrels of crackers. Jangassossag sagaiganan. Nine kegs of nails. Nissossag joniia. Three boxes of money. Niossag, ndnossag, midassossag; midassossag ashi be- jig, etc. c. With the syllable iceg, to mark dothing materials, as: Bejigweg icaboian. Oneblanket. Nljioeg ivaboianan, niioeg dash papagiioaianan, nissioeg dash moshnoeg, mi minik ga-dibaamagoian. My pay consisted in two blankets, four shirts and three handker- chiefs. Namoeg, ningotwassweg, midassweg; midassweg ashi bejig. . : . d. With the syllables watig to allude to wood or lumber ; as : Kawin ganage bejlgwatig nabdgissag nind aidicassi. I have not a single board. 437 ^Midassivatig missan btdon. Bring ten sticks of wood. Nissiodtig abwin. Three paddles. Ningotwasswatig ajeboianan. Six oars. Nijioatig, nanivatig, riijwasswatig; midasswatig ashi bejig, midasswatig ashi niwin; ashi nanwatig. ; With the syllables wdbik, to signify metal, stane, or glass; as: Bejigioabik joniia ki ga-dibaamon. I will paythee one doli ar. Midassieabik ivassetchiganabikon. Ten window-glasses, (ten panes of window-glass.) Nisswdbik kijabikisiganan. Three stoves. Ndnwabik jigwanabikog nin binag. I bring with me five grindstones. Nlioabik, nishwasswdbik; middsswabik ashi nijzoabik, or, midassviabik ashi nij, or only ashi nijwabik, ashi nissndbik-, . . . f. With the syllables minag, to designate globular ob- jects, as i Bejigominag tchiss ganage ashaniakan. Give him at least one turnip. Nissominag mishiminag ki ga-minin. I will give thee three apples. Niominag opinig. Four potatoes. Middssominag anivin. Ten musket-balls. Midassominag ashi bejig; middssominag ashi nij; mi- dassominag ashi niominag; ashi namminag, ashijangass- ominag. • There are many other syllables of this description in the Otchipwe language, which are attached to Cardinal num- bers to allude to some particular object. 28 438 / Here are again some of them. g. wewan, alluding to a pair or pairs, as : Ningotwewan makisinan, a pair of shoes ; nijwe,wan, nisswewan, niwewan ; nanwewan pijikivag, five pair or yoke of oxen. Midasswewan ashi bejig ; midasswewan ashi nivgotwasswewan ; ashi jangasswewan, nineteen pair. h. oshkin, to allude to a bag or sack, as : Ningotoshkin opinig, a bag of potatoes ; nijbshkin, nis- soshkin, nanoshkin; nijvassoshkin mishiminag, seven bags of apples; midassoshkin ashi nanan, fifteen bags. ?. bnag, to allude to a canoe, boat, vessel, etc., as : Ningotbnag, nijonag ; nionag tchimanan nin uabandan- an, I see four canoes ; nanonag; midassonag nabik- wanan, ten vessels; midassonag ashi nanonag ishkote- naibikmanan gi-nibomagadon, fifteen steamboats have perished. j. nik, alluding to the outstretched arms of a man measur- ing a fathom, as : Ningotonik, nijonik, nissonik, nionik, nanonik ; midass- onik biminakman, ten fathoms of cord ; midassonik ashi ningotwassonik, sixteen fathoms. k. sid, alluding to the measurement by the foot, as : Ningotosid, nijosid, nissosid, nanosid, nishioassosid; midassosid, ten feet; midassosid ashi' bejig; midassosid ashi nijosid; ashi nissosid, thirteen feet. l. wdkwoagan, alluding to the measurement by the span, as: Ningotwdkwoagan, nijwakwoagan, nisswakwoagan; mi- dasswdkwoagan, ten span ; midassiodkiooagan ashi nan- wdkwoagan, fifteen span. 439 m. nindj, alluding to a finger, for the measurement by the inch, as: Ningotonindj,one inch; nijonindj, nissonindj; jangass- onindj, nine inches; midassonindj ashi bejig, eleven inches. Remark 5. The same syllables are also annexed to the interpolation-word dasso, under the circumstances referred to in the preceding Rem. 3., when the Cardinal numbers before the substantive above described are round numbers ; as twenty, thirty, forty, eighty, hundred, thousand.—The follovving Examples will illustrate this Remark. c. gwan, nijtana dassogiuan, twenty days ; n&nimidana dassogtoan, fifty days. h. ssag, ningotwdk dassossag bimide, a hundred barrels of oil; nissimidana dassossag gigo, thirty barrels of fish. c. weg, ningoticassimidana dassweg toaboianan, sixty blan- kets ;■ nimidana dasswig adbpomniginon, forty table- cloths. d. watig, nijwassimidana dassmdtig gljikag, seventy ce- dars; nijtana dassiodtlg abajin, twenty lodge-poles. e. va.bik, nishwdssiniidana dassieabik joniia, eighty dol- lars; middsswak dasstedbik sagaiganan, one thousand nails. f. minag, nissimidana dassbminag anindjimin, thirty peas; jdngassimidana dassominag ogimssimanan, ninety pump- kins. And so also with the other svllablcs; dasswiwan, dass- oshkin, dassbnag, dassonlk,, dassosid, dasswakwoagan, das- soniadj. Numbers under ten,, attached to those round numbers, will follow the rules of Remark 2. As, nijtana dasso- gwan ashi nijOgtcan ; ningotioak dassossag ashi ndnossag, etc., etc. 440 The manner of expressing age, the day of the month, and the hour, is another peculiarity and difficulty of the Otchip- we language, which we have to consider here. Manner of enpressing age. 1. If the age of a child is under a month, it is expressed in the same manner as the day of the month, (p. 442.) F. i. Anin endassogmanagisid aw abinodji ? How many days is this child old '! Nijogwanagisi, nissbgwanagisi, nio- gioanagisi, midussogvanagisi, etc. . . It is two, three, four, ten days old, etc. . . 2. If the age of a child is to be expressed in months, they say thus: Anin endasso-gisisswagisid aw abinodji ? How mauy months is this child old ? Ningo-gisisswagisi, nljo-gis- isswagisi, nio-gisisstoagisi, ningotivdsso-gisissivagisi, mi- ddsso-gisisswagisi ashi nisswi, nijtana dasso-gisisswagi- si ashi nij, etc. . . . It is one, tvvo, four, six, thirteen, twenty-tvvo months old, etc. 3. If the age to be expressed is not over ten years, they connect the Cardinal number with the word bibon, (which signifies winter or year,) and make a verb of it; thus: Anin endasso-bibonagisiian ? Nin nishwasso-bibonagis ; How many years art thou old? I am eight years old. Anin endasso-bibonagisid ? Midasso-bibonagisi. How many years is he (she) old? He (she) is ten years old. Ogbw nijbdeiag kamin mashi nano-bibonagisissiwag; these tvvins are not yet five years old. 4. If the age is from ten to nineteen years, it can be ex- pressed in three different manners; thus : Middsso-bibbnagisi ashi nio bibbnagisi, or middsso-bi¬ bbnagisi ashi nlurin, or ashi nio-bibonagisi; he is fourteen years old. (In the first person the second manner is usu* 441 al; as, nin midasso-bibonagis ashi nij ; nin midasso-bi¬ bonagis ashi nanan, etci) 5. If the age is over nineteen years, and expressed in round numbers, they put dasso before bibon, and frame the vvhole into a verb. Nin nimidana dasso-bibonagis, or nimidana nin dasso-bibonagis; I am forty years old. Nanimidana dasso-bibonagisi; he is fifty years of age. Aiodshime nljtana ddsso-bibonagisiwag nishimeiag; rny brothers are over twenty years old. 6. If the age is upu: ar ds of twenty years, and expressed in mixed numbers, it is given as follows, viz : Nljtana dasso-bibonagisi ashi niwin; he is twenty-four years old. Nin nanimidana dasso-bibonagis ashi nissivi; I am fifty-three years old. Nljtana dasso-bibonagisi nin bebejigogaujim, ashi nij; my horse is twenty-two years old. Manner of expressing the day of the month. The Otchipwe names of the twelve months or moons : 1. Manito-gisiss, the moon of the špirit, (January.) 2. Namebini-gisj,ss, the moon of suckers, (fish,) (Feb- ruary. 3. Ondbani-gisiss, the moon of the crust on the snow, (March.) 4. Bebokivedagiming-gisiss,tiie moon of the breaking of snow shoes, (April.) 5. Wdbigon-gisiss, the moon of flowers and blooms, (May.) 6. Odeimini-gisiss, the moon of strawberrieš, (heart-berries) (June.) 7. Miskmmini-gisiss, the moon of raspberries, (red-ber- ries,) (July.) 8. Min-gisiss, the moon of whortleberries, (August.) 9. Manominike-gisiss, the moon of the gathering of wild rice, (September.) 442 10. Bindknri-gisiss, the moon of the falling of leaves, (Oct.) 11. Gashkddino-gisiss, the moon of freezing, (November.) 12. Manitc-gisissons, the little moon of the špirit, (Decr.) The word gisiss, which means sun and moon, is an ani- mate substantive.* The question after the date is in Otchipve thus : Anin endassogwanagisid gisiss nongom ? How many days is the moon old to-day ? Or, anin epiteli gisissowagak 1 How late is the moon 1 The ansvver is, for the first day : Nongom mddaginso manito-gisiss, namebini-gisiss, etc.; to-day the month of January, February, etc., begins to be counted. For the following days they say : Such a month, or moon, is so and so many days old. F. i. Manito-gisiss nongom n'ijogwanagisi, to-day is the2dof Jan. “ nissogtvanagisi, tc-day is the3d Jan. “ niogwanagisi, to-day is the 4th Jan. “ ndnogwanagisi, tc-day is the 5th Jan. Namebini-gisiss nongom nishwassogwanagisi, to-day is the 8th. of February. “ middssogwanagisi, to-day is the lOth. ofFebruary. “ midassogwanagisi ashi bejig, to- day is the 1 Ith. of February. Ondbani-gisiss nongom ashi nijogvanagisi, to-day is the 1 Ith. of March. “ nijogwanagisi, “ 13th do. “ ningotwassogwanagisi, to-day is the 16th. of March. Wabigon-gisisš nongom ashi nijwassogwdnagisi, to-day is , »the 17th. of May, “ jangassogivanagisi^o-decj is 19th of May. *When they want to express the distinction between these two lu- minanes, they will say gisiss for the sun, and tibikigisiss, (night.sun,) for the moon. 443 Wdbigon-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogioanagisi, to-day is the 20th of May, Odiimin-gisiss nongom nijtana, dassogioanagisi ashi bejig, to-day is the 21st of June. * Odeimm-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogioanagisi ashi nij, to-day is the 22d of June. Binakwi-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogioanagisi ashi nnaan, to-day is the 25th of October. Bindkioi-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogioanagisi ashi jang- assioi, to-day is the 29th of October. Manito-gisiss nongom nissimidana dassogioanagisi, to-day is the 30th of December. Manito-gisiss nongom nissimidana dassogioanagisi ashi bejig, to-day is the 31st of December. In writing the date in letters, etc., the name of the plače and ofthe month is first vvritten, and then the day and year in figures; thus : Wikweddng, gashkadino-gisiss 23, 1849. L’Anse, November the 23d, 1849. Wawiiatanong, min-gisiss 6, 1850. Detroit, August the 6th, 1850. Manner of erpressing the hour. The Indians have no proper term for hour in their lan- guage. They call it dibaigan, which signifies measure in general, and is applied to several divisions of time and other things. It means : mile, acre, bushel, yard, foot, etc. Applied to the twelve hours it is used thus : For the question : Anin endasso-dibaiganeg ? What o’clock is it ? Or, Anin epitch gijigak ? (epiteli tibikak ?) How late is it in the day ? (in the night ?) For the ansioers: Ntngo dibaigan, it is one o’clock ; nijo dibaigan, it is two o’clock ; nijo dibaigan ashi ubita, it is half-past tvvo; 444 nisso dibaigan, it is three o’clock ; nio „ ,, four „ nano ,, „ five „ nishwasso„ „ eight „ midasso „ ,, ten „ midasso dibaigan ashi abita, it is half-past ten ; midasso dibaigan ashi bejig, it is eleven o’clock ; midasso dibaigan ashi nij, it is twelve o’clock. Instead of midasso dibaigan ashi nij, they commonly say : nawokwe, or, ndwokwemagad, it is noon; abita-tibi- kad, it is midnight. 2. Distributive Nvmbers. 445 neningotwak - - 100 neningotwak ashi bejig, 101 nenijwa'c - - - 200 jejangassioak, - - 900 memidasstoak, - - 1000 nijing memida.sswak, - 2000 nissing memidasswak, - 3000 midatching ashi abid- 11000 ing memidassioak, midatching ashi nij- 12000 ing memidassrcak, nij/Mia dassing me- 20000 midassioak, ev. tim. 100 each, or to eac „ 101 „ „ 200 „ „ 900 „ „ 1000 „ „ 2000 „ „ 3000 „ • „ 11000 „ „ 12000 „ „ 20000 „ ningotivak dassing me 100000 „ 100000 „ midassvak, Ete. etc. Examfles. Kakina ogow ininitoag bebejig mitigotchiman gi-minawag. A boat was given to each of these men. Neniivin masindiganan od aianaivan. They have four books each. Naningim bi-ijan, nenij dash bi-widjiw kidji-kwiwisensag. Come often, and bring every time two other boys with thee. Anishindbeg nenijweg icaboianan gi-dibaamawaw> 9 „ » 10 10 „ 448 449 Examples. Gegtt matclii kwiwisensish maham; nlnijing, nenissing gaie o gi-papakiteowan iniw widji-kwiwisensan. This is indeed a bad boy; he štručk twice or three times each of these his fellow-boys. Nij ningwissag nenanig gi-ijawag odenang. Two of my sons went to town five times each. Nissing bi-ijaioag endasso-gijigadinig, neniwing dash mo- jag nin kikinoamawag. They come three times a day; and I teach them their lessons four times every time (they come.) Nij masinaiganan nind aidnan, nenljwatching dashjaigiea nin gi-wabandanan. I have two books, and I have read them already seven times each. Nenissing nin gi-ganonag. I have spoken three times to each, (to every one of them.) Nissioi nind inawemaganag wdssa aiawag, nenishwdtching dash jaigwa nin madjibiamawag. Three of my relatives are far off, and I have already written eight times to each. 5. Ordinal Numbers. Netamissi.ng, or nitam, the first, or first; eko-nijing, the second, or secondly ; eko-nissing, the third, or thirdly; eko~niwing, the fourth, or fourthly; eko-nananing, the fifth, or fifthly; eko-ning